Enclosure

QUALITY CONTROL
AP-002/BD0993A Rev.0
ENCLOSURE 12
TO THE SPECIAL CONTRACT CONDITIONS
QUALITY CONTROL
TEST RECORDING, CONTROLS AND INSPECTION

PROCEDURES AND FORMS
ATTACHMENTS:
STD No. STD Title Revision

RR02_CX3_X00-X301_00_NÂ_OTH Construction Quality Control Requirements C00
Preparation of Construction Dossier for
RR02_CX3_X00-X320_00_NÂ_OTH C00
Mechanical Completion
RR02_CX3_X00-X303_00_NÂ_OTH Site Quality Control - Lifting Works C00
RR02_CX3_X00-X306_00_NÂ_OTH Site Quality Control – Tanks erection C00
RR02_CX3_X00-X307_00_NÂ_OTH Site Quality Control – MW Piping C00
RR02_CX3_X00-X308_00_NÂ_OTH Site Quality Control – MW Structural Steel C00
RR02_CX3_X00-X304_00_NÂ_OTH Site Quality Control – Pressure Vessel C00
RR02_CX3_X00-X309_00_NÂ_OTH Site Quality Control – MW Welding & NDT C00
RR02_CX3_X00-X310_00_NÂ_OTH Site Quality Control - Equipment C00
RR02_CX3_X00-X311_00_NÂ_OTH Site Quality Control – Electrical Installation C00
RR02_CX3_X00-X312_00_NÂ_OTH Site Quality Control – Instrument Installation C00
RR02_CX3_X00-X313_00_NÂ_OTH Site Quality Control – Insulation works C00
RR02_CX3_X00-X314_00_NÂ_OTH Site Quality Control – Painting works C00
Site Quality Control - Control & Measuring
RR02_CX3_X00-X315_00_NÂ_OTH C00
of Testing Equipment
Site Quality Control - Modif/Changes/NCR
RR02_CX3_X00-X316_00_NÂ_OTH C00
& Technical Query
RR02_CX3_X00-X317_00_NÂ_OTH Site Quality Control – Punch List Management C00
RR02_CX3_X00-X322_00_NÂ_OTH Site Material Preservation C00
RR02_CX3_X00-X321_00_NÂ_OTH Site Material Management C00
CLIENT: OMV PETROM

PROJECT: PWCP Page 1 of 1
30/10/17 M.Rizzo M.Mandelli
CBD Data/ Intocmit/ Verificat/
SITE QUALITY Date Designer Checked
CONTROL
Preparation of
construction dossier Pag/Pag. 1 din/from 12
for mechanical
completion
SITE QUALITY CONTROL

Preparation of construction dossier for mechanical completion
AFWI DWG N°: BD0955A- Rev: C00 APPROVED FOR

CONSTRUCTION
07A0.04
DWG. REV. DATE
M. Rizzo M. Mandelli
SIGNATURE: A. MANTOVANI
Prepared Verified Approved
04
03
02
01
00 Issued for Comments 30/10/2017 M. Rizzo M. Mandelli
Rev/Rev. Denumirea modificarii/Change description Data/Date Intocmit/Designer Verificat/Checked
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
AMEC FOSTER
WHEELER ITALIANA S.r.l.
Nr. proiect / Project no. Nr. desen / Drawing no. Rev/Rev
7 3 8 7 8 1 X 0 0 - X 3 2 0 0 0
Via S. Caboto, 15 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 30 31 80
20094 Corsico
(Milano) ITALY
Intreprindere/Client OMV PETROM Cod instalatie/ Plant code Orig. F
doc.
Instalatia/Plant CX3 7 8 1 8 0 0 0 0 1 4
Scara/Scale Denumire document/Document name

Preparation of construction dossier for mechanical completion
EACH REVISION SUPERSEDES PREVIOUS ISSUE. CHANGES ARE INDICATED IN MARGIN BY THE REVISION NUMBER OR A VERTICAL LINE.
THIS DOCUMENT IS THE PROPERTY OF AMEC FOSTER WHEELER BIMAS AND HOLDERS CERTIFY THAT DISCLOSURE HAS BEEN LAWFULLY MADE TO THEM AND THAT ANY REPRODUCTION USE OR DISCLOSURE SHALL BE SUBJECT TO SPECIFIC PRIOR AUTHORISATION.
JOB SPEC : 1BD0955A-07A0.04
PAGE : 2 of 11
REV. : C00
DATE : 30 October 2017
SITE QUALITY CONTROL - Preparation of

construction dossier for mechanical completion
CONTENTS
I. SCOPE
II. DEFINITION
III. REFERENCE
IV. PROCEDURE
V. ATTACHMENTS
THIS DOCUMENT IS THE PROPERTY OF AMEC FOSTER WHEELER BIMAS AND HOLDERS CERTIFY THAT DISCLOSURE HAS BEEN LAWFULLY MADE TO THEM AND THAT ANY REPRODUCTION USE OR DISCLOSURE SHALL BE SUBJECT TO SPECIFIC PRIOR
AUTHORISATION.
PAGE : 3 of 11
REV. : C00

I. SCOPE
The scope of this procedure is to provide the user the minimum

requirements for:
 MECHANICAL COMPLETION (MC)

 COMPILING OF THE CONTENTS OF THE TURNOVER OF THE
SYSTEM DOSSIER
II. DEFINITION
This section is not intended to be an exhaustive listing of all

abbreviation, acronyms, terms and definitions applicable to all aspects
across a typical project, but instead an extract of the important ones deemed
to be essential in the understanding of this document and mechanical
completion in general.
Terms,
Definitions & Additional Notes
Acronyms &
Abbreviations
Is a discrete part of the plant, which enables Pre-
Commissioning to be performed in a sequential
Turnover
manner. These are defined on marked-up
System
boundary drawings e.g. P&IDs, One Line
(TOS)
Drawings, Block Diagrams etc.
Test Package Dossier of all documents, certificates relative to a
(TP) specific discipline of a Turnover System.
A CPL is the result of a joint punch listing of the
Construction scope of a specific Turn Over system (TOS). The
Punch-List items are detailed, referenced to item / cable / tag /
(CPL) isometric / drawing and categorised as A, B or C as
appropriate (se JS 07A2.16).
Turnove A dossier which summaries the Turnover System
r status and comprises: what is described in Chapter
Dossier III.D
(TOD)
RFSU Ready For Start-UP
III. REFERENCE
1BD0874Z -07A2.00 Construction QC requirements
AUTHORISATION.
PAGE : 4 of 11
REV. : C00

IV. PROCEDURE
A) GENERAL
The MC philosophy is based on the identification of System &

Subsystem, which can be Mechanically Completed independently.
The execution of the work will be done as per Project Job Specification
(Inspection Test Plan included) revised and properly adapted as per
Project requirements.
B) PROCESS W ORK
FLOW
Typical workflow is here below represented:
It should be checked and approved by FWI QA/QC Site Coordinator and then
filed in TOS dossier and issued officially to Client.
AUTHORISATION.
PAGE : 5 of 11
REV. : C00

C) PIPING TEST PACKAGES FLOW CHART

SUBCONTRACTOR EPC CONTRACTOR FWI OWNER
AUTHORISATION.
PAGE : 6 of 11
REV. : C00

D) DEFINITION OF TURNOVER SYSTEM NOT IDENTIFIED THROUGH

P&ID
As far as noted some Systems (e.g. Roads, Steel Structure, Lighting

system, Building, etc) cannot be identified through a P&ID, and then they
should be considered independently.
FWI QA/QC Coordinator will assign the Code directly at Site in

coordination with the field Project Engineer. To avoid any kind of
numeration/code overlapping, they should not have any relation with the
code assigned to the P&IDs TOS.
The System not included in the group previously mentioned will be codified
as the TOS identified by P&ID. As per Procedure, WI-BA-CSP006
Paragraph
5.2.3 the H.O Commissioning Coordinator will officially issue a
compressive list with all the System, Sub-System subdivided into discipline.
E) TURNOVER DOSSIER- DEFINITION A ND

CONTENT
On completion, the Contractor offers each System or Sub-System package

for construction final punch listing.
During the erection work and then testing, the QA/QC Coordinator shall
prepare and archive, in dedicated dossier, all the relative documentation
about them. (Ref. WI-BA-CSP112 Paragraph. 5.1.2)
Turnover Engineer shall prepare the dossier for each of these three
mainly groups:
 System & Subsystem identified through a P&ID

 System & Subsystem do not identified/related to any P&ID’s
 Welding Book (WPS, WPQR & PQR), NDT reports
Dossier as per a) and b) above should be prepared with following

sections:
AUTHORISATION.
PAGE : 7 of 11
REV. : C00

Section Reference: Format

Test Packages:
Cover Sheet 07A0.04 07A0.04-01
P&ID
Component List 07A0.04 07A0.04-02
Matrix QC Form 07A0.04 07A0.04-03
Document of Acceptance
Mechanical Acceptance
07A0.04 MC.001
Certificate
System Acceptance
07A0.04 MC.002
Certificate
07A2.01-
Civil CV series
02
07A2.07-
Structural steel CV series
02
Piping
Mechanical completion for 07A2.06-
PI.010
piping work 02
P&ID with marking of
hydraulic circuit
Isometric and welding map
SKL (sketch layout)
07A2.08-
Weld and NDT report WE.025A
02
07A2.08-
Material Traceability report WE.025B
02
Piping hydrostatic test 07A2.06-
PI.030
report 02
07A2.06-
Orifice & plate report PI.015
02
07A2.13-
Painting completion PT.001
02
07A2.12-
Insulation completion IS.001
02
AUTHORISATION.
PAGE : 8 of 11
REV. : C00


07A2.06-
Chemical cleaning PI.045
02
07A2.06-
Pipe work reinstatement check list PI.050
02
Equipment
07A2.03-
Internal vessel certificate PV.015
02
07A2.03-
Vessel closure certificate PV.020
02
07A2.03-
Pressure tower acceptance PV.001
02
Vertical / Horizontal control 07A2.03-
PV.005
report 02
Pressure vessel hydraulic 07A2.03-
PV.010
test 02
07A2.04-
Heat exchanger HE series
02
07A2.05-
Tanks TK series
02
07A2.09-
Rotating equipment EQ series
002
07A2.13-
Painting completion PT.001
02
07A2.12-
Insulation completion IS.001
02
07A2.10-
Electrical EL series
03
07A2.11-
Instrumentation IN series
03
07A2.16-
Construction Punch List PL.001
01
07A2.16-
Final Punch List PL.005
01
07A2.17-
HVAC System Works HV series
02
07A2.18-
Building Works BL series
02
07A2.19-
Cooling Tower CT series
02
AUTHORISATION.
PAGE : 9 of 11
REV. : C00


07A2.20-
Heaters HE series
02
07A2.21-
Refractory Lining LI series
02
07A2.22-
MW Boiler BO series
02
F) MC CONSTRUCTION Punch-listing
To obtain and to notify the Ready For Start Up (RFSU) to the Client,
FWI QA/QC Coordinator will issue an Over All Final Punch List that will
include all the discipline with still open C punch items.
This Punch List will be attached to the Notification of RFSU, and filed
in dedicated records (ref. JS 07A2.16).
G) FILING SYSTEM FOR QC

OFFICE
Filing system to be in place

for:
 Copies of applicable Job Specifications

 SubContractor ITP’s
 SubContractor Welding Book
 NCR
 TOS definition
 TP folder
 Calibration register
 Approved signature
 Punch List
The Responsibility of the above documentation is duty of: Field QC

Coordinator, Field Project Engineer and Construction Manager.
H) PED
DOCUMENTATION
The following is the suggested control matrix to make sure that

required documentation would be easily retrievable to assemble the PED
dossier (by PED Eng.):
AUTHORISATION.
PAGE : 10 of 11
REV. : C00

Items & recommended actions Responsibility Remark

With FMC up to
Material traceability for piping and fittings FQC
warehouse closure
Material traceability for equipment Doc. Control Document Control
Instrument (CV, MOV and PSV) FQC TO Dossier instr. sect.
WPS / WPQR WI Welding book
Qualified welders WI Welding book
Qualified NDE operators WI Welding book
NDE procedures WI Welding book
PWHT / HT procedures WI Welding book
Piping spool fabrication procedure
FQC Subcontractor ITP
(by subcontractors)
Pressure test procedure (by subcontractors) FQC Subcontractor ITP
Loop test procedures (by subcontractors) FQC / SPV Subcontractor ITP
Welding material certificates WI Welding book
Piping ITP (subcontractor) FQC Subcontractor ITP
NDE report WI TO Dossier piping sect.
Welding map WI TO Dossier piping sect.
Welding map marked on isometric WI TO Dossier piping sect.
Calibration certificates for measuring gauges
SPV / FQC TO Dossier instr. sect.
(by subcontractors)
QC pressure test form SPV / FQC TO Dossier piping sect.
QC line reinstatement form SPV / FQC TO Dossier piping sect.
PSV and TRV bench testing (including those
SPV / FQC TO Dossier piping sect.
installed on packages)
Loop check and functional test
SPV / FQC Subcontractor ITP
procedures and certificates
Leak test procedure and certificates COMM / FQC TO Dossier
Bolt tensioning certificates SPV / FQC TO Dossier piping sect.
I) FILING OF CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AT THE END OF THE

PROJECT
Documentation as per below matrix shall be sent to indicated dept.

Responsibilities of Construction Manager.
ORIGINAL RETAINED BY DISCIPLINE

DOCUMENT
PCO PUR SBC CON ADM PMN SFT CLIENT
1.0 MATERIAL
1.1 Material Receiving Form C X
1.2 Discrepancy Report C X
AUTHORISATION.
PAGE : 11 of 11
REV. : C00

1.3 Discrepancy Close-Out C X

1.4 Field Purchase Order X
2.0 PROJECT CONTROL
2.1 Monthly Constr. Report X
2.2 Close-Out Report X C
2.3 Cost Report X
3.0 ENGINEERING
3.1 Skl (Field Sketches) X
3.2 Lesson Learned X
3.3 As Built X
4.0 CONSTRUCTION
5.1 Discipline Test Certificates EC X
5.2 Correspondence
5.3 Notes Of Meetings (With Client)
Notes Of Meeting (With Contractors) X
5.0 HOME OFFICE CONSTRUCTION
7.1 Field Procedures SPF
7.2 Constructability Studies SPF
7.3 Organization Charts X
7.4 Field Facilities SPF
7.5 Lifting Studies SPF
7.6 Assignment Charts SPF
Notes:
X=
Original C
= Copy
EC = Electronic copy with signature (scanned PDF file)
SPF = Smart Plan Foundation mail notificated
PCO = Project
Control PUR =
Purchase
SBC =
Subcontractor CON
= Construction
ADM = Administration
PNM = Project Management
SFT = Safety
V. ATTACHMENTS
Turnover Dossier Cover pages (07A0.04-01)

Component List (07A0.04-02)
Matrix QC Form (07A0.04-03)
Mechanical Acceptance Certificate (07A0.04-04)
System Acceptance Certificate (07A0.04-05)
AUTHORISATION.
PROJECT CLIENT
LOGO LOGO
Project Name
AFWIContract: YYYYYY Client: XXXXX

SYSTEM - XY
Sub-system- XZ & XZ
System’s name
SYSTEM
NAME
Unit – ZZ
BOOK 1 of N
This volume contains the quality reports/certificates, as built drawings and that documents
& traceability of the quality preformed during the installation of the SYSTEM NAME.
The inspection and test plan for respective disciplines are contained in the volume
labelled: INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN.
Notice for Mechanical completion: 1.
Acceptance for Mechanical completion:
1.
Notice for Ready for start-up:

Acceptance for Ready for start-up:
Attachment 1 (07A0.04-01)
Page 1-2
SYSTEM XY – SYSTEM NAME
UNIT- ZZ
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TEST PACKAGE No: XX-ZZ-YY
1. Cover Sheet
2. P&ID
3. Component List
4. Matrix QC Form
5. Civil
6. Structural Steel
7. Piping
7.1 Mechanical Completion for piping work
7.2 P&ID with marking of Hydraulic circuit
7.3 Isometric and welding map
7.4 SKL (sketch layout)
7.5 NDT & traceability report
7.6 Mechanical contractor activities check list: Welding
7.7 Field installation checklist Above Ground Piping
7.8 Mechanical contractor activities check list: Piping
7.9 Piping hydrostatic test report
7.10 Orifice & plate report
7.11 Painting completion
7.12 Insulation completion
7.13 Chemical cleaning
7.14 Pipe work reinstatement check list
8. Equipment
8.1 Internal vessel certificate
8.2 Vessel closure certificate
8.3 Pressure tower acceptance
8.4 Vertical / Horizontal control report
8.5 Pressure vessel hydraulic test
8.6 Heat exchanger
8.7 Tanks
8.8 Rotating equipment
8.9 Painting completion
8.10 Insulation completion
9. Electrical
10. Instrumentation
11. Construction Punch List
Attachment 1
Page 2-2
PROJECT CLIENT
LOGO LOGO
Project Name
AMECFWI Contract: YYYYYY Client: XXXXX

SYSTEM - XY
Sub-system- XZ & XZ
System’s name
SYSTEM
NAME
Unit – ZZ
COMPONENT
LIST INDEX
1. CIVIL
TAG TAG DESCRIPTION
…………. ………….
…………. ………….
2. STRUCTURAL STEEL
TAG TAG DESCRIPTION
…………. ………….
…………. ………….
3. PIPING
LINE NUMBER SYSTEM / TOS
…………. ………….
…………. ………….
4. EQUIPMENT
TAG TAG DESCRIPTION
…………. ………….
…………. ………….
5. ELECTRICAL
TAG TAG DESCRIPTION
…………. ………….
…………. ………….
6. INSTRUMENTATION
TAG TAG DESCRIPTION
…………. ………….
…………. ………….
Page 1-1
PROJECT LOGO CLIENT LOGO
Project Name
AFW Contract : YYYYY Client : XXXXX
SYSTEM – XY
Sub - System – XZ & XZ
System’s name
SYSTEM NAME
MATRIX QC FORM
PIPING
Check Mechanical NDT & Material Piping System Pipe Work

Valve Painting Insulation
Prefabricated Completion Orifice Flange Traceability Traceability Hydrostatic Flushing Reinstatement
Test Completion Completion
Spool Report Report Report Test Report Checklist
Report
Report
PI.001 PI.005 PI.010 PI.015 WE.025A WE.025B PI.030 PT.001 IS.001 PI.040 PI.050
Line XX-YY-ZZ
……………….
Line XX-YY-ZZ
EQUIPMENT
Pressure Vertical / Pressure

Internal Vessel closure Heat Rotating Painting Insulation
tower horizontal vessel Tank
vessel certificate exchanger equipmen Completion Completion
acceptance control hydraulic
certificate t
report test
PV.001 PV.005 PV.010 PV.015 PV.020 HE.001 TK.001 EQ.001 PT.001 IS.001
Equipment XXX
……………….
Equipment XXX
Page 1-1
Contract: Contractor
MCP ACCEPTANCE CERTIFICATE
ACCEPTANCE RELATED TO: System:
DISCIPLINE Discipline:
Area:
AREA
Date:
Certificate n°: MC.001/
It is certified that this document’s issue confirms that the area / the equipment relevant to the here above
indicated discipline has been inspected, tested and mechanically completed in accordance with quality
forms and documents here attached, with the exception of the missing job, according to the “MCP PUNCH
LIST”
Final Punch
Work description
List Nr.
COMMENTS:
APPROVED BY: CONTRACTOR AFWI CLIENT / TPI
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
MC.001 Rev. 0
Contract:
SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE CERTIFICATE
SYSTEM: Date:
Certificate n°: MC.002/
DESCRIPTION:
It is certified that this document’s issue confirms that the system here above indicated has been inspected,
tested and mechanically completed in accordance with quality forms and documents here attached, with
the exception of outstanding work, as shown on the “Final System Punchlist”.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
System
COMMENTS:
Approved by CLIENT
Approved By AFW Accepted by Start
SIGNATURE Construction or
Construction Up Leader:
Project Manager:
Manager:
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
MC.002 Rev. 0
Data Intocmit/ Verificat/
CBD / Designer Checked
Construction Quality Date
Control
Pag/Pag. 1 din/from 9
Requirements
Construction Quality Control Requirements
AFWI DWG N°: BD0955A-07A2.00 Rev: C00 APPROVED FOR

CONSTRUCTION
M. Rizzo M. Mandelli DWG. REV. DATE
04
03
02
01
00 Issued For Comments 04/01/2018 M. Rizzo M. Mandelli
Rev/Rev. Denumirea modificarii/Change Data/Date Intocmit/Designer Verificat/Checked
description
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1 15 16
AMEC FOSTER
4
Via S. Caboto, 15 7 3 8 7 8 1 X 0 0 - X 3 0 1 0 0
20094 Corsico 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 30 31 80
(Milano) ITALY

doc.
Construction Quality Control Requirements

JOB SPEC : 1BD0955A -07A2.00
PAGE : 2 of 9
DATE : 04 January 2018

REV: : C00
CONSTRUCTION QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 SCOPE OF DOCUMENT............................................................................................... 3
2 DEFINITIONS AND ACRONYMS..................................................................................3
3 REFERENCES............................................................................................................... 4
4 GENERAL QC REQUIREMENTS.................................................................................4
5 QC SYSTEM.................................................................................................................. 4
5.1 Inspection Test Plans.................................................................................................4
5.2 QC procedures........................................................................................................... 5
5.3 QC forms.................................................................................................................... 6
6 QC RECORDS............................................................................................................... 6
7 INSPECTION ACTIVITIES............................................................................................ 7
7.1 Notification.................................................................................................................. 7
7.2 Execution.................................................................................................................... 7
8 QC REPORTING AND PLANNING...............................................................................7
9 CONTROL OF MEASURING AND TESTING EQUIPMENT.........................................8
10 IDENTIFICATION AND TRACEABILITY......................................................................8
11 NON-CONFORMITY MANAGEMENT...........................................................................8
12 QC PERSONNEL........................................................................................................... 9
AUTHORISATION.
JOB SPEC : 1BD0955A -07A2.00
PAGE : 3 of 9

REV: : C00
1 SCOPE OF DOCUMENT
This document includes the minimum Quality Control requirements aimed at both implementing
and recording satisfactory quality performance at relevant stages of construction by Amec FW’s
Contractors.
The above in compliance with the most stringent of Local Regulations/Laws and contractual
obligations, including Project specifications, standards and drawings.
2 DEFINITIONS AND ACRONYMS

The following terms are used in this
document:
Term Definition
Contractor The company awarded for the execution of the Work
Project
All works and services, as foreseen by the Contract,

Work
which are to be executed by the Contractor
Amec FW Amec Foster Wheeler
ITP Inspection Test Plan

NCR Non Conformity Report
QC Quality Control
AUTHORISATION.
JOB SPEC : 1BD0955A -07A2.00
PAGE : 4 of 9

REV: : C00
3 REFERENCES
Void
4 GENERAL QC REQUIREMENTS
Contractor is responsible for the full compliance with the applicable technical requirements during
the execution of the activities relevant to the assigned scope of Work and shall accordingly
maintain a formal Quality Control system encompassing all relevant monitoring, inspection and
tests activities.
Amec FW shall have the right to audit Contractors’ activities at any time. Contractors shall provide
duly assistance and ensure required personnel and documentation availability for the proper
execution of the audit. Corrective actions raised during the audits shall be implemented by
Contractor and verified by Amec FW within the expected date.
5 QC SYSTEM
Each Contractor shall submit for approval upon contract award a detailed list of QC deliverables to
be issued against scope of work, including demolitions where applicable.
The list shall specify deliverables expected issue date and include but not be limited
to:
- Quality Plan (when Contractor’s scope of work includes engineering and procurement
activities).
- Inspection and Test Plans.
- QC procedures.
Quality Plan, ITPs and related QC procedures shall be submitted to Amec FW for review/approval
at least four working weeks before the beginning of the relevant activities.
5.1 Inspection Test Plans

Contractor shall execute all works in accordance with approved ITPs prepared to address the
various disciplines included in the scope of work (e.g.: civil, piping, machinery, etc.).
ITP shall describe the activities, the controlling procedures, verifying documents, acceptance
standards and intervention points.
Contractor’s ITPs shall be developed on the basis of the samples referred to in the Amec FW
applicable Job Specifications of Site Quality Control, outlining the minimum requirements to be
implemented.
ITPs shall be submitted by Contractor to Amec FW for review and approval. During the review
Amec FW, Owner and Third Parties (if any) shall indicate the level of attendance they will have for
each test and inspection listed in the ITPs (Witness, Hold Point, Review, Surveillance or other).
Such requirements will be binding for the Contractor.
No construction activities shall be authorized to commence until the relevant ITPs are approved by
Amec FW.
AUTHORISATION.
JOB SPEC : 1BD0955A -07A2.00
PAGE : 5 of 9

REV: : C00
5.2 QC procedures
QC procedures are to be intended as those documents prepared by Contractor to outline the way
activities will be carried out in order to fulfill requirements set in the project specifications.
QC procedures shall include, but not be limited, to the following:
Procedure Procedure
Approval or Review
Welding required Approval
Non Destructive testing and Examination Approval

Hydrotesting Approval
Heat Treatment Approval
Hot Tapping Approval
High Voltage cable splicing/termination Review
High Voltage switchgear aluminium Review
bus handling and installation
Electric Power Systems energization Approval
Instrument Loop Checking Review
Positive Material Identification Approval
Coating Approval
Painting Approval
Concrete Mix Design Approval
Concrete installation Review
Structural bolt tensioning Review
Asphalt Mix Design Approval
Vessels and Internals installation Review
Cable and Conduit seal installation Review
Gasket installation Review
Gap control for socket weld and
Review
back welded threaded fittings
Installation of Machinery and Equipment Review
Refractory installation Approval
AUTHORISATION.
JOB SPEC : 1BD0955A -07A2.00
PAGE : 6 of 9

REV: : C00
Fiber optic cable installation Approval

HVAC testing and balancing Review
5.3 QC forms
QC forms as per approved ITPs are integrant part of the QC records (see also related section).
Amec FW QC forms shall be used as verifying documents to provide evidence that inspections
and/or tests are completed in a satisfactory
manner.
Contractor may only be allowed to utilize his own QC form where he can demonstrate that the
Amec FW’s cannot be used or are not exhaustive against activities to be inspected.
Contractor shall be responsible for proper compilation, submission and safe archiving of QC forms.
Attachments can be used when necessary to provide additional information or data that cannot be
properly recorded on the QC Forms.
QC forms shall be legible and record all applicable data/information before their submission. No
tippex or other form of correction liquid or whitener shall be used. Deletions/alterations shall be
made with a single ruled line and initialled.
QC forms shall always be signed at least by Contractors and Amec FW representative. Signatures
on QC forms indicate actual involvement in execution, review or approval of an inspection as
required by the ITP. If necessary a comment should be added to indicate a clear reason for the
signature.
QC forms shall be available during the inspections/tests and a signed copy shall be timely
submitted to Amec FW right after inspection/test completion.
Original QC forms shall be stored by Contractor in a safe and traceable manner to ensure their
proper management and collection for Test packs assembling and in compliance with turnover
requirements.
6 QC RECORDS
QC records are the set of documents that Contractor shall prepare, collect and issue during scope
of work execution in an organized and traceable manner meant to validate the compliance with the
contractual requirements.
Typical QC records are but shall not be limited
to:
- QC forms as per approved ITP.
- Punch lists (refer also to discipline Job Specification “Site Quality Control - Punch list
management”).
- Marked up and / or as-built drawings.
- Material certificates and data sheets.
- Calibration certificates.
- Personnel qualification.
- Radiographic films.
- Reports and registers.
- Technical Queries.
AUTHORISATION.
JOB SPEC : 1BD0955A -07A2.00
PAGE : 7 of 9

REV: : C00
QC records in their original version and copies shall always be handed over to Amec FW unless
otherwise instructed.
Handed over shall be done in a progressive way in line with activities completion and as per
instructions provided by Amec FW to ensure timely turnover execution.
7 INSPECTION ACTIVITIES
7.1 Notification
Contractor shall be responsible to notify Amec FW of inspection/test activities as per intervention
points on approved ITPs.
Amec FW Field QC Coordinator shall confirm inspection/tests notifications procedure and
distribution before the starting of construction activities.
In any case, Contractors shall transmit notifications in writing, and within 2 working days (or unless
otherwise instructed) from inspection/test execution.
Notification shall specify the following information as minimum:
- Place, date and time.
- Inspection/test description and tag, as applicable.
- Reference ITP.
- Contractors’ attendance.
7.2 Execution
Contractor shall be responsible to:
- Ensure inspection/test accessibility (e.g. safety permits) to all involved Parties.
- Ensure safe and adequate access (e.g. scaffolding) to all Parties during inspection/test
execution.
- Execute the tests and inspections, providing the necessary equipment, tools, personnel,
consumables and whatever necessary.
- Ensure availability for consultation of the applicable Project documents including
local/international norms and codes.
8 QC REPORTING AND PLANNING

Contractor shall prepare and submit to Amec FW according to the agreed format and deadlines:
- Weekly reports regarding the status of ongoing/completed QC activities and areas of
concern.
- Two weeks look ahead for the planned QC activities.
- Statistic data on executed inspections, percentage of tests failure, open-closed NCRs,
etc.
AUTHORISATION.
JOB SPEC : 1BD0955A -07A2.00
PAGE : 8 of 9

REV: : C00
9 CONTROL OF MEASURING AND TESTING EQUIPMENT

Contractors shall have a procedure for the control of inspection, measuring and testing equipment.
Specific tools and equipment shall be identified to make and perform tests in the field with
instructions for their use, calibration and storage.
Contractors shall identify, maintain, control, adjust and calibrate all tools, gauges, instruments and
other measuring and testing devices used for controlling quality. Calibration shall be performed by
certified laboratory at established periods as specified by applicable standards, or manufacturer
recommendations. If no standards apply, the calibration cycle shall not exceed six months.
Contractors shall provide backup equipment when the primary equipment is being calibrated or
tested.
Contractors shall prepare and update a register for monitoring the calibration status of measuring
and testing devices. Relevant certificates shall be available for review.
10 IDENTIFICATION AND TRACEABILITY

Contractor shall implement procedure or systems to identify inspection and test status by units or
systems. Inspection status reports shall be kept current and shall be available for review at all
times.
Contractor shall implement an identification procedure for all materials, parts and components,
including partially fabricated assemblies. Identification of an item shall be addressed either by
using tags, stamps, colour coding, stencils or labels. The location and the method of
identification shall not affect the function or quality of the item being identified. The procedure
shall require that verification of correct identification of material, parts and components be made
and documented prior to installation.
Traceability shall be maintained on equipment, materials, parts and components. Documents and
records shall enable an item to be traced throughout fabrication, erection, installation, repair,
modification and use of the item.
With regard to piping activities more detailed requirements are outlined by the discipline
specification “Site Quality Control - MW Piping Works”.
11 NON-CONFORMITY MANAGEMENT
Contractors shall implement a procedure for identification and management of Non Conformity
against contractual requirements.
Non-Conformity shall always specify the relevant corrective
action.
Whenever Contractors issue a Non Conformity copy shall always be provide to Amec FW for
information and within 48 hours from its issue.
Contractor shall keep an up to date Register for Non-Conformity status available for review and
consultation.
With regard to Non-Conformity issued by Amec FW reference shall be made to Job Specification
“Site Quality Control - Modification / Changes / NCR and Technical Query”.
AUTHORISATION.
JOB SPEC : 1BD0955A -07A2.00
PAGE : 9 of 9

REV: : C00
12 QC PERSONNEL
Contractor shall provide resumes of Quality Control personnel to Amec FW for review and
approval prior to the start of any Quality System's activity for each individual. Amec FW shall
have the right to interview candidates and the right to reject them.
Contractor QC organization shall be adequately staffed in terms of size, experience and
qualification to satisfy the requested level of QC at all stages of contraction activities. Contractors
shall therefore ensure adequate coverage and delegation in case of QC personnel vacations,
temporary assignments, emergency leave, resignations etc.
AUTHORISATION.
30/10/17 A. F.
Lomazzi Carnevale
CBD Data/ Intocmit Verificat/
SITE QUALITY Date / Checked
CONTROL – Designer
Lifting works Pag/Pag. 1 din/from 13

Lifting works
AFWI DWG N°: Rev:C00 APPROVED FOR

CONSTRUCTION
BD0955A- 07A2.02
DWG. REV. DATE
A. Lomazzi F. Carnevale
SIGNATURE: A.
MANTOVANI
04
03
02
01
00 Issued For Comments 30/10/2017 A. Lomazzi F. Carnevale
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
AMEC FOSTER
7 3 8 7 8 1 X 0 0 - X 3 0 3 0 0
Via S. Caboto, 15 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 30 31 80
20094 Corsico
(Milano) ITALY
doc.

Lifting works
PAGE : 2 of 13
REV. : C00
SITE QUALITY CONTROL – Lifting works
CONTENTS
I. SCOPE
II. SUBJECT
III. DEFINITION
IV. REFERENCE
V. PROCEDURE
VI. RECORDS
VII. ATTACHMENTS
EACH REVISION SUPERSEDES PREVIOUS ISSUE. CHANGES ARE INDICATED IN MARGIN BY THE REVISION NUMBER OR A VERTICAL
LINE.
AUTHORISATION.
PAGE : 3 of 13
REV. : C00
I. SCOPE
This job specification provides the guidance and minimum requirements for inspection,
checking and testing and document all activities related to the subject of this document.
This document shall be read in conjunction with the CONTRACT and all other applicable
documentation included in the CONTRACT.
II. SUBJECT
This document refers to the Transport, Lifting and Positioning works.
III. DEFINITION
A. RESPONSIBILITIES
CONTRACTOR shall execute and control its activities included in the scope of the
works, in accordance with CONTRACTOR project Quality Control Plan and all
approved drawings and technical documents deemed necessary for the execution.
CONTRACTOR shall perform and record all inspections, examinations and tests
required and shall provide, but not limited to:
- All works necessary for the preparation and execution of inspections and
testing.
- Provide adequate scaffolding/standing to perform the inspection
safely.
- Only calibrated and certified tools shall be
utilized.
- Shall have available an up to date calibration
log.
- Shall have available the applicable international Standards and
Codes.
- Continue to update of the Quality Control
Plan.
EMPLOYER or others Parties signature on inspection, examination and test reports,

does not release the CONTRACTOR from its responsibilities.
B. QUALITY CONTROL PLAN
The Quality Control Plan is a CONTRACTOR document endorsing all quality control
requirements detailed in this Job Specification and other applicable document
included in the CONTRACT.
The Quality Control Plan shall include the inspections and test requirement included
in this Job Specification, in Subcontract Requisition and relevant attachment and/or
added as and when required during the execution of the CONTRACT including
vendor documents and CONTRACTOR supplied material and equipment.
Each inspection and test shall make reference to the applicable procedure,
acceptable criteria and certification form number and inspection attendance.
The CONTRACTOR’s inspection and test plan (hereafter ITP) shall indicate
the:
LINE.
AUTHORISATION.
PAGE : 4 of 13
REV. : C00
- Construction stage test and inspection

- Description
- Acceptable Criteria
- Applicable Procedure
- Verification Document
- Responsibilities of inspection categories
- Reporting-form
- Number
- Inspection attendance
Executed inspections and test shall be documented through quality control forms
included in this specification, which shall be included in CONTRACTOR Quality
Control Plan.
IV. REFERENCE
1BD0955C-07A2.00 Construction QC requirements
All applicable standards, codes, specifications and drawings are identified and listed in the
Subcontract Requisition, which is part of the CONTRACT.
Required inspections and tests by Local Regulation may not be included in this document.
However, CONTRACTOR shall strictly adhere to Local Regulation and shall report the
execution to EMPLOYER.
Equivalent and applicable Project codes rise above Local Regulation if the second are less
stringent. In case of conflict between Local Regulation and Project Code, the most stringent
shall be applied.
CONTRACTOR shall timely report any deviation from Project requirements and no deviation
shall be implemented without prior approval from EMPLOYER.
V. PROCEDURE
A. QUALITY CONTROL
PLAN
Where CONTRACTOR opts to use its own Quality Control Plans, the CONTRACTOR
shall endorse this Job Specification as integrated part of its Quality Control Plan using
the procedure, test codes and forms attached at Section VII.
CONTRACTOR shall issue all Quality Control Plans thirty days before the starting of
works or thirty days before the beginning of new activities.
CONTRACTOR shall not change the numbering of EMPLOYER form or test codes.
Additional codes shall be numbered adding a letter to the last issued code.
CONTRACTOR shall submit the additional codes to EMPLOYER for approval prior
the execution of the inspection and/or test.
LINE.
AUTHORISATION.
PAGE : 5 of 13
REV. : C00
CONTRACTOR shall revise and update the Quality Control Plan as and when
required during the execution of the CONTRACT incorporating any appropriate
requirement resulting from safety design, engineering specifications, standards,
design codes, improved practices and vendor documents.
All the entries/points included in Quality form shall be filled-in, N/A shall be used
when not applicable and/or not available.
B. EXECUTION OF INSPECTIONS AND TESTS
Inspections and tests shall be carried out concurrently with the execution of the
relevant construction and installation works.
All items subject to an inspection or test cycle which by their nature or service are to
be covered or canceled (foundations, underground civil works and networks, surfaces
to be treated and later insulated, etc.) shall be inspected a tested before getting
covered or canceled.
CONTRACTOR shall submit to EMPLOYER a weekly look-ahead schedule of all

planned site quality control activities consistent with the work schedule approved by
EMPLOYER.
CONTRACTOR shall timely notify EMPLOYER and/or other involved Parties to

witness the inspections and tests as indicated in the approved I&TP.
CONTRACTOR shall issue approved quality control form immediately after the
completion of each inspection activity. All reports shall be approved and signed off by
CONTRACTOR authorized personnel prior to submission to EMPLOYER for review
or approval, as appropriate.
CONTRACTOR shall transmit to EMPLOYER a list of authorized personnel with

name, position within the project and specimen signature.
Signatures at Form shall be accompanied with stamp indicating name and position. In
case stamp is not available, name shall be clearly print in capital letters.
C. MINIMUM DUTIES
CONTRACTOR shall consider the following definitions to prepare and implement its
Quality Control Plan.
With positioning activities FWI intend all operations, to be done in field, from the lifting
equipment positioning up to to the erection and final setting on the foundations of the
items.
1. Cranage
a. Types of
cranes
Cranes are all those working machines used to lift, unload and handle a load at
specific distances and heights. The following are the main types of cranes:
LINE.
AUTHORISATION.
PAGE : 6 of 13
REV. : C00
- Crawler cranes, which can move with suspended load (prior Client
Approval).
- Rubber-tyred cranes.
- Tower
cranes.
- Gantry
cranes.
- Overhead bridge
cranes.
- Folding cranes.
b. Load to be lifted
The load to be lifted is determined based on the weight of the object to lift
multiplied by the applicable safety factor (see chapter 4.a), to which the weight of
the lifting equipment (e.g. hooks, ropes, equalizers, etc.) is added.
Example of
calculation:
NET WEIGHT = Weight of the object to lift x Safety Factor
LOAD TO BE
Net Weight + Weight of the rigging hardware
LIFTED =
c. Crane Capacity
The maximum admissible capacity of a crane is indicated in the crane load

tables (formulated by the crane manufacturer) and depends on the following
parameters:
- Boom length.
- Radius.
- Counterweight.
- Super lift (if any) and radius of the super
lift.
- Wind speed.
- Distance between the stabilizers (where
applicable).
- Capacity Safety factor, as indicated in paragraph
4.a.
Example of
calculation:
CRANE CAPACITY = Capacity safety factor X crane load chart

capacity
All the load tables used to develop the lifting plan shall comply with directive ISO
4309 and only 75% of the tipping load can be used.
In exceptional circumstances, when there are no other possibilities available,

non-standard tables, approved, certified and stamped by the crane
manufacturer, can be accepted.
In these cases, FWI/Client shall be informed for review/approval during design
phase.
LINE.
AUTHORISATION.
PAGE : 7 of 13
REV. : C00
d. Rated Capacity
The Rated Capacity of a crane is the ratio between the load to be lifted, as
defined at point 1.b, and the crane capacity, as defined at point 1.c.
2. Classification of Lifting operations
a. Critical lifting
A lift is deemed critical when it pertains to one of the following cases:
- The load, as defined at point 1.b, is higher than 50 tons.

- The load, as defined at point 1.b, is lower than 50 tons, but a complex lifting
system or sequence is proposed (e.g. confined areas, high operating
radiuses and installation heights, installations inside existing structures,
etc.).
- The load, as defined at point 1.b, is higher than 20 tons and the Rated
Capacity of the crane, as defined at point 1.d, exceeds 80%.
- Two or more lifting devices are working during the activities (e.g. holding
cranes).
- The lifting operation is carried out near buildings currently used, operating
plants or electric lines (see table below), or installation overflight.
- Special lifting devices or non-standard crane configurations are adopted (as
described in chapter 3).
b. Standard lifting
Standard lifts are those lifts which do not meet the criteria defined for critical lifts.
c. Critical positioning
A positioning operation is deemed critical when it pertains to one of the following

cases:
- The load, as defined at point 1.b, is higher than 50 tons.

- The load, as defined at point 1.b, is lower than 50 tons, but a complex
positioning system or sequence is proposed (e.g. confined areas, high
operating radiuses and installation heights, installations inside existing
structures, etc.).
- Two or more positioning devices are working during the activities.
- The positioning operation is carried out near buildings currently used,
operating plants or electric lines (see table below), or installation overflight.
- Special devices or non-standard equipment configurations are adopted.
d. Standard positioning
Standard positioning are those positioning which do not meet the criteria defined
for critical positioning.
LINE.
AUTHORISATION.
PAGE : 8 of 13
REV. : C00
3. Rigging Hardware (Lifting equipment)
a. Rigging Hardware
Rigging Hardware, such as chains (when allowed), lifting/spreader beam,

shackles, slings, etc., is used to hook the load to lift by the crane.
Rigging Hardware can be of standard or special

type.
b. Standard lifting components
Standard lifting Components are designed and tested not for special lifts and are
available on the market.
c. Special lifting components
Special lifting Components are designed and certified to meet the requirements
of one or more specific lifts. Lifting devices are lift lugs, pad-eyes, trunnions,
spreader bar and lifting devices for jacking down.
4. Safety Factor
a. Safety factor
In order to develop a lifting plan, the following safety factors shall be
adopted: Safety factor to determine the load to be lifted
Safety factor Field of application Remarks

Estimated weight of a The weight is estimated according to
1.1
new equipment manufacturing or design data.
The weight is estimated according to the

1.25 Weight of an existing equipment
historical data available in the drawings.
Equipment weight is certified with load

cells: the calibration certificates of these
1 Certified weight
cells shall be enclosed. Each equipment
shall be weighted as a single piece.
LINE.
AUTHORISATION.
PAGE : 9 of 13
REV. : C00
Capacity Safety factor to determine the crane capacity:
Safety factor Field of application
0.9 During the lift design phase
b. Minimum safety distances:
Element Safety Distance
Main boom of the crane

1m
Load
Main boom of the crane

1 m (for each side of the boom)
Existing structures*
Load – Existing structures 1m
* Safety distance shall not be applied for boom up/down operations.
Minimum safety distances between the crane (load included) and the operating
electric lines:
During lifting operations During transit operations

(no load, with boom or mast lowered)
Voltage Distance Voltage Distances

kV s (m) kV (m)
< 50 3.1 < 0.75 1.2
50 ÷ 200 4.6 0.75 ÷ 50 1.8
201 ÷ 350 6.1 51 ÷ 345 3.1
351 ÷ 500 7.6 346 ÷ 750 4.9
501 ÷ 750 10.7 751 ÷ 1000 6.1
751 ÷ 1000 13.7 - -

If more restrictive, local regulations shall be applied.
LINE.
AUTHORISATION.
PAGE : 10 of 13
REV. : C00
5. Transport Plan
The positioning plan shall consist of drawings, specifications and procedures in

order to ensure that all the operations to be realized are assessed correctly and
all factors are taken into consideration.
The transport plan shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following
information:
- Routing of the transport;

- Characteristics and configuration of transport
equipment;
- Characteristics (dimensions, ground bearing pressure, etc.) of the roads,
docks, etc. used in the transport;
- Check of interferences between equipment to be transported and potential
obstacles along the route.;
- Required permits for transport operations by the Local Authorities are in
place and valid.
6. Positioning/Lifting Plan
a. Positioning Plan
The positioning plan shall consist of drawings, specifications and procedures in

order to ensure that all the operations to realize are assessed correctly and all
factors are taken into consideration.
The positioning plan shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following
information:
- Elevation view drawing(s) of the lifting system (e.g. Jack, skid shoes, etc.),
load and existing structures which could cause interferences and problems.
The drawings shall be in scale and shall indicate:
- The name of the lifting system manufacturer(s), the model(s) and the
type;
- Capacity and main characteristics;
- Maximum load elevation during the activities;
- Special devices required for the operations;
- Minimum distance between the lifting system from the load, existing
structures and electric lines;
- Classification of slings, shackles and other rigging hardware (refer to
point 3), identified, with related capacity, size, length and location.
- Plan and view Drawing(s) with plan of the lifting system, load and structures
of existing plants which could interfere during the activities. The drawings
shall be in scale and shall indicate the following:
- Transport routing to position the load on foundation;

- Initial and final position of the load during the activities;
- Lifting system positioning, including all dimensional limits;
- Position and depth of nearby underground pipes and structures (if
any);
LINE.
AUTHORISATION.
PAGE : 11 of 13
REV. : C00
- Bearing pressure generated by the lifting system and the position,

thickness, size, etc. of required mats or cribbing.
- Positioning analysis shall include the

following:
- Tabulation of the gross load weight including all rigging hardware;

- Gross rated capacity of the lifting system in the configuration
specified;
- Net lifting capacity of the lifting system, detailing any necessary
deductions from the lifting system gross lifting capacity for all
hardware such as jibs, etc.;
- Calculation of the percent of the lifting system gross rated capacity for
the activities;
- Wheater limitations (e.g. winds speeds, temperature constraints);
- Determination of soil preparations;
- Emergency procedures and communication plan;
- Details of how the rigging hardware will be removed;
- A narrative of step-by-step lifting system movements and load
manipulation.
b. Lifting plan
The lifting plan shall consist of drawings, specifications and procedures in order
to ensure that all the operations to realize are assessed correctly and all factors
are taken into consideration.
The lifting plan shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following
information:
- Elevation view drawing(s) of the crane, load and existing structures, which
could cause interferences and problems. The drawings shall be in scale and
shall indicate:
- The name of the crane manufacturer(s) and model(s) and the type of
counterweights;
- Boom lenght(s)and lifting radius;
- Maximum load elevation during lifting activities;
- Jib or special lifting devices required;
- Minimum number of parts of crane hoists line required to lift the load;
- Minimum distance of the boom from the load, existing structures and
electric lines;
- Classification of blocks, slings, shackles and other rigging hardware
(refer to point 3), identified, with related capacity, size, length and
location.
- Plan and view Drawing(s) with plan of the crane, load and structures of
existing plants which could interfere during lifting activities. The drawings
shall be in scale and shall indicate the following:
- Transport routing to position the load for lifting;

- Initial lifting position of the load, radius included;
LINE.
AUTHORISATION.
PAGE : 12 of 13
REV. : C00
- Final placement position of load lift, radius included;

- Crane(s) positioning, including tail-swing limits;
- Position and depth of nearby underground pipes and structures (if
any);
- Bearing pressure generated by the crane and the position, thickness,
size, etc. of required mats or cribbing.
- Lift analysis shall include the following:
- Tabulation of the gross load weight including all blocks, jib and
rigging tackle weight;
- Gross rated capacity of the crane in the configuration specified;
- Net lifting capacity of the crane, detailing any necessary deductions
from the crane’s gross lifting capacity for all hardware such as jibs,
etc.;
- Calculation of the percent of the crane’s gross rated capacity for the
lift;
- Weather limitations (e.g. winds speeds, temperature constraints);
- Determination of crane foundation requirements (detailing all
characteristics that shall be implemented in the site preparations);
- Emergency procedures and communication plan;
- Details of how the rigging hardware will be removed;
- A narrative of step-by-step crane movements and load manipulation.
VI. RECORDS
All positioning/lifting operations shall comply with the standards, specifications and drawings
listed in this Job Specification.
All positioning/lifting operations shall meet the requests expressed in the FWI and Client
Project Specifications and shall comply with the laws and regulations in force.
During field operations a file shall be created as follows to collect all drawn up documents.
A dedicated section shall be dedicated to each lifting operation. Each section shall include at
least:
- Standard lift: related check list and method of statement.
- Critical lift: lifting plan, method of statement and related checklist.
For all the lifts realized before the issue of this job specification, all the documents drawn up
should be filed considering the provisions here indicated.
LINE.
AUTHORISATION.
PAGE : 13 of 13
REV. : C00
VII. ATTACHMENTS
Inspection & test plans:
Lifting works
QC forms:
Applicable/
Form Code Object Rev.
Non
LF.001 Lift Assessment Sheet 00 Applicable
LF.005 Standard Lift Check List 00 Applicable
LF.010 Critical Lift Check List 00 Applicable
LF 020 Transport check list 00 Applicable
LF.015 Inspection Request 00 Applicable
LINE.
AUTHORISATION.
Client: Plant/Location:
Contract: Contractor:
INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN
Discipline LIFTING WORKS ITP: LF-100 CON. STD.: 07A2.02
Test/Inspection Document Responsibility

S/N Acceptance Criteria Verifying Document Remarks
Description Reference CC AFW CL NB
LIFTING WORKS
1 Safety Factor 07A2.02 07A2.02 LF.001 E R
2 Capacity Safety Factor 07A2.02 07A2.02 LF.001 E R
3 Rated Capacity of the crane 07A2.02 07A2.02 LF.001 E R
4 Distance Safety Factor 07A2.02 07A2.02 LF.001 E R
Involvement: Organization:
E = EXECUTE Test/Inspection executes CC= Contractor

R = REVIEW. Verification and confirmation that the design requirements have been met AFW= AMEC Foster Wheeler
W = WITNESS / Inspection. Measuring & testing of work, and comparing the results with the design requirements CL= Owner
RI = RANDOM INSPECTION. Continuous monitoring of work without Hold Point requirement NB= Laboratory / Notified Body
H = HOLD POINT. A point beyond which a work shall not proceed without the approval of Contractor, AFW, Owner/ Owner’s
Inspector (TPI), NoBo
Contract:
LIFT ASSESSMENT SHEET Contractor:
ITEM to be lifted: Lifting number: FORM N°: LF.001
Rev. 00
Crane: Date: Area:
OBJECT DATA
1.0 ITEM to be lifted

1.1 Dimensions
1.2 Weight
Certified Weight
1.3
(Attach the certification obtained with load cells, if any)
1.4 Safety Factor
Weight of the equipment with safety factor

1.5
(Not applicable if available the certifications with load cells, see point 1.3)
1.6 Weight of Rigging Hardware

Total weight to be lifted
1.7
(Obtained from the sum of point 1.3 & 1.6, or 1.5 & 1.6)
1.8 Item CoG is confirmed by Contractor YES NO
2.0 Crane working conditions

2.1 Working radius
2.2 Main boom length
2.2 Counterweight
2.3 Super Lift (if any)
2.4 Super Lift radius
2.5 Stabilizers lengths (if any)
2.6 Crane Capacity
2.7 Rated capacity of the crane
3.0 Lift Classification Cause description

Standard Lift
Critical Lift
Remarks:
APPROVED BY: CONTRACTOR FWI CLIENT
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
Contract:
STANDARD LIFT CHECKLIST Contractor:
Rev. 00
Crane: Date: Area:
Crane operator: FWI Supervisor

Acceptable (Y/N) or
1.0 LIFTING PREPARATION Remarks
NOT Applicable (NA)
1.1 Lift Assessment Sheet has been filled in and signed.
Route between lay down and installation area has

1.2
been inspected.
1.3 Presence of U/G utilities in field area has been checked out.
1.4 Ground conditions area acceptable.
1.5 There is adequate lighting/visibility.
1.6 Working area is totally free of personnel.
Adequate clearance for all crane operations has been

1.7 checked out.
1.8 Load has been tied back to the crane.
Acceptable (Y/N) or
2.0 CRANE SET UP Remarks
NOT Applicable (NA)
2.1 Crane documentation set is fully available.
2.2 Load/Crane capacity 0.9.
2.3 The crane is set-up horizontally.
2.4 Crane outriggers are fully extended.
2.5 Spreaders are correctly positioned.
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
Contract:
CRITICAL LIFT Contractor:
CHECKLIST
ITEM to be lifted:
Sheet 1 ofLifting
3 number: FORM N°: LF.010
Rev. 00
Sheet 1 of 3
Crane: Date: Area:
Crane operator: FWI Supervisor:

Acceptable (Y/N) or
1.00 LIFTING PREPARATION Remarks
NOT Applicable (NA)
1.01 Lift Assessment Sheet has been filled in and signed.
Lift plan has been reviewed with all personnel involved in

1.02 lifting operation.
Route between lay down and installation area has

1.03
been inspected.
1.04 Presence of U/G utilities in field area has been checked out.
1.05 Ground conditions area acceptable.
1.06 There is adequate lighting/visibility.
1.07 Lifting and swinging areas area properly fenced.
Trial lifting operation test has been carried out by both

1.08 cranes with no load, relevant to the entire sequence of steps
(Blanc Test).
1.09 Load radius of all involved cranes has been checked on site.
Main and tail cranes are both in the right position, as per
1.10 lifting plan.
The personnel directly involved in the lifting operation is
1.11
clearly defined?
CVs of personnel directly involved in lifting operations
1.12 are available.
Weather forecast for the day of the lift, the day before and
1.13 the day after is available.
1.14 Working area is totally free of personnel.
Adequate clearance for all crane operations has been

1.15 checked out.
1.16 Load has been tied back to the crane
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
Contract:
CHECKLIST
ITEM to be lifted:
Sheet 2 ofLifting
Rev. 00
Sheet 2 of 3
Crane: Date: Area:
Acceptable (Y/N) or
2.00 CRANE SET UP Remarks
NOT Applicable (NA)
2.01 Crane documentation set is fully available.
2.02 Load/Crane capacity 0.9.
2.03 Crane installation has been completed.
2.04 The crane is set-up horizontally.
2.05 Crane outriggers are fully extended.
2.06 Spreaders are correctly positioned.
2.07 Load radius of all involved cranes has been checked on site.
2.08 Main and tail cranes are in the right position, as per lifting plan.
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
Contract:
CHECKLIST
ITEM to be lifted:
Sheet 3 ofLifting
Rev. 00
Sheet 3 of 3
Crane: Date: Area:
Acceptable (Y/N) or
3.0 RIGGING HARDWARE Remarks
NOT Applicable (NA)
3.01 Main lifting arrangement is correctly installed as per plan.
Slings certificates are available.

3.02 (At least with indication of manufacturer, length, composition of
wires and strands, diameter)
Slings in good conditions.

3.03 (Core protrusions, broken wires, wire bending, rope
deformation, etc. must not be present in steel slings; frayed
edges, oil stains, etc. must not be present in textile slings).
Shackles certificates are available.

3.04 (At least with indication of manufacturer, type, pin type
and diameter)
Shackles are in good

conditions.
3.05
(Shackles must have pins in alloy steel, with capacity
stamped on the body, and must not be worn away, corroded,
deformed, or with cracks).
3.06 Special lifting device is in compliance with lifting plan.
Lifting arrangement provides positive control of the load

3.07
to prevent slipping or shifting of the item.
3.08 Shackle pins fit with the holes provided in the lifting lugs.
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
TRANSPORT CHECK LIST
Rev. 00
Sheet 1 of 1
Crane: Date: Area:
Acceptable (Y/N) or
1.0 TRANSPORT EQUIPMENT Remarks
NOT Applicable (NA)
1.01 Trailers in good conditions
1.02 Tires pressure
1.03 Fastening equipment conditions
1.04 Fastening equipment capacity
1.05 Equipment as per transport plan requirements
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
Client: Plant Location:
Contract: Subcontractor:
INSPECTION REQUEST
DISCIPLINE: ………………………………………………………………………………………………..
CON. STD. Ref.: 07A2.02 ITP code: ……………………… FORM N°: LF.015/………..
1st INSPECTION REQUEST FOR INSPECTION ON DATE

YEAR
MONTH DAY HOUR MIN
JAN FEB MAR APR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 00 10
MAY JUN JUL AGO 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 20 30
SEP OCT NOV DEC 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 40 50
REFERENCE DRAWING FOR RES.

No. ITEM TAG No. ITEM DESCRIPTION
LOCATION PO NEG
S
1
4
Note
QC Inspector Name: Signature Date
2nd INSPECTION REQUEST FOR RE-INSPECTION ON DATE

YEAR
MONTH DAY HOUR MIN
JAN FEB MAR APR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 00 10
MAY JUN JUL AGO 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 20 30
SEP OCT NOV DEC 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 40 50
REFERENCE DRAWING FOR RES.

No. ITEM TAG No. ITEM DESCRIPTION
LOCATION PO NEG
S
1
4
Note
QC Inspector Name: Signature Date
No Inspection and test report issued? YES NO Remarks Report Number
NAME:
SIGNATURE:
DATE:
04/01/18 A. F.
Lomazzi Carnevale
POLYFUEL Data/ Intocmit Verificat/
CONTROL Designer
PRESSURE Pag/Pag. 1 din/from 8
VESSELS

PRESSURE VESSELS
APPROVED FOR
AFWI DWG N°: BD0955A-07A2.03 Rev: C00 CONSTRUCTION
F.
A. Lomazzi DWG. REV. DATE
Carnevale
04
03
02
01
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
AMEC FOSTER
WHEELER Nr. proiect / Project no. Nr. desen / Drawing no. Rev/Rev
ITALIANA S.r.l. 7 3 8 7 8 1 X 0 0 - X 3 0 4 0 0
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 30 31 80
Via S. Caboto, 15
20094 Corsico
(Milano) ITALY
doc.
SITE QUALITY
CONTROL PRESSURE
VESSELS
JOB SPEC. BD0955A-07A2.03
SITE QUALITY CONTROL Page: 2 of 8
PRESSURE VESSELS Rev.: C00
Date: 04 January 2018
CONTENTS
I. SCOPE
II. SUBJECT
III. DEFINITION
IV. REFERENCE
V. PROCEDURE
VI. RECORDS
VII. ATTACHMENTS
I. SCOPE
This job specification provides and minimum requirements for the planning,
execution and reporting of Quality Control activities.
This document shall be read in conjunction with the CONTRACT and all other
related and applicable documentation. The most stringent requirement shall
always apply.
II. SUBJECT
This document refers to the Quality Control activities relevant to pressure

vessels installation.
III. DEFINITION
A. RESPONSIBILITIES
CONTRACTOR shall execute and control his activities included in the

scope of the works, in accordance with approved Project Quality
Control Plan(s) along with all approved drawings and technical
documents as deemed necessary for the scope of work execution.
CONTRACTOR shall perform and record all inspections, examinations

and tests required making sure that the following minimum
requirements are implemented:
- All works necessary for the preparation and execution of

inspections and testing are completed in due time
- Provision of adequate scaffolding/standing to perform the
inspection safely.
- Tools and measuring equipment in use have current and valid
calibration as necessary
- The applicable international Standards and Codes are available for
review.
EMPLOYER or others Parties signature on inspection, examination and

test reports, does not relieve the CONTRACTOR from his
responsibilities.
B. QUALITY CONTROL PLAN (INSPECTION & TEST

PLAN)
The Quality Control Plan is a CONTRACTOR’s document addressing

all quality control requirements detailed in this Job Specification and
other applicable documents included in the CONTRACT.
Each inspection and test shall make reference to the applicable

procedure, acceptable criteria and certification form number and
inspection attendance.
The Contractor’s inspection and test plan (hereafter I&TP) shall indicate
the following information (as minimum):
· Sequence number
· Test and inspection description
· Acceptance Criteria
· Reference document
· Verification Document (QC formats)
· Intervention points
Additional requirements are given in section

V.
IV. REFERENCE
All applicable standards, codes, specifications and drawings are identified and
listed in the Subcontract Requisition, which is part of the CONTRACT.
Required inspections and tests by Local Regulation may not be included in the
above. It is however, CONTRACTOR’s responsibility to take them into duly
consideration as applicable along with contractual requirements where the
most stringent ones shall always apply.
CONTRACTOR shall not deviate from Contractual requirements unless formal

approval is obtained from EMPLOYER.
V. PROCEDURE
A. QUALITY CONTROL PLAN (INSPECTION & TEST PLAN)
Where CONTRACTOR opts to use its own Quality Control Plans, the
CONTRACTOR shall endorse this Job Specification as an integrating
part of his Quality Control Plan and shall implement procedures/test
codes/forms in accordance with attachments as per Section VII.
CONTRACTOR shall issue for review all Quality Control Plans and
relevant formats thirty days before the starting of construction works or
thirty days before the beginning of new activities. In any case, no
construction activities shall start unless Quality Control Plans have
been approved by all applicable Contractual parties.
Changes to Quality Control Plans shall always be formally agreed with

EMPLOYER before implementation.
CONTRACTOR shall revise and resubmit for approval the Quality

Control Plans along with relevant formats as/if necessary to keep them
current against the actual scope of work.
Inspections and tests shall be carried out/reported concurrently with the

execution of construction works to minimise back logs. QC reports shall
be submitted duly compiled with all applicable data to EMPLOYER’s
review/approval no later than 24 Hours since completion of the relevant
inspection. QC reports shall always be endorsed with signature and
stamp of the function responsible to validate the inspection.
CONTRACTOR shall submit to EMPLOYER a weekly look-ahead

schedule of all planned site quality control activities.
Inspections notifications shall be managed by CONTRACTOR in a

timely manner and as agreed with Project parties before the starting of
construction works.
C. MINIMUM DUTIES
1. General Provisions
The CONTRACTOR shall assure correct movement and

installation of Pressure Vessel from receiving to final installation.
The commencing verifies shall be the:
- Check and verify drawings and procedures and lift

documentation.
- Check anchor bolts.
- Check and verify drawing of internal parts, installation procedure
and duties for internal covering, painting and/or insulation
- Lifting condition
2. Storage, movement and maintenance
The pressure vessel shall be stored, handled and preserved in

accordance with FWI’s requirements and Vendor’s instructions.
3. Foundation preparation and anchor bolts
Foundation surface shall be cleaned and anchor bolts shall be

checked and cleaned.
The CONTRACTOR shall check bolts alignment and verticality.
4. Visual-dimensional controls
Before proceeding in mounting or assembling each equipment, as

minimum the CONTRACTOR shall verify the following:
a) Diameter correctness.
b) Flanges matching.
c) Dimensional controls.
d) Control possible interference with what already assembled.
5. Verticality and horizontality
The CONTRACTOR shall level and plumb all installed equipment.
The deviation from vertical or horizontal cannot be more than +/- 1

mm per meter of equipment length (unless otherwise specified).
Overall deviation over complete length shall not exceed +/- 25 mm

(unless otherwise specified).
CONTRACTOR shall always respect the following work

instructions (as minimum) when checking vessel verticality and
horizontality:
- Measuring instrument shall have a current yearly calibration

certificate available for review. The bubble sensitivity shall not
be less than 1/10000.
- measurements shall be done positioning the instrument in 3

points approximately 120° one from each other on 3 horizontal
axis passing through the centre of the equipment base, distant
at least equal to the equipment height.
- Verticality check shall be done collimating the telescope

reticule with the highest point of the right outer visible
equipment generating line, and moving downward rotating the
telescope to the base of equipment. The deviation shall be
read on a rule held in horizontal position, with the greatest
possible precision, perpendicular to the base circumference in
the tangent point of collimation axis.
If, moving telescope downward, the collimation axis is moving
inward the equipment, the operation shall be done on the
other visible generating line. The measured deviation shall be
recorded on test form with positive sign if deviation is on the
right equipment side, negative if deviation is on the left side.
- Horizontality check shall be carried out positioning the

instrument far from the equipment for a distance at least equal
its length, approximately on the perpendicular to the
equipment axis nearby its middle. This survey shall be carried
out similarly to the vertical one, collimating an extremity of the
equipment lowest visible line and rotating horizontally the
instrument up to the vertical line of the other extremity, where
will be positioned the rule.
- Horizontality of higher nozzle shall be surveyed using a spirit

bubble with sensitivity not less than 1/10000 placed on the
top.
- Every measurement shall be repeated after an alidade

rotation by 180°, necessary to consider potential reading
errors due to instruments’ in exactitude. The half-sum of the
two readings (A1 and A2) for each considered direction, shall
be within the previously mentioned tolerances.
- Positioning out of tolerance shall be immediately corrected by

shimming up to the correct positioning.
VI. RECORDS
CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to prepare, collect and store hard copies

of QC records in an organised, traceable and safe manner all the way through
scope of work execution and until turn over to EMPLOYER as part of the final
documentation dossier.
EMPLOYER shall be authorised to audit QC records collection at any time.

CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to implement corrective actions as
necessary to ensure compliance to Contractual requirements.
1. VII. ATTACHMENTS
Pressure vessels
QC forms:
PV.001 Pressure Vessel External Acceptance
PV.001.1 Pressure Vessel/Tower Acceptance
PV.005 Horizontality and Verticality Pressure Vessel Erection
PV.010 Pressure vessel Test
PV.015 Pressure vessel internal trays
PV.020 Vessel Closure Certificate
PV.025 Platforms and ladders installation
PV.030 Pressure vessel closure
Discipline PRESSURE VESSELS ITP: PV-100 Con. STD.: 07A2.03

PRESSURE VESSELS
Vessel/Tower External
01 FWI / Vendor’s Dwg’s 07A4, 10A1, 19B9 PV.001 E H
Acceptance
02 Pressure Vessel Erection FWI / Vendor’s Dwg’s 10A1, 19B9 PV.005 E H
03 Pressure Vessel Test 10A1, 19B9 10A1, 19B9 PV.010 E H
04 Pressure Vessel Internal Trays 11A1, 19B9 11A1, 19B9 PV.015 E W
Platforms & Ladders

05 19B9 46A2,19B9 PV.025 E W
installation
06 Vessel Closure 10A1, 19B9, 07A2.03 10A1, 19B9, 11A1 PV.020/030 E H
E = EXECUTE Test/Inspection executes
R = REVIEW - No Notification is required. QC forms shall be signed by all parties involved after inspection CC= Contractor
W = WITNESS - Notification is mandatory. CC can proceed with inspection even if not all the parties involved are present AFW=AMEC Foster Wheeler
H = HOLD POINT-CC cannot proceed with inspection and works without the approval of the parties involved CL= Owner
NB= Laboratory / Notified Body
Rev. 01
Discipline PRESSURE VESSELS ITP: PV-100 Con. STD.: 07A2.03

PRESSURE VESSELS
Vessel/Tower External
01 FWI / Vendor’s Dwg’s 07A4, 10A1, 19B9 PV.001 E H
Acceptance
02 Pressure Vessel Erection FWI / Vendor’s Dwg’s 10A1, 19B9 PV.005 E H
03 Pressure Vessel Test 10A1, 19B9 10A1, 19B9 PV.010 E H
04 Pressure Vessel Internal Trays 11A1, 19B9 11A1, 19B9 PV.015 E W
Platforms & Ladders

05 19B9 46A2,19B9 PV.025 E W
installation
06 Vessel Closure 10A1, 19B9, 07A2.03 10A1, 19B9, 11A1 PV.020/030 E H
R = REVIEW - No Notification is required. QC forms shall be signed by all parties involved after inspection CC= Contractor
W = WITNESS - Notification is mandatory. CC can proceed with inspection even if not all the parties involved are present AFW=AMEC Foster Wheeler
H = HOLD POINT-CC cannot proceed with inspection and works without the approval of the parties involved CL= Owner
Rev. 01
PRESSURE VESSELS/TOWER ACCEPTANCE
Report n.: Contractor:

PV.001.1
AMECFW Contract:
TOS: S/TOS: TAG n.: DRAWING N. REV:
1.0 External Acceptance: 2.0 Internal Acceptance:
1. All nozzles are correctly located and oriented 1. Vortex breakers installed
2. Attachments for ladders and platforms are 2. Trays and downcomers installed
correctly located 3. Internal pipework installed
3. Holding down bolt holes are correctly located 4. Demister pads installed
4. Manway and davits are correctly located and oriented 5. Packing installed
5. Nameplate is installed and data is correct 6. Internal lining complete
6. Visual inspection of weld carried out 7. Impingements plates installed
FWI
FWI
Date
Date
3.0 Placement 4.0 Platforms and ladders
1. Elevation correct - ELEVATION 1. Are installed in accordance to the

2. Orientation correct following drawings:
3. Alignment correct Foster Wheeler Dwg Rev.
4. Levelled Supplier Dwg Rev.
5. Hold down bolts released for grouting 2. Ladders are correctly installed
6. Hold down bolts torqued to correct settings 3. Platforms complete of : handrails, toe
7. ref. of tool (torque wrench)_ plates, clamps
ref. last calibration certificate date
ref. used over gear FWI
8. Vessel released for fireproofing
Date
FWI
Date
5.0 Vessel Test 6.0 Instrument and piping
Hydrostatic test was carried out on the above vessel on All instruments and piping to this vessel
at a pressure of bar for are satisfactorily installed.
duration of hours.
The result was satisfactory.
FWI FWI
Date Date
REMARKS:
APPROVED BY: CONTRACTOR AMECFW CLIENT
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
Client Report number
Contract Contractor
PRESSURE VESSEL EXTERNAL ACCEPTANCE
UNIT TOS SubTOS
TAG ITP
DWG DWG rev
CHECK DESCRIPTION Yes No N/A Note
Vessel / Tower is free from mechanical or paint

damages against visual inspection
Necessary manufacturing documentation is available to site
All nozzles are correctly located and oriented
Attachments for ladders and platforms are correctly located
Holding down bolt holes are correctly located
Manway and davits are correctly located and oriented
Nameplate is installed and data is correct
6 - Other (if necessary)
Remarks
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
07A2.03 Page 1 of 1 Report Code PV.001 rev 001

HORIZONTALITY
AND VERTICALITY Report number
CONTROL REPORT
Contract Contractor
PRESSURE VESSEL ERECTION
UNIT TOS SubTOS
TAG ITP
DWG DWG rev
CHECK DESCRIPTION Yes No N/A Notes

Correct elevation
Correct orientation
Correct alignment
VERTICALITY
Equipment design height: m
Instrument positioned at
0° 90°
A1 = A2=
(A1 +A2)/2=
H
0°
Maximum admissible: (to be specified)

90°
Maximum admissible deviation over total height: (to be specified)
HORIZONTALITY
Equipment project length: m
Deviation B
B1 =
B B2=
L (B1 +B2)/2=
B= mm
Maximum admissible longitudinal deviation: (to be specified)
Maximum admissible longitudinal deviation over total length: (to be specified)
Actual torqueing value :

ANCHOR BOLTS : torqued to correct setting as specified and released for grouting.
Remarks
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE

PRESSURE VESSEL TEST

PV.010/
AMECFW Contract:
Pressure vessel filling

Before starting of vessel filling with liquid media, it has been verified that suitable air intake openings have
been opened:
Subcontractor Date
Monitoring at regular intervals:

Date:
Hour:
Atm. Temp.
Shell Temp.
Pressurization:
Date: Atm. Temp.: Test duration:
Hour: Shell Temp.: Test pressure:
Fluid Temp.: Type Fluid Test:
Pressure vessel drainage

Before starting of drainage, it has been verified that:
◻ suitable air intake openings have been opened date:
name:
signature:
air intake description:
◻ air intake openings are not obstructed and air flow inside vessel is feasible
date:
name:
signature:
NOTES:
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
VESSEL INTERNAL
TRAYS
Report n.:
CERTIFICATE Contractor:
PV.015/
AMECFW Contract:
Tray Level Leakage Signatures

Nr. Accept. Toler:: Accept. Toler:: FW Client
Design Actual Design Actual Inspection Operation
Completion date:
NOTE:
(*) Checks must be carried out according to project document’s latest applicable revision.
 If not satisfactory, issue a punch list.
REMARKS:
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
VESSEL CLOSURE CERTIFICATE

PV.020/
AMECFW Contract:
Part 1: Internals
All internals are complete including:
a) Trays b) Internals Spurge Pipes c) Anti Vortex Raffles d) Demisters
Subcontractor FW Date
Part 2: Load filling of packing

The specified packing that follows has been installed:
Type Weight/Quantity
Reference drawing
Subcontractor FW Date
Part 3: Vessel Closure

This vessel internal finishing/lining/coating is undamaged and clean
internally:
Clearance for final closure:
For Client Inspection

For
Client Process
Date of closure:
REMARKS:
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
Client Report number
Contract Contractor
PLATFORM AND LADDERS INSTALLATION
UNIT MODULE TOS SubTOS
TAG ITP
DWG DWG rev
CHECK DESCRIPTION Yes No N/A Note
Ladders are correctly installed
Platforms are correctly installed
Handrails, toe plates, clamps
Other (as necessary)
Remarks
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE

PRESSURE VESSEL CLOSURE
Report n.: Contractor

PV.030/
AMECFW Contract:
Part 1: Internals installation complete Yes No N/A Note
Trays
Vortex breakers
Internal pipework
Demister pad
Packing
Lining
Impingement plates
Part 2: Vessel Closure
vessel internal finishing/lining/coating is undamaged
and internally clean
All manholes were opened
For all nozzles (including service ones and
manholes) final gaskets are installed as specified in
the drawings
For all nozzles (including service ones and
manholes) stud bolts are correct size and material
and tightening executed against the applicable
specification
Clearance for final
closure:
For Client Inspection

For
Client Process
Date of closure:
Remarks
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
10/11/17 A. F. Carnevale
Lomazzi
CONTROL Designer
TANKS ERECTION Pag/Pag. 1 din/from 8

TANKS ERECTION
AFWI DWG N°: Rev: C00 APPROVED FOR CONSTRUCTION

BD0955A- 07A2.05 DWG. REV. DATE
F.
A. Lomazzi SIGNATURE: A. MANTOVANI
Carnevale
04
03
02
01
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
AMEC FOSTER
ITALIANA S.r.l. 7 3 8 7 8 1 X 0 0 - X 3 0 6 0 0
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 30 31 80
Via S. Caboto, 15
20094 Corsico
(Milano) ITALY
doc.
SITE QUALITY
CONTROL TANKS
ERECTION
TANKS ERECTION Rev.: C00
Date: 10 November 2017
CONTENTS
I. SCOPE
II. SUBJECT
III. DEFINITION
IV. REFERENCE
V. PROCEDURE
VI. RECORDS
VII. ATTACHMENTS
I. SCOPE
This job specification provides the guidance and minimum requirements for
inspection and documentation of all activities related to the subject of this
document.
applicable documentation included in the CONTRACT. The most stringent
requirement shall apply.
II. SUBJECT
This document refers to the installation of

tanks.
III. DEFINITION
A. RESPONSIBILITIES
CONTRACTOR shall execute and control its activities included in the

scope of the works, in accordance with CONTRACTOR project Quality
Control Plan and all approved drawings and technical documents
deemed necessary for the execution.

and tests required and shall provide, but not limited to:
- All works necessary for the preparation and execution of

inspections and testing.
safely.
- Only calibrated and certified tools shall be utilized.
- Shall have available an up to date calibration log.
Codes.
- Continue to update of the Quality Control Plan.
EMPLOYER or other Parties signature on inspection, examination and

test reports, does not release the CONTRACTOR from its
responsibilities.
The Quality Control Plan is a CONTRACTOR document endorsing all

quality control requirements detailed in this Job Specification and other
applicable document included in the CONTRACT.
The Quality Control Plan shall include the inspections and test
requirement included in this Job Specification, in Subcontract
Requisition and relevant attachment and/or added as and when
required during the execution of the CONTRACT including vendor
documents and CONTRACTOR supplied material and equipment.

the:
· Construction stage test and inspection

· Description
· Acceptable Criteria
· Applicable Procedure
· Verification Document
· Responsibilities of inspection categories
· Reporting-form
· Number
· Inspection attendance
Executed inspections and test shall be documented through quality

control forms included in this specification, which shall be included in
CONTRACTOR Quality Control Plan.
IV. REFERENCE
listed in the Subcontract Requisition, which is part of the CONTRACT.
Required inspections and tests by Local Regulation may not be included in

this document. However, CONTRACTOR shall strictly adhere to Local
Regulation and shall report the execution to EMPLOYER.
Equivalent and applicable Project codes rise above Local Regulation if the
second are less stringent. In case of conflict between Local Regulation and
Project Code, the most stringent shall apply.
CONTRACTOR shall timely report any deviation from Project requirements

and no deviation shall be implemented without prior approval from
EMPLOYER.
V. PROCEDURE
A. QUALITY CONTROL PLAN (INSPECTION & TEST

PLANS)
CONTRACTOR shall endorse this Job Specification as integrated part
of its Quality Control Plan using the procedure, test codes and forms in
accordance with the attached at Section VII
CONTRACTOR shall issue all Quality Control Plans thirty days before
the starting of works or thirty days before the beginning of new
activities.
CONTRACTOR shall not change the numbering of EMPLOYER form or

test codes. Additional codes shall be numbered adding a letter to the
last issued code.
CONTRACTOR shall submit the additional codes to EMPLOYER for

approval prior the execution of the inspection and/or test.
CONTRACTOR shall revise and update the Quality Control Plan as and
when required during the execution of the CONTRACT incorporating
any appropriate requirement resulting from safety design, engineering
specifications, standards, design codes, improved practices and vendor
documents.
All the entries/points included in Quality form shall be filled-in; N/A shall
be used when not applicable and/or not available.
Inspections and tests shall be carried out concurrently with the

execution of the relevant construction and installation works.
All items subject to an inspection or test cycle which by their nature or

service are to be covered or concealed (foundations, underground civil
works and networks, surfaces to be treated and later insulated, etc.)
shall be inspected and tested before getting covered or concealed.

schedule of all planned site quality control activities consistent with the
work schedule approved by EMPLOYER.
CONTRACTOR shall timely notify EMPLOYER and/or other involved

Parties to witness the inspections and tests as indicated in the
approved I&TP.
CONTRACTOR shall issue approved quality control form immediately

after the completion of each inspection activity. All reports shall be
approved and signed off by CONTRACTOR authorized personnel prior
to submission to EMPLOYER for review or approval, as appropriate.
CONTRACTOR shall transmit to EMPLOYER a list of authorized

personnel with name, position within the project and specimen
signature.
Signatures and Form shall be accompanied with stamp indicating name
and position. In case stamp is not available, name shall be clearly
printed in capital letters.
C. MINIMUM DUTIES
All tank fabrication and erection will be in accordance with design

requirements, project drawings and specifications. FWI Engineer must
approve any deviation.
Before tank erection, foundations level should be checked; if not

otherwise specified in the applicable specifications and standards, the
following procedure shall be used: the elevation in any 30 feet (9 m) of
circumference shall be within +/- 1/8’’ (3,2 mm) and within +/- ¼’’ (6,4
mm) in the total circumference measured from the average elevation.
The CONTRACTOR shall not carry out any excavation, packing and
repair to foundation unless on FWI written instructions. During water
filling for hydrotest, foundations settlement shall be checked.
The tank shall be carefully checked for plumbness, roundness,

dimensions and local deviations before the roof members are
positioned, or the wind girder erected.
Deviations shall be lower than API Standards 650 Par 5.5 tolerances,
or as otherwise stated by the applicable Project specifications and
standards.
When the entire tank is completed, but before any permanent external
piping is connected to the tank, shall be hydrostatically tested
(according to API Standard 650 para 5.5.6).
Inspection of
joints
Before starting of the work on site, all welding procedure specifications

shall be submitted for approval to FWI, giving essential welding
variables such as electrodes type, size, run size, number of runs,
current voltage, etc.
Butt-welded joints shall be examined by radiography in accordance with

requirements of API Code or contractual documents. Within the limits of
choice permitted by API Code. FWI supervisor shall determine the
locations for examination by radiography.
Fillet welds shall be inspected by visual method and repair criteria shall
be according to API Standard 650 para 6.5, unless otherwise stated by
the Project documents. Shell to bottom fillet welds shall be checked
100% by magnetic particle examination on both internal and external
tank sides.
Vacuum test is required for all tank bottom welds and shall be
performed according to API Standard 650 para 5.3.7.
Reinforcing plate weld shall be tested by pressurized air at 15 Pound

according to API Standard 650 para 5.3.5.
Examinations shall be made as the work progresses and as soon as

the welded joints are accessible for such purpose. For reference and
report forms see Job Spec 07A2.08.
VI. RECORDS
Inspections and certifications shall be carried out in accordance with QC

procedures and Inspection and Test Plan.
The CONTRACTOR shall issue testing and inspection documentation in

accordance with the approved QC forms.
1. VII. ATTACHMENTS
Tanks erection
QC forms:
TK.001 Plumbness and roundness report

TK.005 Tank erection check list
TK.010 Tank hydrostatic test and
foundation settlement
Discipline MW TANK ITP: TK-100 CON. STD.: 07A2.05
Test/Inspection Document Involvement

TANKS ERECTION
Check welding Site and
1 EN 288 07A2.08 TK.005 E H
documentation Milan
approval
2 Check foundation levelling Drawing Civil Job Specification TK.005 E H
API Standard 650 par. API Standard 650 par.

3 Vacuum test on bottom weld TK.005 E H
8.6 8.6
Butt weld: API Code /
4 ASME TK.005 E RI
Radiographic Test Contractual
Documents
Shell-bottom fillet API Standard 650 par.
5 ASME TK.005 E RI
weld Magnetic Test: 7.2.4 & 8.2
100%
Check plumbness API Standard 650 par. API Standard 650 par.
6 TK.001 E W Before roof posing
and roundness 7.5 7.5
Surface protection Painting Job Painting Job
7 TK.005 E RI
and painting Specification Specificatio
n
Reinforcing Plate weld
API Standard 650
8 pressurized air test (at Job Specification - E W
par. 7.3.4
15 pound)
Nozzles, fittings, permanent
9 attachments correctly Drawing Drawing TK.005 E RI
located and oriented

H = HOLD POINT. A point beyond which a work shall not proceed without the approval of Contractor,A FW, Owner/ Owner’s
Discipline MW TANK ITP: TK-100 CON. STD.: 07A2.05

TANKS ERECTION
10 Internally cleaning Job Specification Job Specification TK.005 E RI
API Standard 650

11 Hydro test Drawing / Job Spec. TK.010 E H
par. 7.3.6

W = WITNESS / Inspection. Measuring & testing of work, and comparing the results with the design CL= Owner
requirements RI = RANDOM INSPECTION. Continuous monitoring of work without Hold Point requirementA NB= Laboratory / Notified Body
H = HOLD POINT. A point beyond which a work shall not proceed without the approval of Contractor, FW, Owner/
Owner’s Inspector (TPI), NoBo
TANK PLUMBNESS AND ROUNDNESS
Report n.:
Contractor:
TK .001/
AMECFW Contract:
Tank Plumbness Tank Roundness

Ax Accept Rx Accept (Y/N)
Measured 1 ft above Measured 1 ft above
bottom corner
(Y/N) bottom corner
1
2
3
H
4
5
6
R A 7
8
REFERENCE: Tolerance
(API 650 Par. 7.5)
NORTH Deviation Ax 1/200
PLUMBNESS:
1 PLANT
H ROUNDNESS: Tank Radius:
8 2
R1 If R < 20 ft (6,1 m) ½’’ (12,7 mm)
R8
R2 If 20 < R < 75 ¾’’ (19 mm)
R7 ft (22,9 m.)
7 R3 3 If 75 < R < 125 1‘’ (25,4 mm)
R6 ft (38,1 m)
R4 If R > 125 ft 1 ¼’’ (31,7 mm)
R5
6 4 LOCAL DEVIATIONS:
5 PEAKING Vertical joint ½’’ (12,7

mm) BANDING Horizontal joint ½’’ (12,7
mm)
NOTE:
REMARKS:

NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
TANK HYDROSTATIC TEST AND
FOUNDATION SETTLEMENT
TK .010/
AMECFW Contract:
N NORTH Tank Nr.:

NW PLANT
NE
Diameter:
Height:
W E
Capacity:
SW SE Design foundation elevation:

S
Water elev. Date Time Date Time Date Time Date Time Date Time Date Time
Check
Empty tank at m at m at m at m at m remarks
point
NE
SE
SW
NW
NOTE:
 Before starting of drainage, it shall be verified that suitable air intake openings are open and not obstructed.
REMARKS:
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
TANK ERECTION CHECK LIST

TK.005/
AMECFW Contract:
Item to check Date Signature

BEFORE MECHANICAL WORKS START:
1. Welding procedure and welder license submitted
2. Foundation levelling check performed
DURING BOTTOM AND SHELL
ERECTION:
3. Vacuum test performed on bottom welds
4. Butt welds inspected by radiographic method
5. Shell-bottom fillet welds inspected by magnetic particle
examination BEFORE ROOF POSITIONING:
6. Plumbness, roundness and local deviations
checked BEFORE TANK MECHANICAL
COMPLETION:
7. Surface protection and painting as per Specifications
8. Nozzles, fittings, permanent attachments correctly located and
oriented
9. Tank is internally clear, free of debris and temporary bracing and
tools removed
10.Hydrotest performed and foundation settlement checked
11.Fixed roof vents: packing and blanks have been removed and all
moving parts works normally
12.All tests and examinations have been carried out
13.All required documentation is complete and handed over to FWI
NOTE:
REMARKS:
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
TANK ERECTION CHECK LIST

TK.005/
AMECFW Contract:
Item to check Date Signature

BEFORE MECHANICAL WORKS START:
1. Welding procedure and welder license submitted
2. Foundation levelling check performed
DURING BOTTOM AND SHELL
ERECTION:
3. Vacuum test performed on bottom welds
4. Butt welds inspected by radiographic method
5. Shell-bottom fillet welds inspected by magnetic particle
examination BEFORE ROOF POSITIONING:
6. Plumbness, roundness and local deviations
checked BEFORE TANK MECHANICAL
COMPLETION:
7. Surface protection and painting as per Specifications
8. Nozzles, fittings, permanent attachments correctly located and
oriented
9. Tank is internally clear, free of debris and temporary bracing and
tools removed
10.Hydrotest performed and foundation settlement checked
11.Fixed roof vents: packing and blanks have been removed and all
moving parts works normally
12.All tests and examinations have been carried out
13.All required documentation is complete and handed over to FWI
NOTE:
REMARKS:
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
TANK HYDROSTATIC TEST AND
FOUNDATION SETTLEMENT
TK .010/
AMECFW Contract:
N NORTH Tank Nr.:

NW PLANT
NE
Diameter:
Height:
W E
Capacity:
SW SE Design foundation elevation:

S
Water elev. Date Time Date Time Date Time Date Time Date Time Date Time
Check
Empty tank at m at m at m at m at m remarks
point
NE
SE
SW
NW
NOTE:
 Before starting of drainage, it shall be verified that suitable air intake openings are open and not obstructed.
REMARKS:
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
04/01/18 A. Lomazzi F. Carnevale
Data/ Intocmit Verificat/
CBD Date / Checked
SITE QUALITY Designer
CONTROL Pag/Pag. 1 din/from 14
MW PIPING

MW PIPING

CONSTRUCTION
A. Lomazzi F. Carnevale DWG. REV. DATE
SIGNATURE: A.
Prepared Verified Approved MANTOVANI
04
03
02
01
00 Issueed for Comments 04/01/2018 A. Lomazzi F. Carnevale
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
AMEC FOSTER
ITALIANA S.r.l. 7 3 8 7 8 1 X 0 0 - X 3 0 7 0 0
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 30 31 80
Via S. Caboto, 15
20094 Corsico
(Milano) ITALY
doc.
SITE QUALITY
CONTROL MW PIPING
MW PIPING Rev. C00:
CONTENTS
1 REFERENCE
2 - CONTRACTOR’S MINIMUM DUTIES
3 - ATTACHMENTS
MW PIPING Rev. C00:
1. REFERENCE
07A2.00 Construction QC requirements
2. MINIMUM DUTIES
CONTRACTOR shall execute all the activities listed in the following

paragraphs and shall prepare, manage and file all the relevant
documentation.
1.1 - TRACEABILTY
Material Traceability provides the means to definitively locate all materials

in the final assembly, proof positive verification that material meets project
requirements, allow, in case of failure, during investigation phase, to
identify components of the same material stock and also guarantee safety
working condition.
Piping traceability allow to trace the material back to mill certificates trough
traceability data (i.e. Heat Number) that are recorded MTR (Material
Traceability report).
a. Piping
traceability
Steel mill shall deliver marked pipes accompanied with documentation

according to applicable technical specification (i.e. DN, PN, material, n° of
smelting, inspector mark). Pipes shall be marked on one or both ends.
For Stainless Steel tubes, the marking is usually continuous along the
whole tube.
Fittings and other piping parts (except for valves) shall be marked (by the
Manufacturer) in compliance with applicable technical specification (i.e.
DN, PN, material, heat number, inspector mark).
b. Traceability applicable range in case of PED (Pressure European

Directive)
Traceability is applicable only for process line as per following table unless
otherwise specified:
Diameter Threaded pipes Welded pipes

PED >1” >1”
SEP None >2”
MW PIPING Rev. C00:
All items along the lines (expansion joint, valves, etc.) shall be always
traced discarding diameter.
In case PED is not applicable all diameter greater than 2” shall be

traced.
c. Cutting
activities
Before a pipe or a fitting is cut, traceability data shall be reported on all the
resulting parts immediately out of the heat affected zone (50 mm from
weld).
d. Sandblasting, painting, galvanization and coating

activities
Before sandblasting traceability data shall be properly protected to avoid

deleting of the same. Once pipes are successfully tested, all traceability
data shall be available only on documentation inside test pack and touch-
up works on joint areas can be allowed.
e. Marking
systems
Stainless steel,
Diameter Carbon Steel, Low alloy Inconel, Hastelloy,
duplex and similar
>2” Low stress stamp Permanent pencil marker
=<2” Permanent pencil marker Permanent pencil marker
Permanent pencil marker shall not contain

Chloride.
In case there is not enough space to report all traceability data, a stainless
steel label to be attached by stainless steel wire can be used.
f. Traceability at prefabrication
shop
Here below there is the list of minimum documents relevant for each
line:
- NDT and traceability

report;
- Isometric drawing with welds identification (welding
map).
Traceability report shall include material certificate number of all
components of the isometric (including also the items not welded but, for
instance, flanged).
As soon as a spool is prefabricated, CONTRACTOR
shall:
MW PIPING Rev. C00:
- complete and verify all related

documentation
- verify compliance between material traceability documents and the
prefabricated piping
- attach to the concerned spool a metallic label with spool identification
(i.e. isometric drawing).
After that, CONTRACTOR is authorized to send the spool to field for site
erection.
g. Traceability at
site
If the line is further welded directly at site, documentation shall be updated

with relevant reports (isometric drawing with welds identification, NDT
record, traceability data, certificates about welds heat treatment made at
site).
References to accompanying technical documentation of valves and other

piping parts (expansion bellows, special hangers, etc.) shall be added.
1.2 - PIPING FABRICATION AND ERECTION
The following points define the minimum duties of Mechanical Contractor

related to quality control, both on site and in prefabrication:
- keep the working area, warehouse and prefabrication area tidy and
clean with materials (piping and fittings, metallic and non-metallic)
divided by Requisition. Particularly, all alloy steel shall be appropriately
colour-coded (if not already done by Vendor/Mill) after the check of
correspondence with received documentation (Material Issue Reports -
MIR).
- use adequate protection methods for materials in his possession to

prevent casual damage and deterioration, contamination, particularly
for prefabricated spools (during prefabrication, storage both in
workshop and in site, transport, assembly, etc.).
- create and update registers of isometric drawings and MIR’s delivered

from EMPLOYER and check the correspondence between materials
and MIR’s.
- isolate, in its own warehouse, materials damaged, note it in a specific

register and notify relevant documentation to EMPLOYER.
MW PIPING Rev. C00:
- assure that relevant isometric drawing number and revision are

indicated on all spools, both in prefabrication and delivery phases.
- maintain updated a “material handling log” to/from EMPLOYER

warehouse.
- apply, if required by the project documents, the PMI procedure,

supplying calibration certificate for used equipment and operator
qualifications.
- assure that drawings and documents in use are valid and with
applicable revision and that superseded documents are appropriately
identified and isolated or destroyed.
- assure that reference documents (applicable codes, standards and

specifications, last revision) are available in work places, both on site
and in prefabrication areas.
- provide the list of all equipment that need calibration, including all
equipment that CONTRACTOR propose to use, both on site and in
prefabrication areas
- assure that all equipment, listed as above, have its own official
calibration certificate showing: serial number, calibration date, and
calibration period.
- adopt adequate protections to prevent damages during the transport of

spools.
- prepare the file for all hydraulic test circuit (with involved lines).
- ensure availability and installation of every fittings needs for hydraulic

test (for example butt weld caps).
- verify quality of the water for hydraulic test.
- perform NDT as per project specifications, codes and standards for all
welds where the hydraulic test is not applicable (“Golden Joints”).
- remove and/or protect all instruments before performance of chemical

cleaning on a completed or part of piping system or equipment.
MW PIPING Rev. C00:
- handle all pipe/fitting elements on site following requirements of Job

Spec 07A4.01. In detail the following requirements have to be always
observed:
- to avoid impacts and falls, all lifting operations shall be surveyed

- fork lift shall not be used for loading and unloading of pipes and
fittings
- pipe/fitting less than 3 meters length may be handled with two-
points slings
- pipe/fitting of greater dimensions shall be lifted using a lifting beam
with a minimum of three slings
- pipe/fitting shall not be run over by a vehicle or by labour
- lined pipe/fitting shall not be moved or displaced by rolling
- pipe/fitting shall never be lifted or handled using hooks or other
devices which insert into the ends of lined elements
- in case of impacts and/or falls, the involved lined elements shall be
immediately segregated, notified to EMPOYER and then repaired or
replaced upon gravity of damage
1.3 - CEMENT LINED PIPING
The following points define the minimum duties of Mechanical Contractor

related to quality control of cement-lined piping:
- remove external weld-reinforcement of fusion welded pipes (for

installation of sleeves for pipe joints);
- execute joints and lining repair in correct way (for “sleeve” and “half-
sleeve” joints):
- weld of sleeve and half-sleeve on pipe;

- lining repair application (epoxy compound type “Araldite” or similar)
on lining contact surface;
- pipes jointing and tack welding;
- joint completion with welding sleeves and half-sleeves to the other
pipe;
- execute cold-type cutting of lined pipes with the correct tools;
- carry out hydraulic test (lines with diameter. up to 24” included) after
completion of curing of lining and repairs. For lines with greater
diameter, if lining has to be installed on site, hydro test can be
executed before lining installation;
MW PIPING Rev. C00:
- perform pneumatic test on welds of half-sleeves for joints;
- execute lining repair where required (with epoxy compound type

“Araldite” or similar) after checking of correct preparation and cleaning;
1.4 - HYDROSTATIC TESTING
Prior to proceed with Hydro Tests, CONTRACTOR shall collect in

Pressure Test documentation (Test Pack) for each testing hydraulic
circuit with involved lines, as minimum, the following documents:
- Index
- P&ID with hydraulic circuit marked up (including blind location)
- Copy of line list
- Isometric with weld identification (welding map)
- AS-BUILT relevant to the hydrostatic circuit.
- Construction Punch list
- Special support drawing “if applicable”
- Mechanical completion of pipeworks (PI.060)
- Ready to test (form PI.010)
- NDT and traceability report (form WE.025A/B) including PWHT
- Check Prefabricated Spool (form PI.001)
- Valve Test “if applicable” (form PI.005)
- Orifice flanges / Orifice plates “if applicable” (form PI.015)
- Cement lined pipelines – Checks on site installation “if applicable” (form
PI.020)
- Bolt-up for Critical Flanges “if applicable” (form PI.025)
- Piping Hydrostatic test (form PI.030)
- Gauge calibration certification
- System Flushing (form PI.040)
- Chemical cleaning “if applicable” (form PI.045)
- Pipework Reinstatement check list (form PI.050)
- Painting completion certificate (form PT.001)
- U/G steel piping/wrapping/coating inspection “if applicable” (form
PI.035)
- Insulation work completion (form IS.001)
Pressure tests shall be performed in accordance to the Project

Specification.
MW PIPING Rev. C00:
Test fluid shall be injected in the lowest point to avoid that remains trapped
air and all vents shall be open during the filling.
When the pressure test as been reached and before the beginning of
system inspection, intercept valve shall be closed and testing pump shall
be disconnected.
Piping Hydrostatic Test Report shall be issued by CONTRACTOR to

confirm that the test has been performed and accepted
1.5 - CHEMICAL CLEANING
Where foreseen by the Engineering documents, CONTRACTOR shall

perform chemical cleaning once piping system has been mechanically
completed and hydraulically tested and all equipment installed. Chemical
Cleaning shall be executed during pre-commissioning or while lines
flushing, in any case after Construction Punch List are completed.
Before execution of chemical cleaning on a completed or part of piping

system or equipment, CONTRACTOR shall verify that all instruments have
been removed and/or protected.
While performing and after completion of chemical cleaning, the relevant

form shall be filled-in by CONTRACTOR.
1.6 - REQUISITION FOR PIPELINE SUBJECT TO PED DIRECTIVE
In the attached ITP, involvement of Notified Body concern exclusively

pipeline with category II and III (if not different requested).
MW PIPING Rev. C00:
3. ATTACHMENTS
ABOVE GROUND PIPING FABRICATION

ABOVE GROUND PIPING ERECTION
UNDERGROUND PIPING FABRICATION AND ERECTION
CEMENT LINED PIPELINES
STEAM TRACING
Q
QC forms:
PI.001 Check Prefabricated Spool

PI.005 Valve Test Report
PI.010 Mechanical Completion of Pipework
PI.015 Orifice flanges/Orifice plates Report
PI.020 Cement lined pipelines – Checks on site installation
PI.025 Bolt-up for Critical Flanges
PI.030 Piping Hydrostatic Test Report
PI.035 U/G steel piping/wrapping/coating inspection report
PI.040 System Flushing Report
PI.045 Chemical Cleaning Report
PI.050 Pipework reinstatement check list
PI.060 Piping Final inspection Record
Discipline MW PIPING ITP: PI-100 CON. STD.: 07A2.06

Acceptance Criteria Verifying Document Remarks

Check Prefabricated
Isometrics, Line Isometrics, Line
spool: dimensional
01 List, 50A10, 52A1, List, 50A10, 52A1, PI.001 E W H
check, welding, NDT,
88A1, 88A1,
PWHT, NDE after PWHT
07A2.06 07A2.06
Valve: check material, tag, NoBo verify only for
Piping spec. , API Std Piping spec. , API Std
02 visual check body, PI.005 E W H PED cat. II ≥20% and III
598 598
pressure test 100%
NoBo verify only for
Approval of Welding
03 ASME / EN, 88A1 07A2.08, 88A1 WE.025A E H H PED cat. II ≥20% and III
Summary
100%
Approval of Piping
04 ASME / EN 50A10, 52A1 WE.025B E H H PED cat. II ≥20% and III
Traceability
100%
MC completion
05 Final Documentation Visual DOSSIER E H
manual

H = HOLD POINT. A point beyond which a work shall not proceed without the approval of Contractor, AFW, Owner/ Owner’s Inspector
(TPI), NoBo


Mechanical completion of 50A10, 52A1, 88A1, 50A10, 52A1, 88A1,
01 PI.010 E H
pipe works 07A2.06 07A2.06
02 Orifice Flange 50A10 50A10 PI.015 E W
03 Bolt-up for critical flanges 57A1 57A1 PI.025 E W

Approval of Welding
04 ASME / EN, 88A1 07B2.08-02, 88A1 WE.025A E H H PED cat. II ≥20% and III
Summary
100%
Approval of Piping
Traceability
100%
06 Hydro test 89A1 89A1 PI.030 E H H “
07 Flushing and cleaning Pre-Commissioning Pre-Commissioning PI.040 E W
08 Chemical cleaning Pre-Commissioning Pre-Commissioning PI.045 E W
50A10, 52A1, 57A1, 50A10, 52A1, 57A1,

09 Drain and restatement PI.050 E W
89A1 89A13
MC completion
manual

(TPI), NoBo


01 PI.010 E H
Approval of Welding
Summary
100%
Approval of Piping
Traceability
100%
05 Wrapping and coating 83A4 83A4 PI.035 E W
50A10, 52A1, 57A1, 50A10, 52A1, 57A1,

89A1 89A1
08 Final Documentation Visual MC completion manual DOSSIER E H

(TPI), NoBo


87A4, 50A10, Vendor’s 87A4, 50A10, Vendor’s
01 Conformity of material PI.020 E RI
requirements requirements
Conformity of material
02 for branch connection PI.020 E RI
with
Backfilling executed as
03 41A3 41A3 PI.020, CV.005 E RI
per specification
Approval of Welding
Summary
100%
Approval of Piping
Traceability
100%
50A10, 52A1, 57A1, 50A10, 52A1, 57A1,

89A1 89A1
MC completion
manual

(TPI), NoBo

STEAM TRACING
01 Hydro / Service test 89A1 89A1 PI.030 E H
50A10, 52A1, 57A1, 50A10, 52A1, 57A1,

89A1 89A1

(TPI), NoBo

Acceptance Criteria Verifying Document Remarks

Check Prefabricated
Isometrics, Line Isometrics, Line
spool: dimensional
01 List, 50A10, 52A1, List, 50A10, 52A1, PI.001 E W H
check, welding, NDT,
88A1, 88A1,
PWHT, NDE after PWHT
07A2.06 07A2.06
Valve: check material, tag, NoBo verify only for
Piping spec. , API Std Piping spec. , API Std
02 visual check body, PI.005 E W H PED cat. II ≥20% and III
598 598
pressure test 100%
Approval of Welding
Summary
100%
Approval of Piping
Traceability
100%
MC completion
manual

(TPI), NoBo


01 PI.010 E H
02 Orifice Flange 50A10 50A10 PI.015 E W
03 Bolt-up for critical flanges 57A1 57A1 PI.025 E W

Approval of Welding
04 ASME / EN, 88A1 07B2.08-02, 88A1 WE.025A E H H PED cat. II ≥20% and III
Summary
100%
Approval of Piping
Traceability
100%
08 Chemical cleaning Pre-Commissioning Pre-Commissioning PI.045 E W
50A10, 52A1, 57A1, 50A10, 52A1, 57A1,

89A1 89A13
MC completion
manual

(TPI), NoBo


01 PI.010 E H
Approval of Welding
Summary
100%
Approval of Piping
Traceability
100%
05 Wrapping and coating 83A4 83A4 PI.035 E W
50A10, 52A1, 57A1, 50A10, 52A1, 57A1,

89A1 89A1
08 Final Documentation Visual MC completion manual DOSSIER E H

(TPI), NoBo


01 Conformity of material PI.020 E RI
Conformity of material
02 for branch connection PI.020 E RI
with
Backfilling executed as
03 41A3 41A3 PI.020, CV.005 E RI
per specification
Approval of Welding
Summary
100%
Approval of Piping
Traceability
100%
50A10, 52A1, 57A1, 50A10, 52A1, 57A1,

89A1 89A1
MC completion
manual

(TPI), NoBo

STEAM TRACING
01 Hydro / Service test 89A1 89A1 PI.030 E H
50A10, 52A1, 57A1, 50A10, 52A1, 57A1,

89A1 89A1

(TPI), NoBo
CHECK PREFABRICATED SPOOL

PI.001/
AMECFW Contract:
PMI
NDT
Dimensional Welding (welds NDT after
SPOOL N° before PWHT
check completion or/and base PWHT
PWHT
material)
Remarks:
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
CHECK PREFABRICATED SPOOL

PI.005/
AMECFW Contract:
IDENTIFICATION OF MONITORING AND MEASURING DEVICES: PAGE OF

DATE: MANUFACTURER:
TYPE VALVE
Gate Globe Ball Check Butterfly
Size Class (Rating)

Trim Material Tag No. / Symbol
Body Material ID No.

For Cast Steel Valves Only Body Heat # Bonnet Heat #
PRESSURE TEST
Valve Body Hydro Test

Test Duration:………..[min] Test Pressure …………………. Pass Fail
Retest
Test Duration:………..[min] Test Pressure …………………. Pass Fail
Upstream Valve Seat Downstream Valve Seat
Low Pressure Test PSIG Leakage Rate. # Drops, Bubbles/Minute
Pass Fail
High Pressure Test PSIG Leakage Rate # Drops, Bubbles/Minute
Pass Fail
Test Duration Minutes
Test Result Accepted Rejected If rejected, see NCR n.
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
MECHANICAL
COMPLETION OF
PIPEWORK
PI.010/
AMECFW Contract:
1.0 All Pipework and standard pipe supports are installed.
Contractor: AMECFW:
2.0 All N.D.T. on the above line have been cleared and repairs carried out (if necessary).
Contractor: AMECFW: (welding inspector)
3.0 Bolts and gaskets are installed to specifications.
Contractor: AMECFW:
4.0 ref. of tool (torque wrench) ref. last calibration certificate date ref. used over gear
Contractor: AMECFW:
5.0 Valves are correct to specification.
Contractor: AMECFW:
6.0 Spring hanger and special pipe support.
Contractor: AMECFW:
7.0 All temporary gaskets for hydraulic test are substituted.
Contractor: AMECFW:
8.0 Comments and exclusions:
Contractor: AMECFW:
NOTE:
⇒ All the items on this sheet to be completed prior to pressure test
REMARKS:
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
ORIFICE FLANGES/ORIFICE PLATES REPORT

PI.015/
AMECFW Contract:
REPORT CHECKS
Internal Grinding of root Pressure Gaske

Item Line Identification Code ISO No. Tab end position Flow
control taps t type
s position
CHECKS SHALL BE CARRIED OUT IN ACCORDANCE WITH ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PROJECT DOC’S, IN THE APPLICABLE
REVISION. FOR NEGATIVE OR NOT SATISFACTORY CHECKS, PUNCH LIST MUST BE ISSUED.
INSTRUMENTATIO AMECFW
APPROVED BY: PIPING CONTRACTOR AMECFW PIPING S/V CLIENT
N CONTRACTOR INSTRUMENTATION
S/V
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
CHECKS ON SITE
INSTALLATION
PI.020/
AMECFW Contract:
CHECK / MEASUREMENT Date/Signature

1. Conformity of material for sleeve joints (API 5L Gr B/ ASTM A285 Gr B).
2. Conformity of material for branch connections with dia.< 2” included (AISI 316).
3. Outside weld reinforcement reduced flush with the surface of pipe.
4. Conformity of electrodes used to weld AISI 316 branch connections (austenitic).
5. Branch connections (dia.< 2”) located near to pipe end as to repair damaged lining.
6. Cement lining correctly shaped for installation of all butterfly valves.
7. Lining repair (with epoxy compound) executed for all butterfly valves.
8. Lining repair (with epoxy compound) executed at all joints.
9. Lining repair (with epoxy compound) executed for all branch connections.
10. Branches AISI 316: Epoxy compound covers completely the welded joint.
11. Handling, Transport and Storage (Ref. Procedure CON-C06):

Lined pipes stored on adequate supports and shockabsorbers.
Lined pipes transported and handled with adequate protections against shocks, falls,
rolling, bending.
All branches are suitably plugged for transport.
Pipe ends, either flanged or not, are adequately, protected with caps.
12. Backfilling executed as per specification.
13. Non destructive examinations and repairs (where necessary) completed.
14. Lining repairs executed with: D cement mortar D “Araldite” o similar D (other)
Application carried out with:
15. Defects to be repaired (inspections executed before and after installation)
Id. Defective piece Checked defect Repairs acceptance
NOTE: Any used testing equipment shall have full traceability: equipment type and number, calibration certificate and period.
APPROVED BY: CONTRACTOR AMECFWI CLIENT
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
BOLT-UP FOR CRITICAL FLANGES

PI.025/
AMECFW Contract:
Instrument certification of calibration:
REMOVAL INSTALLATION
FLG. N° ISO N° BOLT-UP
TEMPORARY FINAL
GASKET GASKET
Remove Check by Date Install Check by Date Perform Check by Date
Remarks:
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
HYDROSTATIC TEST REPORT

PI.030/
AMECFW Contract:
Line Pressure (barg) Pressur Signature Date

e
gauge
Line identification code Iso. No. From To Design Test Ref. No. Contr. FW Owner Nobo
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
U/G STEEL
PIPING/WRAPPING/COATING
Report n.:
INSPECTION REPORT Contractor:
PI.035/
AMECFW Contract:
CHECKS
Line identification code From To wrap/coa Holiday Test
Surface preparation Wrap/Coat material t (voltage)
thickness
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
SYSTEM FLUSHING REPORT

PI.040/
AMECFW Contract:
FROM TO
P&ID No. Line Identification Code
(Equipment No.) (Equipment No.)
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
PI.040 Rev. 00
CHEMICAL CLEANING REPORT

PI.045/
AMECFW Contract:
OPERATIONAL FLOW MEDIUM: CHEMICALS & WATER CERTIFICATION:
3
PHASE: Total holding: [m ]
Y N Heating system:
Flushing:   Chem. used Q.ty Chem. used Q.ty
Chemical degreasing:   [kg] [kg]
Pickling:  
Passivation:  
Other:  
P&I No LINE IDENTIFICATION CODE EQUIPMENT
FROM TO
READINGS
++ +++
Hrs. Ph Temperatur Flow Fe ions Fe ions Notes
3
e [°C] [m /h concentr. [p.p.m. concentr. [p.p.m.
] ] ]
INTERNAL VISUAL INSPECTION
INERTIZATION Medium: Pressure:
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
PIPEWORK REINSTATEMENT CHECK LIST

PI.050/
AMECFW Contract:
Item to check Check Comments

1. Check that hydrostatic testing and flushing have been
satisfactorily completed and recorded
2. Drying/drainage of lines complete and accepted
3. Check that correct bolts and gaskets are installed at all

mechanical joints
4 Ref. of tool (torque wrench)
ref. used over gear
5. Check that all pipe cleaning and pickling has been
satisfactorily completed and recorded
6. Check that specified block valves have locking devices
correctly installed
7. Check that all valves are functioning properly and that
spindle has been coated with ‘copaslip’ or equal where
specified (see Manufacturer’s manual )
8. Check that chain wheels for specified valves have been

correctly installed
9. Check that all extended spindles required for specific
valves have been installed
10. Check that all relief valves have been correctly
installed
11. Check that all thermo wells have been correctly
installed
12. Check that restriction and orifice plates have been
correctly installed
13. Check that all gags have been removed from spring-
loaded pipe supports and expansion bellows
14. Check that all pipe seals have been correctly fitted
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
PIPING FINAL INSPECTION RECORD

PI.060/
AMECFW Contract:
SYSTEM No. DOCUMENT No.

TEST PACKAGE No.
LINE CHECK has been completed and Line released for TEST
AMECFW
CONTRACTOR CLIENT
Piping Engineering QC
Signature
Name
Date
HYDRO TEST has been completed SATISFACTORY.

CONTRACTOR AMECFW QC CLIENT
Signature
Name
Date
FLUSHING has been completed SATISFACTORY

Signature
Name
Date
REINSTATEMENT has been completed SATISFACTORY

Signature
Name
Date
04/01/18 A. F.
Lomazzi Carnevale
CBD Data/ Intocmit/ Verificat/
Site Quality Control Date Designer Checked
MW Structural
Steel Pag/Pag. 1 din/from 9

MW STRUCTURAL STEEL
AFWI DWG N°: APPROVED FOR

Rev:C00 CONSTRUCTION
BD0955A- 07A2.07
DWG. REV. DATE
A. Lomazzi F. Carnevale
SIGNATURE: A.
MANTOVANI
04
03
02
01
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
AMEC FOSTER
ITALIANA S.r.l. 7 3 8 7 8 1 X 0 0 - X 3 0 8 0 0
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 30 31 80
Via S. Caboto, 15
20094 Corsico
(Milano) ITALY
doc.

MW STRUCTURAL STEEL
BD0955A-07A2.07
MW STRUCTURAL STEEL Rev. C00:
CONTENTS
1 - REFERENCE
3 - ATTACHMENTS
BD0955A-07A2.07
1. REFERENCE
07A2.00 Construction QC
requirements
2. MINIMUM DUTIES
This document shall be read in conjunction with the CONTRACT and all other related
and applicable documentation as in particular the Construction Product Regulation
CPR 305/20011 and European standard “EN 1090 - Execution of steel structures and
aluminum structures”. The most stringent requirement shall always apply.
Fabrication an d erection
inspections
Check materials used in steelwork fabrication for compliance with drawings.
Check structural steel welding and bolting.

If required by the Project documents, High-strength bolts have to be marked with
letters. Nuts shall be identified with marks on nuts face as per project specs.
Check of dimensions and thickness.
Visual check of field welds making sure that thickness is correct.

Check all bolting and welds of structural steel to ensure compliance with specifications
and drawings. In particular verify:
- Double nuts on columns (if required by constructions drawings).

- Bevel washers where required.
- The correct installation of ladders and cages.
- Gratings, floor plates, handrails and toe plates installed and secured as per
drawing.
- Misaligned holes shall be drilled and not cut with torch.
Erection of steel shall be to the tolerance given in specifications.
All bolted connections shall be tightened to the snug tight conditions. No full tensioning
condition is required unless otherwise indicated on the drawings/specifications. Snug
tight is defined as tightness that exists when all plies are in firm contact which will vary
from joint to joint depending on thickness and desire of parallelism of the connected
material. Full tensioning is defined as tightening a connection beyond snug tight
under a controlled procedure to produce a minimum specified tensile force on each
bolt in the connection.
BD0955A-07A2.07
At least 5% of bolts for every size used and unless otherwise specified shall be
checked to verify its correct tightening.
Steel shall not be erected until levels of grout pads have been verified as correct
and the necessary space for grouting has been satisfied. Where this tolerance is
exceeded, direction from Engineering shall be obtained before proceeding.
Welding and NDT’s
Structural steel welders shall be qualified as per Project specification.
Non-destructive tests shall be carried out in accordance to Project specifications.
Piperacks and structures control sequence
The notes given below shall be read in conjunction with the job specification and
are basic checks for the erection of piperacks and steel structures.
Sequence of Work Covered:
- Acceptance of foundations.
- Erection of steelwork.
- Plumbing and levelling.
- Grouting.
- Tightening of bolts.
Alterations to structural steel
Under no circumstances shall alterations be made to structural steel supplied by

others, except with the written permission of authorised Engineer.
3. ATTACHMENTS
Structural steelwork
fabrication Structural
steelwork erection
BD0955A-07A2.07
QC forms:
SS.001 Structural steelwork prefabrication testing certificate

SS.005 Structural steelwork erection testing certificate
SS.010 Structural steelwork plumbing check list
SS.015 Structural steelwork joint bolting tightening check
SS.020 Structural steelwork acceptance certificate
Client:«cliente» Plant/Location:
Contract:«longcontract» Contractor:
INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL ERECTION
ITP: SS-101 CON. STD.: 07A2.07
Test/Inspection Reference Responsibility Remarks
S/N Acceptance Criteria Verifying Document
Description Document CC AFW CL NB
1 GENERAL DOCUMENTATION TO BE REVIEWED AND/OR APPROVED

Construction drawings available and IFC Drawings in their
1.1 properly distributed latest approved revision
E R
Identification, traceability and marking Identification and

1.2 system procedure for EXC3 is in
EN 1090-2:2008 sec 6.2
marking procedure
E H
place
Cutting procedure in place and sampling
Thermal cutting capability
1.3 for checking the thermal cutting process EN 1090-2:2008 sec 6.4.3 Cutting procedure
reports vs ISO 9013
E H
capability executed
Hardness testing procedure (if specified)

of free edge surfaces is in place and Hardness check
1.4 sampling for local hardness capability
EN 1090-2:2008 sec 6.4.4
procedure
Hardness capability report E H
executed
Holing procedure is in place and sampling

1.5 for process capability check executed
EN 1090-2:2008 sec 6.6.3 Holing procedure Holing capability report E H
Procedure for mitigation of lamellar tearing Lamellar tearing

1.6 risk is in place mitigation procedure
E H H
1.7 Mechanical fastening procedure is in place EN 1090-2:2008 sec 12.5 Fastening procedure E H
Erection procedure to include setting out

1.8 and connection nodes survey EN 1090-2:2008 sec 9 Erection procedure E H
requirements is in place
Material Certificates as per
Material receipt
Structural steel material certifications are EN10204 and Declaration
1.9 available
EN 1090-2:2008 sec 5 and handling
of Performance as per
E R
procedure
CPR 305/2011
Responsibility: Organization:
R = REVIEW - No Notification is required. QC forms shall be signed by all parties involved after inspection
AFW= Amec Foster Wheeler
W = WITNESS - Notification is mandatory. CC can proceed with inspection even if not all the parties involved are CL= Owner
present H = HOLD POINT-CC cannot proceed with inspection and works without the approval of the parties involved NB= Notified Body
Page 1 of 3
Material receipt and handling procedure to Material receipt
1.10 ensure that handling / storage is duly EN 1090-2:2008 sec 6.3 and handling E R
organized to avoid damages is in place procedure
Control of
Control of measurement & test equipment
measurement & Register and relevant
1.11 procedure to ensure due monitoring of EN 1090-2:2008 sec 2.6
test equipment calibration certificates
E H
calibration is in place
procedure
2 FOR WELDING & NDT REFER TO 07A2.08
3 MECHANICAL FASTENING AND ERECTION
Mechanical fastening for non-preloaded connections
Bolts to be checked for proper EN 1090-2:2008 sec
A Fastening procedure SS.015 E W
protrusion as per IFC drawings 8.2.2
Nuts run freely and are installed so
EN 1090-2:2008 sec
B that designation marks are visible Fastening procedure SS.015 E W
3.1 after assembly and as per IFC
8.2.3
drawings
All necessary washers are installed as EN 1090-2:2008 sec
C Fastening procedure SS.015 E W
per IFC drawings 8.2.4
Snagging of bolts and tightening check EN 1090-2:2008 sec
D Fastening procedure SS.015 E W
of the connections 12.5.1 + 07A2.07
Preliminary checks before erection
A Setting out survey EN 1090-2:2008 sec 9.4 Survey report E H

3.2
Foundation are released for
B IFC drawings CV 035 E H
installation
Page 2 of 3
Erection
Check that main/secondary columns
EN 1090-2:2008 sec
A and beams are plumbed, levelled and Erection procedure SS.010 E W
12.7.2
aligned
3.3 Check installation of bracings,
B corrugated steel plates (clamping or 07A2.07 Erection procedure SS.005 E W
welding) and gratings (clamping)
Survey of geometrical position EN 1090-2:2008 sec

C Erection procedure Survey report + SS.020 E H
of connection nodes 12.7.3
Page 3 of 3
INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL FABRICATION
1 GENERAL DOCUMENTATION TO BE REVIEWED AND/OR APPROVED

Construction drawings available and IFC Drawings in their
1.1 properly distributed latest approved revision
E R
Identification, traceability and marking EN 1090-2:2008 sec 5.2 Identification and

1.2 system procedure for EXC3 is in and 6.2 marking procedure
E H
place
Cutting procedure in place and sampling
Thermal cutting capability
1.3 for checking the thermal cutting process EN 1090-2:2008 sec 6.4.3 Cutting procedure
reports vs ISO 9013
E H
capability executed
Hardness testing procedure (if specified)

of free edge surfaces is in place and Hardness check
1.4 sampling for local hardness capability
EN 1090-2:2008 sec 6.4.4
procedure
Hardness capability report E H
executed
Holing procedure is in place and sampling

1.5 for process capability check executed
EN 1090-2:2008 sec 6.6.3 Holing procedure Holing capability report E H
Procedure for mitigation of lamellar tearing Lamellar tearing

1.6 risk is in place mitigation procedure
E H H
Material Certificates as per

Material receipt
Structural steel material certifications are EN10204 and Declaration
1.7 available
EN 1090-2:2008 sec 5 and handling
of Performance as per
E R
procedure
CPR 305/2011
Material receipt and handling procedure to Material receipt
1.8 ensure that handling / storage is duly EN 1090-2:2008 sec 6.3 and handling E R
organized to avoid damages is in procedure
place Control of
Control of measurement & test
measurement & Register and relevant
1.9 equipment procedure to ensure due EN 1090-2:2008 sec 2.6
test calibration certificates
E H
monitoring of calibration is in place
equipmen
t
Page 1 of 2
INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL FABRICATION
2 FOR WELDING & NDT REFER TO 07A2.08

3 DELIVERY
Check structural steel items upon
3.1 completion of fabrication and before Applicable IFC drawings SS.001 E W
delivery to erection
Page 2 of 2
STEEL STRUCTURE FIELD
FABRICATION CHECK
LIST
SS.001/
AMECFW Contract:
Items to check Check Comments

OK N/A
1 Material shape and size correct D D
2 Pre-assembly fit up satisfactory D D
D D
3 Welders qualified as per Project Specifications
D D
4 Correct welding rod
D D
5 Welds acceptable
D D
6 Final dimensions correct
D D
7 Base plates details correct
D D
8 Piece-mark or tag attached

D D
9 Bolts and fasteners

D D
10 Painting as per specification

D D
REMARKS:
CHECKS MUST BE CARRIED OUT ACCORDING TO PROJECT DOCUMENT’S LATEST APPLICABLE REVISION.
IF NOT SATISFACTORY, ISSUE A PUNCH LIST.
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
STEEL STRUCTURE
ERECTION CHECK
LIST
SS.005
AMECFW Contract:
Items to check Check Comments

OK N/A
1. Grout release form signed D D
2. Main columns and beams are plumb, level and aligned D D
3. Secondary columns and beams are plumb and aligned D D
4. Bracing is properly installed

D D
5. Structural bolts and washers are in place
D D
6. Bolts are tightened according to specifications
D D
7. Ref. of tool (torque
wrench)
D D
ref. used over gear
D D
8. Connections for removable items are properly made
D D
9. Girders
D D
10. Corrugated steel plate: check clamping or welding
11. Grating: check clamping D D
12. Cladding is colour matched D D
13. Penetration have closure pieces D D
14. Doors and windows installed

Grating, floor plates, stairways, handrails etc. D D
REMARKS:
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
STEEL STRUCTURE
PLUMBING CHECK LIST

SS.010/
AMECFW Contract:
Actual deviation
Max
Column Column height Notes
admissible 0° ** (North) 90° ** (East)
deviation (*)
(*) = 1 mm/m of column height and, in any case, not more than 20 mm (if not otherwise indicated in contractual do cuments)
** = (+) deviation towards North/East; (-) deviation towards South/West
REMARKS:
CHECKS MUST BE CARRIED OUT ACCORDING TO PROJECT DOCUMENT’S LATEST APPLICABLE

REVISION. IF NOT SATISFACTORY, ISSUE A PUNCH LIST.
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
STEEL STRUCTURE JOINT BOLTING
TIGHTENING CHECK

SS.015/
AMECFW Contract:
JOINT CHECK REMARKS
REF. OF TORQUE WRENCH REF. LAST REF. USED OVER GEAR

CALIBRATION
CERTIFICATE
REMARKS:
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
STEEL STRUCTURE
ACCEPTANCE
CERTIFICATE
SS.020/
AMECFW Contract:
Check Comments
Items to check OK N/A
1. Grout release form signed

D D
2. Columns and beams are plumb, level and aligned
D D
3. Bracing is properly installed
4. Stairs and catwalks D D
5. Bolts are tightened according to specifications

D D
6. Ref. of tool (torque wrench)
D D
ref. last
calibration certificate date
ref. used over gear D D
7. Connections for removable items are properly made

D D
8. Sliding installation
D D
9. Corrugated steel plate: check clamping or welding
10. Grating: check clamping D D
11. Ready to painting/fire protections

D D
D D
REMARKS:
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
06/11/2017 M. Rizzo M. Mandelli
Data Intocmit Verificat/
CBD / / Checked
SITE QUALITY Date Designer
CONTROL
MW WELDING & Pag/Pag. 1 din/from 15_
NDT

MW WELDING & NDT
AFWI DWG N°: BD0955A- Rev:C00 APPROVED FOR CONSTRUCTION

07A2.08 DWG. REV. DATE
M. Rizzo M. Mandelli SIGNATURE: A. MANTOVANI
04
03
02
01
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
AMEC FOSTER
ITALIANA S.r.l. 7 3 8 7 8 1 X 0 0 - X 3 0 9 0 0
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 30 31 80
Via S. Caboto, 15
20094 Corsico
(Milano) ITALY
doc.

MW WELDING & NDT
MW WELDING & NDT Rev.: C00
CONTENTS
I. SCOPE
II. SUBJECT
III. DEFINITION
IV. REFERENCE
V. PROCEDURE
VI. RECORDS
VII. ATTACHMENTS
I. SCOPE
This job specification provides the guidance and minimum requirements for
inspection and documentation of all activities related to the subject of this
document.
applicable documentation included in the CONTRACT. The most stringent
requirement shall apply.
II. SUBJECT
This document refers to the installation of Welding &

NDT.
III. DEFINITION
A. DEFINITION
WI Welding Inspector
NDT Non Destructive Testing
PMI Positive Material Identification
WPS Welding Procedure Specification
WPQR Welding Procedure Qualification Record
PWHT Post Welding Heat Treatment
HT Hardness Test
B. RESPONSIBILITIES
CONTRACTOR shall execute and control its activities included in the scope of
the works, in accordance with CONTRACTOR project Quality Control Plan
and all reviewed drawings and technical documents deemed necessary for the
execution.
CONTRACTOR shall perform and record all inspections, examinations and

tests required and shall provide, but not limited to:
- All works necessary for the preparation and execution of inspections and
testing.
safely.
- Only calibrated and certified tools shall be
utilized.
- Shall have available an up to date calibration
log.

Codes.
- Continue to update of the Quality Control Plan.
EMPLOYER or others Parties signature on inspection, examination and test

reports, does not release the CONTRACTOR from its responsibilities.
CONTRACTOR personnel dedicated to inspection, test and QC form

signature shall be approved by EMPOLYER as per EN14731 or EN473.
C. QUALITY CONTROL PLAN
The Quality Control Plan is a CONTRACTOR document endorsing all

quality control requirements detailed in this Job Specification and other
applicable document included in the CONTRACT.
requirements included in this Job Specification, in Subcontract Requisition
and relevant attachment and/or added as and when required during the
execution of the CONTRACT including vendor documents and
CONTRACTOR supplied material and equipment.
Each inspection and test shall make reference to the applicable procedure,
acceptable criteria and certification form number and inspection attendance.
the:
- Construction stage test and inspection

- Description
- Acceptable Criteria
- Applicable Procedure
- Verification Document
- Responsibilities of inspection categories
- Reporting-form
- Number
- Inspection attendance
Executed inspections and test shall be documented through quality

control forms included in this specification, which shall be included in
CONTRACTOR Quality Control Plan.
IV. REFERENCE
All applicable standards, codes, specifications and drawings are identified

and listed in the Subcontract Requisition, which is part of the CONTRACT.
Required inspections and tests by Local Regulation may not be included in this
document. However, CONTRACTOR shall strictly adhere to Local Regulation and
shall report the execution to EMPLOYER.
Project Code, the most stringent shall apply.
CONTRACTOR shall timely report any deviation from Project requirements and
no deviation shall be implemented without prior review from EMPLOYER.
V. PROCEDURE
A. QUALITY CONTROL PLAN (INSPECTION & TEST PLANS)
CONTRACTOR shall endorse this Job Specification as integrated part of its
Quality Control Plan using the procedure, test codes and forms in accordance
with the attached at Section VII.
This procedure applies to shop fabrication and field

activity.
CONTRACTOR shall issue all Quality Control Plans thirty days before the
starting of works or thirty days before the beginning of new activities.
CONTRACTOR shall not change the numbering of EMPLOYER form or

test codes. Additional codes shall be numbered adding a letter to the last
issued code.
CONTRACTOR shall submit the additional codes to EMPLOYER for review

prior the execution of the inspection and/or test.
CONTRACTOR shall revise and update the Quality Control Plan as and when
required during the execution of the CONTRACT incorporating any
appropriate requirement resulting from safety design, engineering
specifications, standards, design codes, improved practices and vendor
documents.
All the entries/points included in Quality form shall be filled-in, N/A shall
be used when not applicable and/or not available.
Inspections and tests shall be carried out concurrently with the execution
of the relevant construction and installation works.
All items subject to an inspection or test cycle which by their nature or service
are to be covered or concealed (foundations, underground civil works
and networks, surfaces to be treated and later insulated, etc.) shall be
inspected and tested before getting covered or concealed.
CONTRACTOR shall submit to EMPLOYER a weekly look-ahead schedule of

all planned site quality control activities consistent with the work schedule
reviewed by EMPLOYER.
CONTRACTOR shall timely notify (minimum one working day in advance)

EMPLOYER and/or other involved Parties to witness the inspections and tests
as indicated in the reviewed ITP.
CONTRACTOR shall issue reviewed quality control form immediately after the
completion of each inspection activity. All reports shall be reviewed and
signed off by CONTRACTOR authorized personnel prior to submission to
EMPLOYER for review or review, as appropriate.
CONTRACTOR shall transmit to EMPLOYER a list of authorized personnel

with name, position within the project and specimen signature.
Signatures at Form shall be accompanied with stamp indicating name and
position. In case stamp is not available, name shall be clearly printed in capital
letters.
NDT, PMI, HT, PWHT activities shall not be carried out by a third party
unless authorized by EMPLOYER.
C. MINIMUM DUTIES
1. Welding
procedures
The extension of controls on welding procedures shall be in

accordance with specifications applicable by Contract.
No welding shall be performed until Welding Procedures have been
received and reviewed by EMPLOYER and the following table shall be
considered:
Category Material Review by

SEP, I All WI
II, III Carbon Steel (CS) WI
Employer Technological dept
II, III All, except CS
/ Field WI Inspector
First column, in the above table, shall be considered only if PED is

applicable.
Project welding procedures, shall be available by CONTRACTOR’s work
place, both at the prefabrication shop and in field.
Welding consumables shall be provided from the Approved Suppliers List.
2. Welder qualification
Welders shall be qualified and recorded in accordance with the

requirements specified in the contract documents and in “Mechanical
Contractor minimum duties-Welding and NDT”
All welders shall be subjected to a Pre-production Qualification

session (Skill Test) prior to be employed in production.
The test coupon execution, to be carried out in H-L045 (6G) position shall
be witness by Employer and Client.
On Employer discretion it may be required to weld the coupon on
6GR position.
A Skill test is required for each welding process to be utilized in production.
- Test coupon shall be examined by 100% VT, PT and RT.

- If the test coupon is proved satisfactory welder may be put
into production.
- If the test coupon is rejected by visual examination the welder shall
not be employed on the project.
- If the test coupon is rejected by RT or PT examination the welder will
be allowed to undergo retest.
- If the retest coupon is rejected the welder shall not be employed on
the project.
- The first production weld of each welder shall be examined by RT.
- Only after positive results of above RT, welder is allowed to continue.
- If the first production weld is rejected, NDT extensions shall be applied
as per the project requirements
The CONTRACTOR shall provide its welders with an identification

(ID) card indicating as a minimum:
- name and surname

- picture
- welding process
- material type (P. No)
- welder identification stamp
This ID card shall be kept available by relevant owners and shown on

request.
Welder not possessing a valid ID card shall be requested to leave
the workstation and welded joint(s) shall be fully examined by applicable
NDT.
CONTRACTOR shall maintain and update the Welder Register both in

prefabrication and in site.
The weld number shall be reported on

isometrics.
At his discretion, EMPLOYER’s Field WI has the right to select the welds
to be examined as NDT extensions; and as necessary, to require the
extension to the 100% NDT of the production welds executed by the same
welder.
3. Non destructive testing (NDT)
Non-Destructive Testing covers:
- Visual Test (VT)

- Radiographic Test (RT)
- Liquid Penetrant Test (PT)
- Hardness Test (HT)
- Ultrasonic Test (UT)
- Magnetic particle Test (MT)
- Positive Material Identification (PMI)
All NDT shall be performed as per Requisition or OWNER

specifications and shall be carried out by qualified personnel (e.g. ASNT-
SNT-TC-1A or equivalent).
If not specified in project job specifications or Client Standards, for NDT
execution and evaluation, level of acceptance shall be in accordance to EN
ISO 5817 level C, ISO 12517 Level 2, UNI EN 1435 Class B.
Specific documentation and/or plan related to radiographic activity shall

be provided by CONTRACTOR to certify the compliance with all relevant
applicable law and regulations with particular care to the maximum
admissible level of emission.
CONTRACTOR shall perform radiographic examination dividing the
percentage equally between shop prefabrication and site welding.
EMPLOYER WI with the CLIENT’s co-operation, if required, has the

right to select the welded joints where to perform tests and the applicable
NDT.
NDT requests shall show applicable codes and relevant acceptance levels.
It is CONTRACTOR’s duty to submit documentation of radiographic

examination activities according to the law in force and
precisely:
- ray source activity;

- nothing hindered (nulla-obstat) from ray substance use;
- statement of authorized means of transportation;
- qualified expert name;
- Ray protection issued from qualified expert.
In case of underground installation, NDT test acceptance shall be

repeated before any lying of cement protection and before the
beginning of any filling or coat and wrap.
Radiographic reports shall be completed by the next working day in

order to know the results and to reduce backlog.
Radiographic reports shall indicate the applicable codes for levels of

acceptance and all discontinuity that has been interpreted.
An appropriate premise (dark room) with easiness to review

radiographic films shall be providing. Certification for film viewer and
densitometer shall be available in the same location.
Radiographic films shall be placed in the manufactory’s film box labelled.

The label shall identify the sub-contractor and the report number, weld
number, Isometric number.
Films shall be available at all time to EMPLOYER up to final acceptance of
the works.
Radiographic films shall be kept in dedicated location with appropriate

instrumentation to check and maintain the right temperature and humidity
as per applicable codes and film manufacturer recommendation.
At the end of the work, with notification to EMPLOYER,

CONTRACOR shall transmit radiographic films to OWNER.
If not specified in project job specifications or Client Standards, NDT

shall be done after PWHT.
4. NDT extension
NDT quantity, typology and extension on piping shall be carried out

according to reference documents (see par. IV) and applied to each piping
class.
NDT on structural steel shall be made in compliance with Local law and
satisfy the AWS D1.1 requirements, in any case not less than follow:
- All butt-weld joints shall be checked by RT or UT. The other full
penetration welds shall be spot checked for the 50% of length.
- 10% of any type of joint with fillet-welds and angle-welds shall
be checked by PT or MT.
5. Welder Performance
In order to judge welders performance, first five production welds, for each
piping class, shall be radiographically tested.
Only in case there are less than two welds with defects on initial five welds,
welder can continue to weld. If more than one weld has defects (to be
repaired or cut-out) welder shall be disqualified.
During production five welds every last hundred welds shall be

radiographically tested to continuously monitor welder performance.
If more than one weld has defects, all the set of last hundred welds shall
be radiographically tested. In case of more than five welds over last
hundreds welds present defects, welder shall be disqualified.
Disqualified welder can be re-qualified with new qualification session.

First five welds executed after requalification shall be checked.
6. Weld repair
Weld showing unacceptable imperfections shall be repaired and

tested again. The reparation of defective weld shall be carried out
with same
WPS as the first one. The repaired weld shall be identified by the same
number followed by “R1” on all applicable documents showing the repaired
weld. If weld has to be repaired for a second time the repaired weld shall
be identified by the same number followed by “R2”.
If not specified in project job specifications or Client Standards, third
reparation (“R3”) can be allowed by EMPLOYER Field WI.
Same procedure applies to welds that cannot be repaired and has to

be cut-out. The joint re-welded shall be identified by the same number
followed by “C1” or “C2” on all applicable documents showing the repaired
weld.
Any spool deficiencies repair shall be performed before shipment to field.

In case of field prefabrication, repairs shall be always done before
final erection.
7. Positive material identification (PMI)
PMI procedure in compliance with GP/ACP 18-12-01 shall be applied to

identify the material and to prevent its wrong installation.
It is under CONTRACTOR's responsibility to assure the traceability of

materials subject to PMI, by notations on drawings and identifications
on spools.
PMI test shall be made on all welds to check the use of correct filler
material.
8. Post Weld Heat Treatment (PWHT)
All heat treatments shall be carried out as per reviewed welding procedure
and according to project specification for temperature holding time,
heating and cooling rates.
9. Hardness Test (HT)
All hardness tests shall be carried out in compliance with requirements as

per GP 18-10-01. Details about extension and position of tests on
welds can be agreed with Notified Body.
10. Contractor’s welding activity control (Welding Book)
CONTRACTOR shall prepare and shall put at EMPLOYER WI’s disposal a

complete welding book that shall contain (as a minimum) the following
documentation:
- Reviewed WPS/WPQR (accompanied by official transmittal or letter)

- List of WPS and WPQR applicable for piping classes
- Certification of Qualified Welders
- List of Qualified Welders applicable for WPS
- Certification of NDT personnel for result interpretation
- List of NDT personnel
- NDT procedures to approved by FWI
- PMI Procedure & equipment data sheet
- PWHT / HT procedures
- Certification of PWHT/HT operators
- Certificates for PWHT/HT equipment
- List and certificate for welding machines
- Calibration Certificate for all measuring devices including those
installed on equipment
- Traceability procedures (by Sub Contractors)
- Certificates for Welding Materials
- Storage, Maintenance and Handling procedures for Welding
Consumables as per Vendor requirements
- Certification for tools used for consumable maintenance
CONTRACTOR shall submit to EMPLOYER a monthly update of the list of

qualified welder list and the list of qualified NDT personnel.
Production register shall weekly updating with following minimum

information:
- Total joints produced up to date (welding production)
- Welder performance report
- Project repair status
- Welding Summary List
- Weld History Sheet (see Attachment 3)
All procedures listed above shall be approved and/or reviewed by

EMPOLYER.
CONTRACTOR shall put a copy of the applicable WPS in any welding

station as well as safety devices.
11. Weld numbering
Each weld shall be identified on the isometric as follows:
 shop welds (butt weld) = S

 field welds (butt weld) = F
 socket welds = SC
 fillet welds = FL
 branch weld = BR
 support welds = SU
Welds on isometrics/drawings shall be uniquely numbered by

isometric following the fluid flow direction.
12. TIE-INs
For TIE-INs execution, if not specified in project job specification or Client

Standard, NDT percentage shall be 100% and TIE-Ins execution
sequence, as minimum, shall be:
- UT for thickness measurement

- Cutting
- Bevelling
- MT/PT for bevel check
- Welding
- RT/UT after weld (or after PWHT if applicable)
A. REQUIREMENT FOR PIPING SUBJECT TO PED DIRECTIVE
In case PED is applicable to the project, the following requirements shall be

respected:
- NDT shall be executed as per EN13480 (including acceptance criteria) and

NDT personnel shall be qualified as per EN 473 / ISO 9712
- If EMPLOYER is the PED manufacturer all original NDT reports shall

remain in FW offices after being reviewed. CONTRACTOR shall maintain
a copy of all reports.
- Welders qualification shall be performed as per EN 287-1 (en 1418 for fully
mechanised or automatic processes) and shall be submitted, reviewed
and approved by a notified body or a third-party organization recognized
by a Member State in accordance with the above mentioned Directive
(see Annex I para. 3.1.2).
- WPS/PQR shall be prepared in accordance to EN 15614-1, EN 15609 and

shall be submitted, reviewed and approved by a Notified Body or a
Third- Party organization recognized by a Member State in accordance
with the above mentioned Directive (see Annex I para. 3.1.2).
- NDT personnel shall be reviewed by a third-party organization recognized

by a Member State in accordance with the above mentioned Directive (see
Annex I para. 3.1.3).
- Deviations to the application of the above mentioned harmonised

standards are in general not allowed. However exceptions may be
proposed by Contractor on a case by case basis for Employer evaluation.
Such exceptions shall be in any case approved by Notified Body and PED
Manufacturer before to be implemented
VI. RECORDS

CONTRACTOR shall issue testing and inspections documentation in accordance

with the reviewed QC forms.
It is essential that welding and NDT documentation shall be presented in an

orderly clear and complete manner. NDT shall be carried out and registered
using the suitable forms.
VII. ATTACHMENTS
Attachment 1: ITP - Inspection & Test Plan

Attachment 2: Quality Forms
Discipline MW WELDING & NDT ITP: WE-100 CON. STD.: 07A2.08

WELDING & NDT
01 NDT at Material receiving Visual Codes NDT report E R
Check WPS and PQR No.Bo. involvement only

02 ASME / EN 88A1, 50A10, 07A2.08 WE.001 E H H
are reviewed. if necessary
Check welder approved list No.Bo. involvement only

03 ASME / EN 88A1, 50A10, 07A2.08 WE.005 E H H
and certificates if necessary
Min. level. II.
Check NDT
04 ASME / EN 88A1, 07A2.08 WE.010 E H H No.Bo. involvement only
personnel
if necessary
qualification
Review NDT / Traceability No.Bo. involvement only
05 ASME / EN 88A1, 07A2.08, 50A10 WE.050 E H H
procedures if necessary
Check Filler Material ASME II Part C or EN No.Bo. involvement only

06 88A1, 07A2.08 WE.030 E H H
Certificates for Cons. if necessary
Manufacturer
07 Check welding equipment ISO 10012 Calibration Certificate E R
Recommendations
Weekly reporting of the
following:
08 a) Welding Production ASME 88A1, 07A2.08 Welding Summary List E H
b) Welder Performance in Excel format
c) Project Repair Rate
09 Fit-up ASME / EN UNI EN ISO 9692 WE.015 E R
E = EXECUTE - Test/Inspection executes CC= Contractor

R = REVIEW - No Notification is required. QC forms shall be signed by all parties involved after inspection AFW= AMEC Foster Wheeler
present H = HOLD POINT-CC cannot proceed with inspection and works without the approval of the parties involved NB= Laboratory / Notified Body
Discipline MW WELDING & NDT ITP: WE-100 CON. STD.: 07A2.08

WELDING & NDT

In-process Spot check
10 WPS, ASME / EN 88A1, 07A2.08 WE.040 E R
welding on FW request
inspection
11 Visual Test WPS, ASME / EN 88A1, 07A2.08 WE.015 E W
Check & review PWHT 07A2.08, 88A1 &

12 WPS Visual E R
chart 50A10
Check NDT reports for NoBo verify only for PED

13 ASME / EN 07A2.08, 50A10, 88A1 NDT Reports E R H
completeness cat. II ≥20% and III 100%
07A2.08, 50A10, NoBo verify only for PED

14 Welding Summary List ASME / EN WE.025A E H H
88A1 cat. II ≥20% and III 100%
Check Material NoBo verify only for PED

15 Visual 50A10, 07A2.08 WE.025B E H H
Traceability report cat. II ≥20% and III 100%
E = EXECUTE - Test/Inspection executes CC= Contractor

R = REVIEW - No Notification is required. QC forms shall be signed by all parties involved after inspection AFW= AMEC Foster Wheeler
W = WITNESS - Notification is mandatory. CC can proceed with inspection even if not all the parties involved are present CL= Owner
H = HOLD POINT-CC cannot proceed with inspection and works without the approval of all the parties involved. NB= Laboratory / Notified Body
WPS/WPQR APPROVED LIST

W E.001/
AMECFW Contract:
WELD JOINT TYPE BASE PIPE SIZE Service REQUIRED

PIPING
WPS WPQR Butt MAT. Thick. Diam. IMPAC HARD
CLASS Fillet Branch PWHT
Wel (GRADE RANG RANG T NESS
d ) E E TEST
Remarks:
APPROVED BY: CONTRACTOR AMECFW CLIENT NoBo
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
WELDERS APPROVED LIST

WE.005/
AMECFW Contract:
TOS: S/TOS: Group Qualific TAG n.: DRAWING N. REV:
Authority Inspection
Process Proced.
Pipe
RANGE of
EMISSION
Thickness
Plate or Tube
Joint Type
Position
Diameter
APPROVAL
(DATE)
WELDER NME Valid Until
/ STAMP Thik. Diam (Date)
Qulif Quali
. f
Remarks:
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
NDT PERSONNEL QUALIFICATION

WE.010/
AMECFW Contract:
NAME CERTIFICATE NO LEVEL TYPE OF CONTROL NORMATIVE DEADLINE
Remarks:
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
FIT-UP and VISUAL INSPECTION

WE.015/
AMECFW Contract:
PROGRESSIVE NUMBER W ELDER NO. DRAWING NO. Previous Judgment (1) JUDGMENT (1)
(1) A = ACCEPTABLE; NR = TO BE REPAIRED; NT = TO BE CUT
Remarks:
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
REQUEST FOR NDT EXECUTION

WE.020/
AMECFW Contract:
MAGNETIC
W ELD NUMBER AND HARDNES FERRITE
/ LIQUID ULTRASONIC RADIOGRAPHY PMI PWHT (1) NOTES
LOCATION S TEST
PENETRAN
MEASUREMEN
T
Notes: (1) to insert a X to point out if NDT must be performed after PWHT
Remarks
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
WELD & NDT REPORT

CV.025A/
AMECFW Contract:
Material Pipin RT RT RT
Weld Nr. Weld Type Welder I/D Pipe DN Pipe THK. WPS Nr. VT PWHT HT PT/MT UT REMARKS
A B g Approved Repair1 Repair2
NOTE:

NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
MATERIAL TRACEABILITY REPORT
Report n.: Contractor: S.C.MOLDOCOR.S.A

WE.025B/
AMECFW Contract:9PR8452066803-RR99-RO
Welding Reference Material Heat /

ITEM Diameter Thickness / Rating Certificate Number AMUSE-CON PIN Remarks
From To (as per Serial
Pipe 4” 6.02 ASTM)
A333 Gr.6 Number
74696 55200/2/2017
Pipe 2” 8.74 A333 Gr.6 75626 987/2/2018
Red. tee 4”x 2” 6.02/8.74 A420Gr.WPL6 60881 12761/17-MA 77
Equal tee 4” Std 6.02 A420Gr.WPL6 503665 1350 109
Presure indicator 4”x25” 6.02/14.2 A350LF2
Elbow 90° 4” Std 6.02 A420Gr.WPL6 X10C 17-01344 49
Elbow 90° 2” 160 8.74 A420Gr.WPL6 372493 029315/17-PD 47
Flanges O 4” 300# 6.02 A350LF2
Flanges 4” 150# 6.02 A350LF2 3949-15 11373/17
Flanges 2” 150# 8.74 A350LF2 9404-14 11335/17
st rd th
Note: 1 column “ITEM” (pipe, valve, etc.), 3 “Rating” only for Flange ITEM, 7 column “Serial Number” only for valve, strainer o special ITEM.

NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
FILLER MATERIALS

W E.030/
AMECFW Contract:
- Trade Name Lon / Heat no EN / AWS Certificate no Type of Certificate
NAME:
SIGNATURE:
DATE:
IN-PROCESS WELDING
INSPECTION REPORT
WE.040/
AMECFW Contract:
W ELD NO. W ELDER NO. BASE METAL WPS
RECORDS
VARIABLES
NOTES
1° PASS
FILLER METAL CLASSIFICATION 2° PASS
3° PASS
PRE-HEAT TEMPERATURE
TYPE:
SHILDING GAS
FLOW
TYPE
PURGING GAS
FLOW
VOLTAGE
AMPERAGE
TRAVEL SPEED
HEAT INPUT
INTERPASS TEMPERATURE
INTITIAL & INTERPASS CLEANING
BACK GOUGING
TACK WELDS REMOVAL
Remarks:
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
NDT PROCEDURES

WE.050/
AMECFW Contract:
NDT CONTRACTOR PROCEDURE NO. TYPE OF CONTROL NORMATIVE
Remarks:
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
Data/ Intocmit/ Verificat/
CBD Date Designer Checked
SITE QUALITY
EQUIPMENT

EQUIPMENT
AFWI DWG N°: BD0955A- Rev: C00 APPROVED FOR

CONSTRUCTION
07A2.09
DWG. REV. DATE
M. Rizzo M.Mandelli
04
03
02
01
00 Issurd for Comments 15/11/2017 M.Rizzo M.Mandelli
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
AMEC FOSTER
WHEELER Nr. proiect / Project no. Nr. desen / Drawing Rev/Rev
ITALIANA S.r.l. 7 3 8 7 8 1 X 0 0 - X 3 1 0 0 0
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 30 31 80
Via S. Caboto, 15
20094 Corsico
(Milano) ITALY
doc.
Instalatia/Plant PF155 – POLYFUEL 7 8 1 8 0 0 0 0 1 4

EQUIPMENT
JOB SPEC BD0955A-07A2.09
EQUIPMENT Rev.: C00
CONTENTS
I. SCOPE
II. SUBJECT
III. DEFINITION
IV. REFERENCE
V. PROCEDURE
VI. RECORDS
VII. ATTACHMENTS
EQUIPMENT Rev.: C00
I. SCOPE
This job specification provides and minimum requirements for the

planning, execution and reporting of Quality Control activities.
related and applicable documentation. The most stringent requirement shall
always apply.
II. SUBJECT
This document refers to the Quality Control activities relevant to the

installation of equipment.
III. DEFINITION
A. RESPONSIBILITIES


– All works necessary for the preparation and execution of

– Provision of adequate scaffolding/standing to perform the
inspection safely.
 Tools and measuring equipment in use have current and
valid calibration as necessary
– The applicable international Standards and Codes are available
for review.
EQUIPMENT Rev.: C00

test reports, does not relieve the CONTRACTOR from his its
responsibilities.

PLAN)
The Quality Control Plan is a CONTRACTOR’s document

addressing all quality control requirements detailed in this Job
Specification and other applicable documents included in the
CONTRACT.

The Contractor’s inspection and test plan (hereafter I&TP) shall

indicate the following information (as minimum):
 Sequence number
 Test and inspection description
 Acceptance Criteria
 Reference document
 Verification Document (QC formats)
 Intervention points
Additional requirements are given in section V.
IV. REFERENCE


this document. However, CONTRACTOR shall strictly adhere to Local
Regulation and shall report the execution to EMPLOYER.
Equivalent and applicable Project codes rise above Local Regulation if

the second are less stringent. In case of conflict between Local Regulation
and Project Code, the most stringent shall apply.
EQUIPMENT Rev.: C00

V. PROCEDURE
A. QUALITY CONTROL PLAN (INSPECTION & TEST PLANS)
part of his its Quality Control Plan and shall implement procedures/test
thirty days before the beginning of new activities. In any case no
Changes to Quality Control Plans shall always be formally agreed with

EMPLOYER before implementation.


execution of construction works to minimise back logs. QC reports shall
be submitted duly compiled with all applicable data to EMPLOYER’s
review/approval no later than 24 Hours since completion of the
relevant inspection. QC reports shall always be endorsed with
signature and stamp of the function responsible to validate the
inspection.


construction works.
EQUIPMENT Rev.: C00
C. MINIMUM DUTIES
CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for equipment preservation in

accordance with Vendors’ instructions and Contractual specifications
where the most stringent requirements shall apply.
VI. RECORDS

of QC records in an organized, traceable and safe manner all the way
through scope of work execution and until turn over to EMPLOYER as part of
the final documentation dossier.
EMPLOYER shall be authorized to audit QC records collection at any time.

VII. ATTACHMENTS
Attachment 1: ITP - Inspection & Test Plan
ALIGNMENT EQUIPMENT AND MOTORS

PUMPS & COMPRESSORS
BLOWERS & MIXER
FLARE TIP
SANITARY SEWAGE TRETMENET PLANT
WATER TREATMENT SYSTEM
WATER SOFTENERS
VIBRATION CHECK
EQUIPMENT & AIR DRYER PACKAGE
GEAR UNIT
FIRE WATER PUMP
LOADING ARM
DIAPHRAGM PUMP
SCREW PUMP
GEAR PUMP
ROOTS VACUUM PUMP
HERMETIC PUMP
BRIDGE CRANE
LUBE OIL SYSTEM
EQUIPMENT Rev.: C00
Attachment 2: Quality Forms
QC forms:
EQ.001 Alignment certificate for Equipment and Motors

EQ.005 Field installation check list: Centrifugal Pumps
EQ.010 Field installation check list: Reciprocating Pumps
EQ.015 Field installation check list: Centrifugal and Axial Compressors
EQ.020 Field installation check list: Rotary and Screw Compressors
EQ.025 Field installation check list: Reciprocating Compressors
EQ.030 Field installation check list: Refrigeration Compressors Package
EQ.035 Field installation check list: Blowers
EQ.040 Field installation check list: Mixers
EQ.045 Field installation check list: Flare Tip
EQ.050 Field installation check list: Sanitary Sewage Treatment plant
EQ.055 Field installation check list: Water Treatment System
EQ.060 Field installation check list: Water Softeners
EQ.065 Vibration check Electric Motors
EQ.070 Vibration check Centrifugal Pumps (type 1)
EQ.075 Vibration check Centrifugal Pumps (type 2)
EQ.080 Field installation check list: Equipment Package
EQ.085 Field installation check list: Air Dryer Package
EQ.090 Field installation check list: Gear Unit
EQ.100 Field installation check list: Steam Turbine
EQ.105 Field installation check list: Fire Water Pump
EQ.110 Field installation check list: Loading Arm
EQ.115 Field installation check list: Diaphragm Pump
EQ.120 Field installation check list: Screw Pump
EQ.125 Field installation check list: Gear Pump
EQ.170 Field installation check list: Roots Vacuum Pump
EQ.175 Field installation check list: Hermetic Pump
EQ.180 Field installation check list: Bridge Crane
EQ.185 Field installation check list: Lube OIL
Discipline MW EQUIPMENT ITP: EQ-100 CON. STD.: 07A2.09

ALIGNMENT EQUIPMENT AND MOTORS

Check axial and radial
tolerance for Vendor’s alignment Vendor’s alignment
1 EQ.001 E W
alignment of tolerance tolerance
equipment and motors

requirements RI = RANDOM INSPECTION. Continuous monitoring of work without Hold Point requirement NB= Laboratory / Notified Body
H = HOLD POINT. A point beyond which a work shall not proceed without the approval of Contractor,A FW, Owner/ Owner’s Inspector
(TPI), NoBo

PUMPS & COMPRESSORS

Check Leveling and Equipment Equipment EQ.005, EQ.010,
1 Alignment of the Instruction and Instruction and EQ.015, EQ.020, E W
Equipment Operating Manual Operating Manual EQ.025, EQ.030
Torqueing Report of Equipment Equipment EQ.005, EQ.010,
2 Foundation Bolts Instruction and Instruction and EQ.015, EQ.020, E W
Operating Manual Operating Manual EQ.025, EQ.030
Check Alignment between Equipment Equipment EQ.005, EQ.010,
Cold and Hot (as
3 Motor and Rotor Instruction and Instruction and EQ.015, EQ.020, E H
applicable)
Check for Freedom and Equipment Equipment EQ.005, EQ.010,
4 Correct Rotation Instruction and Instruction and EQ.015, EQ.020, E W
Check Installation of Equipment Equipment
EQ.005, EQ.010,
5 Temporary Strainer Instruction and Instruction and E W
EQ.015, EQ.020
Operating Manual Operating Manual
Check Proper Lubricant Equipment Equipment EQ.005, EQ.010,
6 Charged in Bearing Instruction and Instruction and EQ.015, EQ.020, E
Housing(s) Operating Manual Operating Manual EQ.025, EQ.030
Note 1
Check the Vibration and EQ.065, EQ.070,
7 Note 1 E H
the Temperature EQ.075
R = REVIEW. Verification and confirmation that the design requirements have been met CC= Contractor
W = WITNESS / Inspection. Measuring & testing of work, and comparing the results with the design requirements AFW= AMEC Foster Wheeler
RI = RANDOM INSPECTION. Continuous monitoring of work without Hold Point requirement CL= Owner
H = HOLD POINT. A point beyond which a work shall not proceed without the approval of Contractor, AFW, Owner/ Owner’s Inspector NB= Laboratory / Notified Body
(TPI), NoBo

PUMPS & COMPRESSORS

Flange Alignment Flange Alignment EQ.005, EQ.010,
Check Connection
8 EQ.015, EQ.020, E H
Tolerance GP 03-19-01 GP 03-19-01 EQ.025, EQ.030
Note 1: Horizontal pumps equipped with anti-friction bearing vibration limit 3.0mm/s
Horizontal pumps equipped with hydrodynamic bearings vibration limit 50 micron peak/peak: vertical pumps vibration limit 5.0mm/s
RMS Pumps Lube Oil Temperature Rise: max 40°C for ring-oiled or splash system and max. 28°C for pressurized systems
Centrifugal compressors vibrations limit 26-micron peak/peak.
Bearing temperature limits shall be verified versus the alarm set-points specified in compressor IOM (min 5°C margin), except that frame oil temperature shall not exceed 70°C

R = REVIEW. Verification and confirmation that the design requirements have been met AFW=AMEC Foster Wheeler
(TPI), NoBo

BLOWERS & MIXER

Check Leveling and Equipment Equipment
EQ.035
1 Alignment of the Instruction and Instruction and E W
EQ.040
Equipment Operating Manual Operating Manual
Equipment Equipment Instruction
Torqueing Report of EQ.035
2 Instruction and and Operating E W
Bolts EQ.040
Operating Manual
Equipment Instruction Equipment Instruction
Check for Freedom and EQ.035
3 and Operating and Operating E H
Correct Rotation EQ.040
Manual Manual
Check Connection Flange Alignment Flange Alignment EQ.035
4 E W
Tolerance GP 03-19-01 GP 03-19-01 EQ.040
Check the Vibration EQ.035
5 Note 2 Note 2 E W
and the Noise EQ.040
Equipment Equipment
Check Oil and Grease EQ.035
6 Instruction and Instruction and E H
Type EQ.040
Note 2: Fans equipped with anti-friction bearings vibrations limit 3.0 mm/s RMS.
Fans equipped with hydrodynamic bearings vibration limit 50 micron peak/peak.
Oil temperature rise 30°C for pressurized systems and 40°C for oil ring and splash systems.

(TPI), NoBo

Description Referenc CC AFW CL NB
e
FLARE TIP
Check nozzles orientation
1 Vendor’s Documents Vendor’s Documents EQ.045 E W
and elevation
Flare tip is level and
2 Vendor’s Documents Vendor’s Documents EQ.045 E H
plumb
3 Mounting bolts tightened Vendor’s Documents Vendor’s Documents EQ.045 E H
Correct number of
4 Vendor’s Documents Vendor’s Documents EQ.045 E W
thermocouples in place
5 Ladder installed Vendor’s Documents Vendor’s Documents EQ.045 E W

Vendor’s Documents Vendor’s Documents
, 07A2.11, 60A1.13/1, , 07A2.11, INSTRUMENT ITP Responsibilities as per
6 Instrument installation - -
60A1.62, 60A4.021 60A1.13/1, forms INSTRUMENT ITP
60A05 60A1.62,
60A4.021 60A05
Vendor’s Documents Vendor’s ELECTRICAL WORK Responsibilities as per
7 Electrical installation - -
07A2.10, 70A series Documents ITP forms ELECTRICAL ITP
07A2.10, 70A series

R = REVIEW. Verification and confirmation that the design requirements have been met FW= Foster Wheeler

SANITARY SEWAGE TRETMENET PLANT

1 Alignment of the Instruction and Instruction and EQ.050 E H
Catwalks, stairways Construction Construction
2 EQ.050 E W
and handrail installed drawings drawings
Equipment Equipment
Foundation bolts
3 Instruction and Instruction and EQ.050 E W
tightening
Operating Operating
Equipment Equipment
Blower installed on
aeration Basin
Operating Operating
Equipment Equipment
Transfer Pumps
installed on Surge Basin
Operating Operating
PIPING WORK ITP Responsibilities as per
6 Piping installation 07A2.06, 50A10 07A2.06, 50A10 - -
forms PIPING ITP
07A2.11, 60A1.13/1, 07A2.11, 60A1.13/1,
INSTRUMENT ITP Responsibilities as per
7 Instrument installation 60A1.62, 60A4.021 60A1.62, 60A4.021 - -
forms INSTRUMENT ITP
60A05 60A05
ELECTRICAL WORK Responsibilities as per
8 Electrical installation 07A2.10, 70A series 07A2.10, 70A series - -
ITP forms ELECTRICAL ITP
Involvement:
Organization:
H = HOLD POINT. A point beyond which a work shall not proceed without the approval of Contractor, FW, Owner/ Owner’s Inspector
(TPI), NoBo

WATER TREATMENT SYSTEM

Check field installation Equipment Equipment
Operating Operating

R = REVIEW. Verification and confirmation that the design requirements have been met AFW=AMEC Foster
W = WITNESS / Inspection. Measuring & testing of work, and comparing the results with the design Wheeler CL= Owner
(TPI), NoBo

WATER SOFTENERS
Equipment Equipment
Foundation
1 Instruction and Instruction and EQ.060 E H
bolts tightening
Check water meters Visual, Construction Visual, Construction
2 EQ.060 E W
installation drawings drawings
Vendor’s Vendor’s
3 Piping installation Requirements, 00A- Requirements , - -
forms PIPING ITP
07A2.06, 50A10 00A- 07A2.06,
50A10
Check brine component Visual, Construction Visual, Construction
4 EQ.060 E W
connections drawings drawings
Visual, Construction Visual, Construction
5 Water resin filled EQ.060 E W
drawings drawings
Check power supply Visual, Construction Visual, Construction
6 EQ.060 E W
connection drawings drawings

(TPI), NoBo

VIBRATION CHECK
Equipment Equipment
1 Check motors vibration Instruction and Instruction and EQ.065 E H
Operating Operating
Equipment Equipment
Check centrifugal pump
2 Instruction and Instruction and EQ.070, EQ.075 E H
vibration

H = HOLD POINT. A point beyond which a work shall not proceed without the approval of Contractor,AFW, Owner/ Owner’s Inspector
(TPI), NoBo

EQUIPMENT & AIR DRYER PACKAGE

Check the correct
Orientation of all Equipment Equipment
EQ.080
1 Nozzles, Attachments Instruction and Instruction and E H
EQ.085
for Ladders and Operating Manual Operating Manual
Platforms
EQ.080
2 Alignment of the Instruction and Instruction and E W
EQ.085
Equipment Equipment
EQ.080
3 Anchor bolts tightening Instruction and Instruction and E W
EQ.085
Check the Correct Equipment Equipment
4 Connection and Tag Instruction and Instruction and - E RI
of the Utilities Operating Manual Operating Manual
Involvement:
Organization:
(TPI), NoBo

GEAR UNIT
1 Verticality of the Instruction and Instruction and EQ.090 E W
Equipment Equipment
Check Oil Type and
Lube Oil Area
Check the Minimum Equipment Equipment
3 Contact Surface Instruction and Instruction and EQ.090 E W
Between the Teeth Operating Manual Operating Manual
Equipment Equipment
Check for Freedom and
4 Instruction and Instruction and EQ.090 E H
Correct Rotation

R = REVIEW. Verification and confirmation that the design requirements have been met AFW= AMEC Foster
W = WITNESS / Inspection. Measuring & testing of work, and comparing the results with the design requirements Wheeler CL= Owner
(TPI), NoBo

FIRE WATER PUMP

Requirements, Requirements
1 Baseplate leveling EQ.105 E H
Construction , Construction
drawings drawings
2 Final cold alignment EQ.105 E H
Requirements Requirements
Check pump and driver
3 for freedom of EQ.105 E W
movement
Flange parallelism Construction Construction
4 EQ.105 E W
checked drawings drawings
Vent and drain Construction Construction
5 EQ.105 E W
connection drawings drawings
check

(TPI), NoBo

LOADING ARM
Check swivel joints Construction Construction
1 EQ.110 E W
and check the grease drawings drawings
Construction Construction
2 Screw tightening EQ.110 E W
drawings drawings
3 Locking device EQ.110 E H

(TPI), NoBo

DIAPHRAGM PUMP
1 Anchor bolts tightening EQ.115 E W
drawings drawings
2 EQ.115 E W

H = HOLD POINT. A point beyond which a work shall not proceed without the approval of Contractor,AFW, Owner/ Owner’s Inspector
(TPI), NoBo

SCREW PUMP
drawings drawings
2 EQ.120 E W
3 Final cold alignment EQ.120 E H

(TPI), NoBo

GEAR PUMP
drawings drawings
2 EQ.125 E W
3 Check cold alignment EQ.125 E H
4 Final alignment EQ.125 E H

(TPI), NoBo

ROOTS VACUUM PUMP

1 Check horizontally EQ.170 E H
2 Check baseplate levelling EQ.170 E H
3 Flange parallelism check EQ.170 E W
4 Intake connection check EQ.170 E W
5 Coupling protection check EQ.170 E W
Check pump and driver for Vendor’s Vendor’s
6 EQ.170 E W
correct rotation Requirements Requirements
Check electrical ELECTRICAL WORK Responsibilities as per
7 Requirements , Requirements , - -
connection ITP forms ELECTRICAL ITP
07A2.10, 70A 07A2.010, 70A
series
Vendor’s series
Vendor’s
8 Check flushing device EQ.170 E W

(TPI), NoBo

HERMETIC PUMP
2 Check baseplate levelling EQ.175 E H
3 Flange parallelism check EQ.175 E W
4 Intake connection check EQ.175 E W
5 Coupling protection check EQ.175 E W
Check pump and driver for Vendor’s Vendor’s
6 EQ.175 E W
correct rotation Requirements Requirements
7 Piping installation Requirements , Requirements , - -
forms PIPING ITP
07A2.06, 50A10 07A2.06,
Vendor’s 50A10
Vendor’s
8 Check final hot alignment EQ.175 E H
E H

R = REVIEW. Verification and confirmation that the design requirements have been met FW=AMEC Foster
W = WITNESS / Inspection. Measuring & testing of work, and comparing the results with the design requirements Wheeler CL= Owner

BRIDGE CRANE
Check if any part of the
1 Visual check Visual check - E W
system is damaged
Dimensional check
2 and compliance with Visual check Visual check - E W
the drawings
Check of alignment and
Drawings, Vendor’s Drawings, Vendor’s
3 tolerance of rails / EQ.180 E W
runways
Visual check of correct Drawings, Vendor’s Drawings, Vendor’s
4 EQ.180 E H
installation Requirements Requirements
Check of bolted joints and Vendor’s Vendor’s
5 EQ.180 E RI
torque tightening Requirements Requirements
Check electrical ELECTRICAL WORK Responsibilities as per
6 Requirements , Requirements , - -
connection ITP forms ELECTRICAL ITP
07A2.10, 70A 07A2.10, 70A
series series

(TPI), NoBo

LUBE OIL SYSTEM

Check proper installation Vendor’s Vendor’s
2 of steam supply and Requirements , Requirements , - -
forms PIPING ITP
exhaust lines 07A2.06, 50A10 07A2.06,
50A10
Check driver-pump Vendor’s Vendor’s
3 EQ.185 E H
alignment Requirements Requirements
Check coupling guard Vendor’s Vendor’s
4 EQ.185 E W
installed Requirements Requirements
Check extent of insulation
5 and heat tracing according P&ID’s, drawings P&ID’s, drawings EQ.185 E RI
to P&ID’s
Interconnecting piping Responsibilities as per
6 PRE-Commissioning PRE-Commissioning PI.045 E W
chemically cleaned PIPING ITP

(TPI), NoBo
ALIGNMENT CERTIFICATE
FOR EQUIPMENTS AND
MOTORS
EQ.001/
AMECFW Contract:
DIAL REFERENCE NOMINAL COUPLING DIAL INDICATOR TIP LOCATION

DISTANCE
0°
0° Mech. Equip.
coupling
270°
270° 90°
90°
Driver coupling
180°
180°
◻ Preliminary alignment ◻ Cold alignment ◻ Piping not connected

◻ Final alignment ◻ Hot alignment ◻ Piping connected
ALIGNMENT TOLERANCES
Axial tolerance: Radial tolerance:
Note: Vend o r’s alig n men t t o lerances shall b e used ( ind icat e th em o n t h e fo rm) .
In case these are missing refer to contract documents (M.R., Job Spec., etc.).
In case of presence of gear box, or other devices, between equipment and motor utilize a column
for each single alignment.
AXIAL READINGS RADIAL READINGS

Dial
position
I° II° III° I° II° III°
0°
90°
180°
270°
REMARKS:
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
FIELD INSTALLATION CHECK
LIST CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS

EQ.005/
AMECFW Contract:
Item to check Signature and date
1. Baseplate levelled and properly grouted. Jackscrews removed and foundation

bolts tightened. Soundness of grouting checked against voids.
2. Temporary strainer on suction installed
3. Excess piping strain alleviated
4. Final cold alignment to manufacturer’s tolerance Nominal coupling distance
between shafts ends (DBSE) mm
5. Remove preservatives as necessary.
6. Check pump and driver for freedom of movement
7. Check proper installation of shaft seal harness and filling of buffer/barrier fluid, as
applicable
8. Check proper sealing system instrumentation and setting, as applicable
9. Check proper connection for coolant inlet & outlet, vents, drains, thermal relieve
valves, sightglasses, as applicable
10. Driver checked for correct rotation (uncoupled)
4 hours running to check vibration and temperature
11. Bearing housing flushed and re-lubricated. Lubricator filled and operable
Lubricant
12. Check motor bearing lubrication Lubricant
13. Mechanical seal or packing Type _
14. Coupling installed Type
15. Driver-pump coupling and installation of coupling guard
16. Flange parallelism checked
17 Vent and drains connection check
18. heck warm-up facilities properly installed, as applicable
19. heck final hot alignment to manufacturer’s tolerance
ref. of tool (torque wrench)_
ref. last calibration
certificate date
ref. used over gear
NOTE:
 When the pump unit is equipped with a pressurized Lube oil system, check set and proper operation of the
associated auxiliaries and instrumentation.
REMARKS:

NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
LIST RECIPROCATING
PUMPS
EQ.010/
AMECFW Contract:

1. Baseplate levelled and properly grouted. Jackscrews removed.
Soundness of grouting checked against voids
2. Temporary strainer on suction nozzles installed
3. Excess piping stress on pump nozzles installed
4. Final cold alignment (see form F0217)
nominal coupling DBSE mm
5. Remove preservatives as necessary
6. Check pump and driver for freedom of movement; stuffing
box packing adjustment
7. Driver checked for correct rotation (uncoupled)
8. Check proper installation and operation of plunger packing flush/seal
harness, as applicable
9. Check proper connection for coolant inlet & outlet, vents, drains, thermal
relieve valves, sightglasses, as applicable
10. 4 hours running to check vibration and temperature
11. Pump crankcase and gear box proper lube oil level check before start
12. Bearing housing flushed and re-lubricated. lubricator filled and
operable lubricant
13. Packing installed type
14. Coupling installed type
15. Driver pump coupling and installation of coupling guard
16. Vent and drains connection check
17. Pulsation dampers and Pressure Safety Valve installed
18 ref. of tool (torque wrench)
ref. used over gear
NOTE:
REMARKS:
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
EQ.010 Rev. 00
FIELD INSTALLATION CHECK LIST
CENTRIFUGAL AND AXIAL
COMPRESSORS
EQ.015/
AMECFW Contract:

1. The compressor shall be inspected on site, possible transport damage
2. Baseplate levelled and properly grouted. Jackscrews removed and foundation bolts
tightened. Soundness of grouting checked against voids
3. Temporary suction screen installed
4. Check of piping strain alleviated on compressor
5. Check compressor nozzles vs. piping flange parallelism
6. Final cold alignment to manufacturer’s tolerance
Coupling type Nominal coupling
between:
Compressor and motor mm
Compressor and gear mm
8. Check compressor, driver and gear freedom of rotation
9. Suction piping mechanically/chemically cleaned, as applicable
10. Vibration probes setting, calibration and slow roll readings
11. Check for leaks during compressor train oil flushing
12. Check lube oil AREA and the associated supply and return piping for cleanliness after the oil
flushing
13. Make sure compressor train properly lubricated before running and oil filters cartridge clean
14. Driver checked for correct rotation
15. Driver checked for correct rotation - 4 hours running to check vibration and temperature
16. Make sure shaft seal buffer harness properly connected and operated before running
17. Make sure block valves in casing drains closed after draining all liquids
18. Check driver coupling to gear
19. Coupling guard installed
20. Vent and drain correct
21. Auxiliary connections check
22. Check operation and time of response of non-return valve on compressor discharge
23. Check operation and response time of suction throtling valve
24. Check Pressure Safety Valve properly installed, if specified
25. Check operation and response time of anti-surge valve on spillback line
26. Check operation and response time of block isolation valves (MOV)
27. Suction piping chemically cleaned
Ref. of tool (torque wrench)
ref. last calibration certificate date_
ref. used over gear _
NOTE:
REMARKS:
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
FIELD INSTALLATION CHECK LIST ROTARY
AND SCREW COMPRESSORS

EQ.020/
AMECFW Contract:

1. The compressor shall be inspected on site, possible transport damage
2. Baseplate levelled and properly grouted. Jackscrews removed and
foundation bolts tightened. Soundness of grouting checked against voids
4. Check of piping strain alleviated on compressor
5. Check compressor nozzles vs. piping flange parallelism
Coupling type
Nominal coupling between:
Compressor and motor mm
Compressor and gear mm

8. Check compressor, driver and gear freedom of rotation
11. Check lube oil AREA and the associated supply and return piping for
cleanliness after the oil flushing
12. Make sure shaft seal buffer harness properly connected and operated before
running
13. Make sure compressor train properly lubricated before running and oil filters
clean
15. Compressor 4 hour run to check vibration and temperature (whether feasible –
Approval by manufacturer is required)
11. Check driver coupling to gear
12. Coupling guard installed
13. Vent and drain correct
14. Auxiliary connections check
15. Check operation and time of response of non-return valve on compressor
discharge
16. Check Pressure Safety Valve properly installed and connected to the plant
17. Check operation and response time of spillback control valve
19. Suction piping chemically cleaned
20. Ref. of tool (torque wrench)_
NOTE:
REMARKS:
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
LIST RECIPROCATING
COMPRESSORS
EQ.025/
AMECFW Contract:

1. Compressor crankcase levelled and properly grouted. Jackscrews removed and foundation
bolts tightened
2. Cylinders installation and check their proper alignment. Installation and grouting of cylinder
supports
3. Installation of driver with the step-down gearbox, if any.
4. Ancillary pipework installed correctly and excess piping strain alleviated.
5. Driver-gear(if any)-compressor alignment to manufacturer’s tolerance
Distance between shaft ends(DBSE) mm
7. Check for leaks during compressor frame motion oil flushing
8. Check lube oil AREA and the associated supply and return piping for cleanliness, after the
oil flushing.
9. Make sure compressor frame properly lubricated before running and oil filters clean
10. Check setting and proper operation of cylinder/packing lubricator
11. Check suction and recycle piping chemically cleaned; make sure pulsation dampers free
from dirt, stain or impurities
12. Check proper connection for coolant inlet & outlet, vents, drains, thermal relieve valves,
sightglasses, as applicable
13. Installation and check of pulsation dampers and associated ancillaries (drain valves, level
indicators and switches, vent valves.....)
14. Check extent of insulation and heat tracing according to P&ID’s
15.. Driver checked for correct rotation uncoupled - 4 hours running to check vibration and
temperature of bearings (Cylinder valves removed)
16. Make sure rod packing buffer harness properly connected and operated before running
17. Make sure suction pulsation damper(s) fully drained
18. Compressor 4 hour unloaded run to check vibration and bearings & rod packing temperature
19. Temporary strainer on suction installed (Generally supplied by the compressor
manufacturer).
20. Check process pipework from KO Drum to after cooler, including any auxiliary connections
and instrumentation.
21. Check Pressure Safety Valve properly installed and connected to the plant
22. Check operation and response time of non-return valve on compressor discharge
23. Check operation and response of spillback control valve(s)
25. Driver-gear (if any), compressor coupling and installation of the coupling guard(s).
26. In case of belt drive, check pulleys alignment and belt tension.
27. Ref. of tool (torque wrench) ref.
last calibrationcertificate date
ref. used over gear
NOTE:
REMARKS:
APPROVED BY: SUBCONTRACTOR AMECFW CLIENT

NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
LIST REFRIGERATION
COMPRESSORS: PACKAGE
EQ.030/
AMECFW Contract:
1. Baseplate levelled and properly grouted. Jackscrews removed and foundation bolts
tightened. Soundness of grouting checked against voids
2. Check compressor, condenser, evaporator nozzles vs. Piping flange parallelism.
3. Final cold alignment.
Nominal coupling DBSE mm
4. Driver checked for correct rotation uncoupled. 4 hours running to check vibration
and temperature.
6. Check for leaks during compressor frame motion oil flushing
7. Check lube oil AREA, oil flushing and check of piping cleanliness.
Check set and operation of instrumentation.
8. Vents and drains connection check.
9. Suction and spillback piping chemically cleaned
10. Temporary strainer on suction installed (supplied by the compressor manufacturer)
11. Check Pressure Safety Valves properly installed and connected to the plant
12. Suction piping chemically cleaned.
13. Check of gas circuit instrumentation (compressor, evaporator, condenser,
economizer).
14. Check level of lubricant and make sure oil filters clean.
Lubricant
15. Fill refrigerant charge as required. Refrigerant
Quantity Kg
certificate date
NOTE:
 If the unit is loaded by manufacturer, do not open the compressor for inspection. A normal check will be carried out
for protection during storage
REMARKS:
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
FIELD
INSTALLATION CHECK
EQ.035/
AMECFW Contract:
1. Baseplate levelled and properly grouted. Jackscrews removed and

foundation bolts tightened. Soundness of grouting checked against voids
3. Temporary piping strain alleviated
4. Check blower nozzles vs. piping flanges parallelism
5. Final cold alignment to manufacturer’s
tolerance Coupling Type
Nominal coupling DBSE between:
Blower and driver mm
Blower and gear mm
Driver and gear mm
6. Blower, gear and driver checked for correct rotation.
7. Check of lube oil AREA. Lubricant
Driver lubricating grease. Type
8. Vents and drains connections check.
9. Suction and recycle piping mechanically cleaned.
ref. used over gear
NOTE:
REMARKS:
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
FIELD INSTALLATION
CHECK LIST MIXERS

EQ.040/
AMECFW Contract:
1. Final cold alignment of driver to gear unit to Manufacturer’s tolerance.

2. Nominal coupling DBSE
Check for freedom of movement and direction of rotation.

3. Inspect internally for cleanliness. Flush & refill.
Lubricant
4. Coupling lubricated and closed. Lubricant
5. Couplings guard in place and secured.
6. Doweling complete. (When specified)
7. All controls, protective devices and auxiliary Areas correct.
8. Compare record with name plate.
10. Holding down bolts secure, without any distortion.
11. Lube oil sump, or bearing housing in vented, if applicable.
12. Ancillary pipework installed correctly and connections tight.
13. Check proper installation of mechanical shaft seal harness
14. Check correct position of impeller from bottom of vessel via Vendor
drawings.
15. Make sure availability of buffer/barrier fluid, or N2 supply, as applicable for
wet or dry gas seal
16. Check proper sealing system instrumentation and setting, as applicable
17. Check for transport damage.
18. Check that construction mod have been completed.
certificate date
NOTE:
REMARKS:
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
FIELD
INSTALLATION CHECK
Report n.: LIST FLARE TIP Contractor:
EQ.045/
AMECFW Contract:
Flare Tip
1. Check external surface damages for flare tip pilot, assemblies and
nozzles.
2. Check nozzles orientation and elevation.
3. Flare tip is level and plumb.
4. Mounting bolts tightened.
5. Correct number of thermocouples in place.
6. Identify and pipe all connections.
7. Ladder installed.
8. Visual inspection of welds.
9. Inspect and/or apply paint.
10. Thermocouples wired to the flame front generator.
11. Test by Instrument Section done.
Flame front generator panel
12. Name plate Date correct.

13. Visual inspection of gauge glasses.
14. Hand valves operable.
15. Anchor bolts tightened.
16. Identify and pipe all connections.
17. Check air flow through each flame front generator pipe.,
18. Alarm switch wired to the main control panel.
19. Power connected to control panel.
20. Test by Electrical Section done.
21. ref. of tool (torque wrench)
ref. used over gear
NOTE:
REMARKS:
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
EQ.045 Rev. 00
FIELD INSTALLATION
CHECK LIST SANITARY
SEWAGE TREATMENT
PLANT
EQ.050/
AMECFW Contract:
1. Name plate Data correct.

2. AREA checked for surface damage.
3. Dimensional check and compliance with the drawings
4. Skid 1 (Aeration Basin, clarifier) anchored to foundation.
5. Catwalks, stairways and handrails installed.
6. Skid 2 (Surge Basin) anchored to foundation.
7. Blowers installed on Aeration Basin.
8. Comminuitor installed on Surge Basin.
9. Transfer pumps installed in Surge Basin.
10. The following interconnecting piping installed:
◻ Transfer pump discharge line
◻ Pump discharge line from surge to Aeration Basin
◻ Overflow line
◻ Waste sludge line
◻ Air header connection.
11. Power supply line connected to chlorine master control housing.
12. Power supply line connected to front control AREA
13. Instruments installed according to drawings
14. Electrical:
◻ Pumps, comminuitor connected to junction box on Skid 2
◻ Blowers connected to local panel
◻ Junction box on Skid # 2 connected to local panel on Skid 1.
◻ Power supply connected to local panel.
15. Test by Electrical Section done.
NOTE:
REMARKS:
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
FIELD INSTALLATION CHECK LIST WATER
TREATMENT SYSTEM

EQ.055/
AMECFW Contract:
1. Name plate data correct.

2. Dimensional check and compliance with the drawings.
3. Injection pumps.
4. Control AREAs.
5. Bulk storage tanks.
6. Chlorinator.
7. Mixers.
8. Equipment anchored to foundation.
9. Structural supports anchored to foundation.
10. Pumps and drivers checked for freedom of movement.
11. Static mixers installed.
12. Chlorine gas line connected to chlorinator.
13. Water supply connected to chlorinator.
14. Solution lines connected.
15. Chlorinator vent connected.
16. Acid line connected.
17. Solenoid blow down valve installed.
18. Power supply connected.
19. Instruments installed according to drawings.
20. Check for damages due to transportation.
NOTE:
REMARKS:
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
LIST WATER SOFTENERS

EQ.060/
AMECFW Contract:
1. Name plate Data correct.

2. Dimensional check and compliance with the drawings
3. Following items checked for surface damage:
◻ Vessels.
◻ Multiport valves
◻ Water meters
◻ Dilution water rate of flow indicator
◻ Brine meter.
4. Skids anchored to foundations.
5. Water meters installed.
6. The following prefabricated piping installed:
◻ Inlet.
◻ Outlet
◻ Wash and rinse outlet header
◻ Water meter.
7. Dilution water line connected.
8. Brine meter and brine rate set valve connected to regeneration brine
line.
9. The following connection made:
◻ Water inlet
◻ Soft water outlet
◻ Raw brine to regeneration brine line
◻ Wash and rinse to drain.
10. Water softener resin filled.
11. Power supply connected.
NOTE:
REMARKS:
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
VIBRATION CHECK ELECTRIC MOTORS

EQ.065/
AMECFW Contract:
DATE Axial (A) Vertical (V) Horizontal (H) GSE Temp. °C
NOTE:
REMARKS:
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
VIBRATION CHECK
CENTRIFUGAL
PUMPS (TYPE 1)
EQ.070/
AMECFW Contract:
DATE AXIAL (A) Vertical (V) Horizontal (H) GSE Temp. °C
NOTE:
REMARKS:
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
VIBRATION CHECK
CENTRIFUGAL
PUMPS (TYPE 2)
EQ.075/
AMECFW Contract:
DATE Axial (A) Vertical (V) Horizontal (H) GSE Temp. °C
NOTE:
REMARKS:
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
EQ.075 Rev. 00
LIST EQUIPMENT PACKAGE

EQ.080/
AMECFW Contract:
VENDOR: SERIES N°: MODEL:
1.0 External check:

1. All nozzles are correctly located and oriented 5. Vents are properly connected
2. Attachments for ladders and platforms are correctly located 6. Isolation valve correctly located and installed
3. Holding down holes are correctly located and oriented 7. Sanitary Air Break as per specification Dwg
4. Nameplate is installed and Date is correct
FW:
Date:
Subcontractor:
Date:
6. Hold down bolts torqued to correct setting
2.0 Positioning: 7. ref. of tool (torque wrench)_
1. Elevation is correct ref. last calibration certificate date
2. Alignment correct ref. used over gear
3. Orientation is correct Date:
4. Levelled
5. Anchor bolts ready for grouting Date:
FW:
Subcontractor:
3.0 Platforms and ladders:

1. Installed according to the following drawings: 2. Ladders correctly installed
3. Platforms are completed with: handrailing, toe plates,
FW dwg: flooring secured
Vendor dwg:
FW: Date:
Subcontractor: Date:
4.0 Utilities verification:

1. Utilities have been correctly connected and tagged 5. Electric tests performed by subcontractor (see forms CON-
F03)
FW: Date:
NOTE:
REMARKS:
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
LIST - AIR DRYER PACKAGE

EQ.085/
AMECFW Contract:
VENDOR: SERIES N°: MODEL:
1.0 External check:

1. All nozzles are correctly located and oriented 5. Vents are properly connected
2. Attachments for ladders and platforms are correctly 6. Isolation valve correctly located and installed
located 7. Sanitary Air Break as per specification Dwg
3. Holding down holes are correctly located and oriented
4. Nameplate is installed and Date is correct
FW: Date:
2.0 Positioning:
1. Elevation is correct 4. Levelled
2. Alignment correct 5. Anchor bolts ready for grouting
3. Orientation is correct 6. Hold down bolts torqued to correct setting
FW: Date:
3.0 Platforms and ladders:

1. Installed according to the following drawings: 2. Ladders correctly installed
3. Platforms are completed with: handrailing, toe plates,
FW dwg: flooring secured
Vendor dwg:
FW: Date:
4.0 Utilities verification:

1. Utilities have been correctly connected and tagged 2. Electric tests performed by subcontractor (see forms CON-
F03)
FW: Date:
NOTE:
REMARKS:
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
FIELD INSTALLATION
CHECK LIST STEAM
TURBINE
EQ.100/
AMECFW Contract:

1. Baseplate levelled and properly grouted. Jackscrews removed and foundation
bolts tightened. Soundness of grouting checked against voids
2. Supply and exhaust piping strain alleviated Check main nozzle vs. piping flange
parallelism
4. Check coupling DBSE
5. Check shaft sealing (labyrinth, carbon rings, etc), including gland condenser, as
applicable
6. Check of lube oil AREA. Lubricant
Lube oil AREA chemically cleaned

8. Check of casing drainage, inlet valve and steam traps
9. Check rotation from freedom
11. Check of safety valve setting. (installed on the casing or exhaust piping)
12. Make sure turbine properly lubricated before running, and oil filters cartridge clean
13. Over speed mechanism free and operable. Tripout set at RPM
14. Steam blowing of supply steam line to turbine and check cleanliness through
copper or aluminium plates
15. Governor mechanism free and operable. (Manual and/or remote control).
16. Check proper installation, operation and set of condenser auxiliaries and
instrumentation, and gland condenser
17. Check proper installation of turbine auxiliary lines: casing drains, recovery steam to
gland condenser, steam to ejector, steam traps
18. Make sure block valves in casing drains closed after draining all condensate
19. Check condenser vacuum AREA
20. Check condenser extraction pumps.
- 4 hour running and check vibrations and temperature
- check proper operation of overspeed trip (3 consecutive trials with turbine
uncoupled)
21. Check extent of insulation and heat tracing according to P&ID’s
ref. last calibration certificate date_
NOTE:
REMARKS:
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
LIST FIRE WATER PUMP
(Almost same as Centrifugal Pumps, but no mechanical seal)
EQ.105/
AMECFW Contract:
1. Baseplate levelled and properly grouted. Jackscrew removed and foundation

bolts tightened.
2. Temporary strainer on suction installed.
3. Excess piping strain alleviated.
4. Final cold alignment to manufacturer’s tolerance. Nominal coupling distance

between shafts ends (DBSE) mm
6. Check pump and driver for freedom of movement.
7. Driver checked for correct rotation (uncoupled). 4 hours running to check

vibration and temperature.
8. Bearing housing flushed and re-lubricated. Lubricator filled and

operable. Lubricant
9. Check motor bearing lubrication. Lubricant
10. Mechanical seal or packing. Type
11. Coupling installed. Type
12. Driver –pump coupling and installation of coupling guard
13. Flange parallelism checked.
14. Vent and drains connection check.
15. ref. of tool (torque wrench)_

ref. used over gear
NOTE:
 When the pump is equipped with a pressurized Lube oil system, check set proper operation of the associated auxiliaries
and instrumentation
REMARKS:
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
LIST LOADING ARM

EQ.110/
AMECFW Contract:
1. Check for transport damage
2. Stand post to be transported to the installation place (by means of crane)

and fixed to the foundation by means of bolts.
3. Stand post to be aligned.
4. Loading arm to be fixed with assembling set at stand post (by means of
crane)
5. Check swivel joints and check the grease
6. Lubrication main seal
7. Cylinder pipe and piston rods are to be protected
8. Assemble and adjustment work at spring actuated cylinder only to be

done by authorised skilled personnel
9. Ancillary pipe work - ancillary equipment
10. Screw tightening torque
11. Locking device
12 Ref. of tool (torque wrench)_

ref. used over gear
NOTE:
REMARKS:
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
FIELD
INSTALLATION
CHECK LIST
DIAPHRAGM PUMP
EQ.115/
AMECFW Contract:

1. Check for transport damage
2. Locate the pump in an accessible and sufficiently roomy place to

facilitate control and inspection.
3. The baseplate must not be built into the grout, but fixed to the foundation
through proper foundation bolts.
4. Check the unit levelling and tighten the foundation bolts. Soundness of
grouting checked against voids
5. Suction and discharge pipework.
6. Pipes should be independently supported.
1. Ancillary pipework - ancillary equipment
9. Gear can be freely turned by hand
12. Check pump and driver for freedom of movement
13. Operable lubricant.
14. Check gear lubricant
15. Check proper Pressure Safety Valve installation

ref. last calibration certificate
date
NOTE:
REMARKS:
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
FIELD INSTALLATION
CHECK LIST
SCREW PUMP
EQ.120/
AMECFW Contract:
Item to check (Screw and Gear Pumps should be made Signature and date
almost comparable)
1. The pump shall be inspected on site, possible transport damage.

2. All foundations and baseplates shall be statically stable, and foundation
bolts tightened.
3. No vibration of the pump.
4. Mechanical seals - type.
5. Shaft sealing rings - type.
6. Packing seal -type.
7. Final cold alignment to manufacturer’s tolerance.
8. Coupling installed - type.
10. Coupling guard type.
11. Gear box proper lube oil level check before start.
12. Drive checked for correct rotation.
13. Hours running to check vibration and temperature.
14. Operable - lubricant
15. Flange parallelism checked.
16. Suction and discharge pipework.
17. Ancillary pipework - ancillary equipment.
18. Check proper Pressure Safety Valve installation.

date
ref. used over gear
NOTE:
 When the pump unit is equipped with a pressurized Lube oil system, check set and proper operation of the associated
auxiliaries and instrumentation.
REMARKS:
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
FIELD INSTALLATION
CHECK LIST
GEAR PUMP
EQ.125
AMECFW Contract:

1. The pump end motor shall be inspected on site, possible transport
damage.
2. Pump base must be level and properly grouted and foundation bolts
tightened. Soundness of grouting checked against voids.
3. Temporary suction screen installed.
4. Excess piping strain alleviated.
5. Check cold alignment to manufacturer tolerance
7. Check pump and driver for freedom of movement.
8. Check proper installation of shaft seal harness, as applicable.
9. Check proper connection for coolant inlet & outlet, vents, drains, thermal
relieve valves, sightglasses, as applicable.
10. Driver checked for correct rotation.
11. Gear pump unit checked.
12. Bearing housing re-lubricated.
13. Check motor bearing lubrication.
14. Mechanical seal Type
15. Coupling installed Type
16. Magnetic coupling - or belts - or dryflex coupling installed
17. Coupling guard in place.
18. Pressure safety valve setting correct.
19. Non return valve fitted correctly.
20. Vents and drains correct.
21. All controls protective devices and auxiliary AREAs checked.
22. Ref. of tool (torque wrench) ref.
last calibration certificate date
ref. used over gear
NOTE:
REMARKS:
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
FIELD
INSTALLATION
Report n.: CHECK LIST Contractor:

EQ.170/
AMECFW Contract:
Item to check Signature and Date

1. The pump end motor shall be inspected on site, possible transport damage
2. Roots vacuum pump must be positioned horizontally

3. Baseplate levelled and properly grouted. Jackscrews removed. Soundness of
grouting checked against voids
4. Intake flange serves as the reference surface
5. A boring is provided in each foot for fixing purposes
6. The pump must not be stressed by improper tightening of the fixing screws
8. One filling of operating medium for the gear chamber is supplied with the pump
9. The drive shaft sealing oil chamber is filled

11. Check filling level approx. 5 mm below the middle of the sightglass
12. Intake connection check
13. Overflow valve
14. Coupling half-motor check-type
15. Coupling half-pump check-type
16. Crown gear for coupling guard type
17. Coupling protection check
18. Check pump and driver for correct rotation
19. Electrical connection end checked for correct rotation
20. Check motor bearing lubrication
21. Running to check vibration and temperature
22. Sealing gas connection
23. Flushing device
NOTE:
REMARKS:
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
FIELD
INSTALLATION
CHECK LIST
Report n.: HERMETIC PUMP Contractor:
EQ.175/
AMECFW Contract:
1. Prior to installation, hermetic pump must be checked for damages during

transport
2. Pump base must be level and properly grouted and foundation bolts
tightened. Soundness of grouting checked against voids.
3. Install in the suction line of pump a filter strainer
4. Flange horizontally and vertically checked
5. Check motor bearing lubrication Lubricant [1]
6. Coupling installed Type [1]
7. Driver-pump coupling and installation of coupling guard [1]
8. Drive checked for correct rotation

9. Make sure protection hardware against dry run and overload properly
installed and connected
11. No vibration of the pump

12. Suction and discharge pipework checked
13. Check final hot alignment to manufacturer’s tolerance [1]
14. Ancillary pipework - ancillary equipment checked
ref. used over gear
NOTE:
REMARKS:
APPROVED BY: CONTRACTOR AMEFW CLIENT
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
FIELD
INSTALLATION
CHECK LIST
Report n.: BRIDGE CRANE Contractor:
EQ.180/
AMECFW Contract:
1. Name plate correctness.

2. Compliance with specifications
3. Check if any part of the system is damaged.
4. Dimensional check and compliance with the drawings.
5. Check of alignment and tolerance of rails / runways.
6. Visual check of correct installation.
7. Check of bolted joints and torque tightening (where requested).
8. Visual check of the lifting ropes.
9. Visual check of the greased parts and the lubricant levels.
10. Check of end stops and limit switches.
11. Check brake system regulations.
12. Check of driving systems (hoists, trolley and bridge).
13. Filling of lubricant. Oil type:
Grease type:
14. Test by electrical department carried out.
NOTE:
REMARKS:
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
FIELD INSTALLATION
CHECK LIST
1
LUBE OIL SYSTEM
EQ.185/
AMECFW Contract:
1. The Lube Oil Console shall be inspected at arrival on site for possible transport
damage.
2. Set the Console on concrete slab, levelled and properly grouted. Jackscrews
removed. Soundness of grouting checked against voids
3. Interconnecting lube oil piping chemically cleaned and inspected.
5. Check the overhead rundown tank proper installation and instrumentation.
6. Check for proper slope of oil return lines from equipment and ensure there are no
trapped sections.
7. Check for auxiliary piping rigidity; provide gussets where necessary.
8. Check cleanliness of system during oil flushing.
9. Check for leaks during oil flushing.
10. Inspect oil reservoir once drained and make sure of its cleanliness.
11. Insure Y-strainer cartridge reinstalled upstream lube oil pumps.
12. Steam blowing of supply steam line to auxiliary turbine and check cleanliness through
copper or aluminium plates.
13. Check shaft sealing (carbon rings) and free rotation of the auxiliary steam turbine.
14. Check proper installation of steam supply and exhaust lines (adequate drain facilities,
pressure relieve valve, check valve) according to P&ID’s.
15. Check rotation of motor and turbine.
16. Check driver-pump alignment.
17. Make sure Coupling guard installed.
18. Check governor and overspeed setting, and check their proper operation (3
consecutive overspeed trip trials).
19. Once lube oil reservoir filled check operation of heater.
20. Check proper installation and set of all instruments
21. Make sure before commissioning oil filters cartridge clean.
22. Check proper operation of oil pumps, including automatic cut-in of stand by pump.
23. Check extent of insulation and heat tracing according to P&ID’s.
NOTE:
REMARKS:
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
1
Assumed one pump motor and one pump turbine-driven.
SITE QUALITY
CONTROL
ELECTRICAL Pag/Pag. 1 din/from 8
INSTALLATION

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AFWI DWG N°: BD0955A- Rev: C00 APPROVED FOR CONSTRUCTION

M.Rizzo M. Mandelli SIGNATURE: A. MANTOVANI
04
03
02
01
00 Issued for Comments 15/11/2017 M.Rizzo M.Mandelli
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
AMEC FOSTER
ITALIANA S.r.l. 7 3 8 7 8 1 X 0 0 - X 3 1 1 0 0
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 30 31 80
Via S. Caboto, 15
20094 Corsico
(Milano) ITALY
doc.
SITE QUALITY CONTROL, ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

JOB SPEC BD0955A- 07A2.10
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION Rev.: C00
CONTENTS
I. SCOPE
II. SUBJECT
III. DEFINITION
IV. REFERENCE
V. PROCEDURE
VI. RECORDS
VII. ATTACHMENTS
I. SCOPE

This document shall be read in conjunction with the CONTRACT and all
other related and applicable documentation. The most stringent
requirement shall always apply.
II. SUBJECT
This document refers to the Quality Control activities relevant electrical

installation.
III. DEFINITION
A. RESPONSIBILITIES



inspection safely.
for review.

responsibilities.

PLAN)

CONTRACT.


 Sequence number
IV. REFERENCE

CONTRACTOR shall not deviate from Contractual requirements unless

formal approval is obtained from EMPLOYER.
V. PROCEDURE
codes/forms in accordance with attachments as per Section
thirty days before the beginning of new activities. In any case
no construction activities shall start unless Quality Control Plans
have been approved by all applicable Contractual parties.
Changes to Quality Control Plans shall always be formally agreed

with EMPLOYER before implementation.


execution of construction works to minimize back logs. QC reports
shall be submitted duly compiled with all applicable data to
EMPLOYER’s review/approval no later than 24 Hours since completion
of the relevant inspection. QC reports shall always be endorsed with
inspection.
Actual test results values shall always be recorded (as applicable) on

QC forms or attached to them.
Concerning bolting reports, to be completed or include data per location

and per type of bolt)


construction works.
C. MINIMUM DUTIES
Inspection and testing
Inspections and testing shall be carried out by the CONTRACTOR and

his personnel and with his equipment.
The guidelines of the degree of inspections shall be, but not limited
to, as follows:
1 Preparation
The CONTRACTOR must prepare the installations set up,

assembled and connected and/or modified for the execution
of the tests and inspections to be carried out both for the part
and total deliveries. The inspections will be carried out at
CONTRACTOR’s care, by his personnel and with his equipment
in the presence of the Supervisor, in cooperation with the
supplier of the machinery and/or equipment, which form the
object of the inspection.
The CONTRACTOR must have in the field, as a minimum

and however in proportion to the number of persons who work
for the assembly and installation, the following measure and
control instruments having current calibration certificates:
1 500 V Megger
1 1000 V Megger
1 5000 V megger
1 Universal Tester
1 Megger for measure of ground resistance
1 Luxmeter
1 Sequence meter
1 Ammeter pliers with different scales for maximum
capacity of at least 600 A.
1 Relay testing kit (if applicable)
2 Check of general matters

Check of the correspondence of the electrical plant to the

standards and to the projects documents.
Check of the exact location of the lighting fixtures, outlets,

switches and of all equipment in general, in connection with
the project drawings.
Check of the best orientation of the covers of the junction

boxes, in accordance with the possibility of their inspection.
Check of the good execution of the splices (if any) on the

electrical wires and the terminal connections to the equipment.
Check of the greasing of all the covers of the explosion-

proof boxes, of the breathers and drain fittings.
Check of the appropriate execution of all sealing

fittings.
Check of all bolted connections to the earthing rods and to

earth bars and check of the bolted connections of earthing
conductors to earth plates.
Check of the connections of the protective conductors to

the electrical equipment, to the earthing rods and to the
connection of the normal operating earthing conductors.
Check of the connections to the ground bus of the earthing

for the electrostatic charges.
Check of the earthing of the metallic parts which are not

components of electric equipment such as cable rack, platforms,
structures, stairs, railing, frames, supports, gas sewage and
water drain pipes.
Upon arrival of modules to site and unless otherwise instructed

by Employer, Contractor shall be responsible to:
 Carry out and record a visual check to ensure that no

damages have occurred to electrical systems as installed
at Module Yard.
 Carry out and record insulation test on electrical circuits
relevant to lighting system and power distribution system
3 AS-BUILT drawings
CONTRACTOR shall provide as-built drawings to EMPLOYER

before the execution of each functional test.
VI. RECORDS


VII. ATTACHMENTS
Attachment 1: Field testing of electrical equipment (07A2.10-01)

Attachment 2: ITP - Inspection & Test Plan (07A2.10-02).
Attachment 3: Quality Forms (07A2.10-03).
Attachment 1 to
Job Spec. BD0955A-07A2.10
FIELD TESTING OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
Field tests shall be carried out in accordance with the following procedures.
1.1 GENERATORS AND MOTORS
The following instructions shall be followed and the test report form shall be
filled-in and submitted.
a. Insulation resistance
– All alternating current synchronous and inductive type machinery 

7,000 kW and below shall be subjected to an insulation test prior to
connecting the machine terminals to the motor feeder. A one minute
"megger" reading not less than the following minimum values at a
machine temperature of 40°C (*) shall be observed before
energizing:
Minimum Megaohm Values for Machines

7,000 kW & below - class A and B insulation
110V 440V 550V 2300V 3000V 4000V
1.11 meg. 1.5 meg. 1.6 meg. 3.3 meg. 4.0 meg. 5.0 meg.
For all other voltage ratings the minimum insulation resistance value
shall be determined from the following formula:
Rm = kV + 1
Where Rm = recommended minimum insulation

resistance in mega-ohms at 40°C (*) of the entire
machine winding.
kV = rated machine potential in kilovolts.
* If the winding is not a temperature of 40°C, the observed one

minute resistance must be reduced by multiplying the
observed value by the temperature coefficient of insulation
resistance (Kt40c) found in the following table:
Winding temperature
°C 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40
Kt40c 0.065 0.09 0.13 0.19 0.25 0.36 0.50 0.70 1.0
– Three phase machine with only three leads brought out shall have
the insulation resistance measured with all three leads connected
together.
Three phase machines with all six leads brought out shall have the
insulation resistance of each phase measured separately with the
other two phases grounded. The observed resistance of each phase
shall be divided by two to obtain a value, which after correction for
temperature, can be compared with the recommended minimum
value of insulation resistance.
– If the corrected insulation resistance is below the minimum value,

the machine must be dried out, as specified below.
It should be noted that for machines in good condition, insulation
resistance readings of 10 to 100 times the recommended minimum
values are not uncommon.
b. Drying out process
– Machine windings shall be dried out by supplying heat from electric

strip heaters, from heat lamps or by passing current through
machine windings until a sufficiently high, rising insulation
resistance is obtained. When current is applied through the
windings, it shall not exceed the nameplate rating. The temperature
maintained during the drying out process should not exceed the
following:
Class A Insulation
by a thermometer 80°C
by resistance bridge or a thermal-sensitive
resistor circuit 90°C
Class B Insulation
by a thermometer 90°C
by a resistance bridge or a thermal-sensitive
resistor circuit 110°C
– The insulation resistance shall be periodically recorded during the
drying out process. In large high voltage machines the initial cold
coil resistance value will be high (20 mega-ohms 20°C) (*). As the
drying process continues and water vapor is boiled out from the
internals of the machines, the insulation resistance will rapidly fall to
a minimum (6 mega-ohms 90°C) (*). As the drying process nears
completion the insulation resistance will reverse its downward trend
and settle at a steady higher value (12 mega-ohms 90°C) (*). As the
coils cool, after the drying process has been completed, the
insulation resistance will rapidly rise (150 mega-ohms 20°C)(*).
(*) values for comparative purposes only.
c. Inspection
– Prior to energizing the machine, all foreign objects between the

rotor and the stator coils should be removed.
Brushes must move freely in their holders making a firm and even
contact with collector rings. Voltage and frequency on the
nameplate of the machine must correspond to the terminal line
voltage and frequency. Belts for directly connected exciters
(auxiliaries) shall be in proper running condition. All bearings must
be properly filled with oil or grease.
Machine shafts (rotors) shall be checked for alignment and rotation
before being coupled to other machinery.
– During the machine test-run, inspect for smoke unusual noises,

vibration and over-heating. Operating conditions must be
investigated and corrective action taken when the total temperature
(ambient plus rise) exceeds the following values:
for Class A insulation - 90°C

for Class B insulation - 110°C
for Class H insulation - 150°C
2.1 CABLES
c. Minimum permissible insulation resistance
in mega-ohm for 300 m. Runs and below
Cabl Voltage
e 600V max. (*) 3kV max. 5kV max.
size
4 mm² 1.5 5.0 -
6 mm² 1.5 4.0 -
10 mm² 1.5 4.0 5.0
16 mm² 1.0 3.0 4.0
25 mm² 0.4 3.0 3.0
35 mm² 0.4 2.0 3.0
50 mm² 0.4 2.0 2.0
70 mm² 0.3 1.5 2.0
120 mm² 0.3 1.5 2.0
240 mm² 0.2 1.0 1.5
500 mm² 0.2 1.0 1.0
Example: 600 Volt max. 120 mm², length below 300 m

0.3 mega-hom min. insulation resistance.
(*) Minimum permissible values of insulation resistance for

lighting branch circuits shall be one-half of the indicated
values when fixtures (before lamping) and receptacles are
included in the test.
Attachment 2 to
Job Spec. BD0955A-07A2.10
Inspection and Test Plan

07A2.10 – Electrical
installation
EL-100 INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN FOR POWER TRANSFORMERS
EL-102 INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN FOR LV (400V) AND MV (6kV) ELECTRIC MOTOR
EL-103 INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN FOR HIGH/MEDIUM VOLTAGE AND LOW VOLTAGE
SWITCHGEAR
EL-104 INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN FOR MEDIUM VOLTAGE POWER CABLES
EL-104A INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN FOR HIGH VOLTAGE POWER CABLES
EL-105 INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN FOR LV POWER & CONTROL CABLES
EL-107 INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN FOR EARTHING SYSTEM
EL-108 INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN FOR LIGHTING CIRCUIT
EL 109 INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN FOR CIRCUIT BREAKER/CONTACTOR
EL 110 INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN FOR MCC FEEDER/MOTOR STARTER
EL-111 INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN FOR LOW VOLTAGE BUSDUCT
EL 112 INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN FOR UPS
EL 113 INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN BATTERY & BATTERY CHARGER
EL 117 INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN FOR ELECTRIC HEAT TRACING
EL-118 INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN FOR CONTROL STATION / JUNCTION BOX
EL 119 INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN FOR ELECTRIC HEATER
EL-120 INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN FOR CABLE TRAYS
EL-121 INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN FOR SOCKET OUTLET CIRCUIT
EL-122 INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN FOR SMALL ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
EL-123 INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN FOR OUTER SHEATH REPAIR OF MV OR LV CABLE
Location/Project: Contractor:
INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN FOR POWER TRANSFORMERS
Doc N° & rev: CON. STD.: 07A2.10
Description Document CC FW CL NB
1. GENERAL DOCUMENTATION TO BE REVIEWED AND/OR APPROVED
Ensure that IFC Drawings and Data Books

1.1. from Vendor are available
Subcontract requis. E R
Ensure that measurement & test Subcontract requis.

Register and relevant
1.2. equipment have proper and current
calibration certificates
E R
calibrations 1BD0874ZA-07A2.14
2. ERECTION, INSTALLATION AND TESTING ACTIVITIES
Packing list
procedure from
2.1. Inspection at receipt on site G001 E R
Data book / Drawings Contractor
from Vendor
Subcontract requis.
procedure from
2.2. Installation/positioning inspection
Contractor
G002A E H
Layout drawings
Subcontract requis.
Data book / Drawings procedure from

2.3. Fixing and preliminary checks inspection
from Vendor Contractor
G002B E H
Layout drawings
Subcontract requis.
Megger test and glands termination procedure from
2.4. inspection Contractor
G002C E W W
See G002C
Subcontract requis.
Bolting inspection (bolting report to be
procedure from
2.5. completed or include data per location
G002D E H H
from Vendor
FW= Foster
W = WITNESS - Notification is mandatory. CC can proceed with inspection even if not all the parties involved are Wheeler CL= Owner
Page 1 of 2
INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN FOR POWER TRANSFORMERS
Subcontract requis.
procedure from
2.6. Installation completion
G002E E W W
from Vendor
Subcontract requis.
procedure from
2.7. Pre-commissioning activities
G002F E H H
from Vendor
Oil sampling prior to Start up to be arranged by FW Supervisor ensuring that test is done in Certified laboratory and report is provided
FW= Foster
Page 2 of 2
Location/Project: INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN FOR LV (400V) AND MV (6kV) ELECTRIC Contractor:
MOTOR


E R
calibrations 1BD0874Z-07A2.14
2. ERECTION, INSTALLATION ACTIVITIES
Packing list
2.1. Inspection at receipt on site G019 E W
Data book / Drawings
from Vendor
Subcontract requis.

2.2. Fixing and preliminary checks inspection G019A E W
Layout drawings
Bolting inspection Subcontract requis.
procedure from
2.3. (bolting report to be completed or include Data book / Drawings Contractor
G019B E W R
data per location and per type of bolt) from Vendor
3. TESTING ACTIVITIES FOR LV ELECTRIC MOTOR
Subcontract requis.
procedure from
3.1. Meggering test G019C E W R
from Vendor
Subcontract requis.
procedure from
3.2. Run-in test G019D E H H Not applicable for module Yard
from Vendor
FW= Foster
Page 1 of 2
Location/Project: INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN FOR LV (400V) AND MV (6kV) ELECTRIC Contractor:
MOTOR
4. TESTING ACTIVITIES FOR MV ELECTRIC MOTOR

Subcontract requis.
procedure from
4.1. Meggering test G019C E W H
from Vendor
Subcontract requis.
procedure from
4.2. Polarisation index check G019E E H H Not applicable for module Yard
from Vendor
Subcontract requis.
procedure from
4.3. Run-in test G019D E H H Not applicable for module Yard
from Vendor
R = REVIEW - No Notification is required. QC forms shall be signed by all parties involved after inspection FW= Foster
Page 2 of 2
Location/Project: INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN FOR HIGH/MEDIUM VOLTAGE AND LOW Contractor:
VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR


E R
2. ERECTION AND INSTALLATION ACTIVITIES (HIGH/MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR)
Packing list Note for FW Supervisor:

procedure from  Check that all operation and
2.1. Inspection at receipt on site G003 E H
Data book / Drawings Contractor maintenance tools are
from Vendor provided
Subcontract requis.
(*) Vendor to be involved for
verification and provision of
2.2. Installation and inspection
G004A H H(*) confirmation in writing that the
design requirements have been
met
Layout drawings
Subcontract requis.
Bolting inspection (bolting report to be verification and provision of
procedure from
2.3. completed or include data per location
G004B E H(*) H confirmation in writing that the
and per type of bolt) design requirements have been
from Vendor
met
Subcontract requis.
2.4. Fixing and preliminary checks inspection
G004C E R(*) R confirmation in writing that the
met
Layout drawings
3. TESTING ACTIVITIES (HIGH/MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR)
3.1. Pre-commissioning activity G005A N.A. H H Executed by vendor
3.2. Differential protection testing G005B N.A. H H Executed by vendor
Electrical relays testing along with Data book / Drawings procedure from
3.3. G005C N.A. H H Executed by vendor
differential protection testing and current from Vendor Contractor
Page 1 of 2
Location/Project: INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN FOR HIGH/MEDIUM VOLTAGE AND LOW Contractor:
VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
transformer magnitizing curve
3.4. Functional testing of the switchgear and testing of the ATS to be executed by the Client
4. ERECTION AND INSTALLATION ACTIVITIES (LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR)
Packing list
procedure from
4.1. Inspection at receipt on site G003 E H
from Vendor
Subcontract requis.
4.2. Installation and inspection G006A H H(*) confirmation in writing that the
met
Layout drawings
Subcontract requis.
Bolting inspection(bolting report to be verification and provision of
procedure from
4.3. completed or include data per location G006B E H(*) H confirmation in writing that the
and per type of bolt) design requirements have been
from Vendor
met
Subcontract requis.
4.4. Fixing and preliminary checks inspection G006C E R(*) R confirmation in writing that the
met
Layout drawings
5. TESTING ACTIVITIES (LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR)
5.1. Pre-commissioning activity G007A N.A. H H Executed by vendor
5.2. Electrical relays testing G007B N.A. H W Executed by vendor
5.3. Functional testing of the switchgear and testing of the ATS to be executed by the Client
Page 2 of 2
INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN FOR MEDIUM VOLTAGE POWER CABLES


E R
Subcontract requis.

2.1. Cable laying inspection G008A E
Layout drawings
Subcontract requis.
procedure from
2.2. Preliminary checks inspection
G008B E
from Vendor
Subcontract requis.
procedure from
2.3. Testing inspection
G008C E R (*) confirmation in writing that the
from Vendor
met
Subcontract requis.
procedure from
2.4. Outer sheath insulation resistance check
G008D E H(*) W confirmation in writing that the
from Vendor
met
Subcontract requis.
procedure from
2.5. Connection and completion inspection
G008E E H
from Vendor
2.6. For cables operated at 6.3kV: perform a live partial discharge test (to be executed by Client Start Up team )
Page 1 of 2
INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN FOR MEDIUM VOLTAGE POWER CABLES
Subcontract requis.
procedure from
2.7. High pot test
G008F E H(*) H confirmation in writing that the
from Vendor
met
FW= Foster
Page 2 of 2
INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN FOR HIGH VOLTAGE POWER CABLES


E R
Subcontract requis.

Layout drawings
Subcontract requis.
procedure from
G015B E
from Vendor
Subcontract requis.
procedure from
G015C E R (*) confirmation in writing that the
from Vendor
met
Subcontract requis.
procedure from
G015D E H(*) H confirmation in writing that the
from Vendor
met
Subcontract requis.
procedure from
G015E E H
from Vendor
Page 1 of 2
INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN FOR HIGH VOLTAGE POWER CABLES
Subcontract requis.
procedure from
2.6. Partial discharge test
G015G E H(*) H confirmation in writing that the
from Vendor
met
FW= Foster
Page 2 of 2
INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN FOR LV POWER & CONTROL CABLES


E R
Subcontract requis.

Layout drawings
Subcontract requis.
procedure from
G009B E
from Vendor
Subcontract requis.
procedure from
G009C E R
from Vendor
Subcontract requis.
procedure from
G009D E H W
from Vendor
Subcontract requis.
procedure from
G009E E H W
from Vendor
FW= Foster
Page 1 of 1
INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN FOR EARTHING SYSTEM


E R
2. INSTALLATION AND TESTING ACTIVITIES
Subcontract requis.

2.1. Earthing installation and testing
G026 E W R
Layout drawings
FW= Foster
Page 1 of 1
INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN FOR LIGHTING CIRCUIT


E R
2. ERECTION AND INSTALLATION ACTIVITIES
Packing list
procedure from
2.1. Fixing and preliminary checks inspection G027 E W R
from Vendor
3. TESTING ACTIVITIES
3.1. Lighting circuit testing activity G028 E W W
Page 1 of 1
INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN FOR CIRCUIT BREAKER/CONTACTOR


E R
2.1. Preliminary checks inspection G010A E W
2.2. Relays testing inspection
from Vendor
G010B N.A. H H To be executed by Vendor
2.3.
2.4.
2.5.
2.6.
2.7.
Page 1 of 1
INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN FOR MCC FEEDER/MOTOR STARTER


E R
2.1. Preliminary checks inspection G011A E W R
2.2. Relays testing inspection
G011B N.A.(*) H W Executed by vendor
2.3.
2.4.
2.5.
2.6.
2.7.
Page 1 of 1
Location/Project: ANWERUP – EPC 2 Contractor:
REVAMP & OFFSITES INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN FOR LOW VOLTAGE BUSDUCT


E R
Subcontract requis.
2.1. Installation/positioning inspection G013A E W (*) confirmation in writing that the
met
Layout drawings
Subcontract requis.
procedure from
2.2. Junction resistance/insulation testing
G013B N.A. W W Executed by Vendor
from Vendor
Subcontract requis.
procedure from
2.3. Bus bar insulation resistance test
G013C N.A. H H Executed by Vendor
from Vendor
Subcontract requis.
procedure from
2.4. Installation completion inspection
G013D E R(*) W confirmation in writing that the
from Vendor
met
Subcontract requis.
procedure from
2.5. Phase sequence/continuity testing
G013E R(*) W confirmation in writing that the
from Vendor met
FW= Foster
Page 1 of 1
INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN FOR UPS


E R
2. ERECTION AND INSTALLATION ACTIVITIES (HIGH/MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR)
Packing list
from Vendor
Subcontract requis.
Data book / Drawings MoS / procedure

from Vendor from Contractor
G022A H W
Layout drawings
UPS testing activity: verify that Data book / Drawings
3.1. G022B E W W
Vendor report is issued from Vendor
3.2. Alarm testing G022C E W W
from Vendor
Page 1 of 1
Location/Project Contractor:
INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN FOR BATTERY & BATTERY CHARGER


E R
Subcontract requis.

2.1. Installation/positioning inspection G012A E R
Layout drawings
Subcontract requis.
procedure from
2.2. Battery charger and battery testing
G012B N.A.(*) W W To be executed by the Vendor
from Vendor
2.3.
2.4.
2.5.
2.6.
2.7.
Page 1 of 1
INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN FOR ELECTRIC HEAT TRACING


E R
Subcontract requis.

G024 E H H
Layout drawings
3.1. Heat tracing testing activity G024A E W
FW= Foster
Page 1 of 1
INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN FOR CONTROL STATION / JUNCTION BOX


E R
Subcontract requis.

2.1. Fixing and preliminary checks inspection G020 E W
Layout drawings
Subcontract requis.
procedure from
2.2. Control station / Junction box testing
G020A E W R
from Vendor
FW= Foster
Page 1 of 1
INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN FOR ELECTRIC HEATER


E R
Packing list
from Vendor
Subcontract requis.

G023A E W
Layout drawings
3.1. Electric heater testing activity G023B E W W
Page 1 of 1
INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN FOR CABLE TRAYS
1.1. Ensure that IFC Drawings are available Subcontract requis. E R

E R
Subcontract requis.
procedure from
Contractor
G025 E W
Layout drawings
FW= Foster
Page 1 of 1
INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN FOR SOCKET OUTLET CIRCUIT


E R
Packing list
procedure from
2.1. Fixing and preliminary checks inspection G029 E W R
from Vendor
3.1. Socket outlet circuit testing activity G030 E W W
Page 1 of 1
INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN FOR SMALL ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT


E0 R
Packing list
procedure from
2.1. Inspection at receipt on site G014A E H
from Vendor
Subcontract requis.
Preliminary checks and installation procedure from
2.2. inspection Data book / Drawings Contractor
G014B E R
from Vendor
Subcontract requis.
procedure from
G014C E W
from Vendor
Subcontract requis.
procedure from
2.4. Functional test on panel
G014D N.A. W W Executed by Vendor
from Vendor
2.5.
2.6.
2.7.
Page 1 of 1
Location/Project: INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN FOR OUTER SHEATH REPAIR OF MV Contractor:
OR LV CABLE


E R
procedure from
2.1. Cable preparation for repair Refer to G016A G016A E W W
Contractor
procedure from
2.2. Visual check before repair Refer to G016B
Contractor
G016B E H H
procedure from
2.3. Repair completion Refer to G016C
Contractor
G016C E R(*) confirmation in writing that the
met
FW= Foster
Page 1 of 1
Attachment 3
Job Spec. 1-BD-0955A -07A2.10
INDEX
Form Code Description

G001 POWER TRANSFORMER DELIVERY CHECKLIST
G002A POWER TRANSFORMER INSTALLATION / POSITIONING REPORT
G002B POWER TRANSFORMER FIXING & PRELIMINARY INSPECTION REPORT
G002C POWER TRANSFORMER MEGGER TEST / GLANDS TERMINATION INSPECTIONS REPORT
G002D POWER TRANSFORMER BOLTING REPORT
G002E POWER TRANSFORMER INSTALLATION COMPLETION INSPECTION REPORT
G002F POWER TRANSFORMER PRE COMMISSIONING INSPECTION REPORT
G003 SWITCHGEAR DELIVERY CHECKLIST
G004A HIGH/MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR INSTALLATION & INSPECTION REPOR
G004B HIGH/MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR BOLTING INSPECTION REPORT
HIGH/MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR FIXING & PRELIMINARY CHECKS INSPECTION
G004C
REPORT
G005A HIGH/MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR PRE-COMMISSIONING INSPECTION REPORT
G005B HIGH/MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION TESTING REPORT
G005C HIGH/MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR ELECTRICAL RELAYS TESTING REPORT
G006A LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR INSTALLATION & INSPECTION REPORT
G006B LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR BOLTING INSPECTION REPORT
G006C LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR FIXING & PRELIMINARY CHECKS INSPECTION REPORT
G007A LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR PRE-COMMISSIONING INSPECTION REPORT
G007B LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR ELECTRICAL RELAYS TESTING REPORT
MEDIUM VOLTAGE POWER CABLES (for cables operating above 1 kV and below 7kV)
G008A
LAYING INSPECTION REPORT
MEDIUM VOLTAGE POWER CABLES (for cables operating above 1 kV and below
G008B
7kV)PRELIMINARY CHECK INSPECTION REPORT
G008C
7kV)TESTING INSPECTION REPORT
MEDIUM VOLTAGE POWER CABLES (for cables operating above 1 kV and below 7kV)OUTER
G008D
SHEATH INSULATION REPORT
G008E
7kV)CONNECTION & COMPLETION INSPECTION REPORT
G008F
7kV)HIGH POT TEST REPORT
ELECTRICAL POWER AND CONTROL CABLE (Cable rated voltage below 1 kV)LAYING
G009A
INSPECTION REPORT
ELECTRICAL POWER AND CONTROL CABLE (Cable rated voltage below 1 kV)PRELIMINARY
G009B
CHECK INSPECTION REPORT
ELECTRICAL POWER AND CONTROL CABLE (Cable rated voltage below 1 kV)TESTING
G009C
INSPECTION REPORT
ELECTRICAL POWER AND CONTROL CABLE (Cable rated voltage below 1 kV) OUTER
G009D
SHEATH INSULATION REPORT
ELECTRICAL POWER AND CONTROL CABLE (Cable rated voltage below 1 kV) CONNECTION
G009E
& COMPLETION INSPECTION REPORT
G010A M.V. CIRCUIT BREAKER / CONTACTOR PRELIMINARY CHECKS INSPECTION REPORT
G010B M.V. CIRCUIT BREAKER / CONTACTOR RELAYS TESTING INSPECTION REPORT
G011A M L.V. MCC FEEDER / MOTOR STARTER PRELIMINARY CHECKS INSPECTION REPORT
G011B M.L.V. MCC FEEDER / MOTOR STARTER RELAYS TESTING INSPECTION REPORT
G012A BATTERY AND BATTERY CHARGER INSTALLATION & POSITIONING REPORT
G012B BATTERY AND BATTERY CHARGER TESTING REPORT
G013A LOW VOLTAGE BUSDUCT INSPECTION REPORT
G013B JUNCTION RESISTANCE / INSULATION INSPECTION REPORT
G013C BUS BAR INSULATION RESISTANCE REPORT
G013D INSTALLATION COMPLETION REPORT
G013E PHASE SEQUENCE / CONTINUITY TEST REPORT
G014A SMALL ELECTRICAL EQUIPM. DELIVERY CHECKLIST
G014B SMALL ELECTRICAL EQUIPM. PRELIMINARY CHECKS AND INSTALLATION REPORT
G014C SMALL ELECTRICAL EQUIPM. TESTING INSPECTION REPORT
G014D SMALL ELECTRICAL EQUIPM. FUNCTIONAL TESTING REPORT
G015A HIGH VOLTAGE POWER CABLES LAYING INSPECTION REPORT
G015B HIGH VOLTAGE POWER CABLES PRELIMINARY CHECK INSPECTION REPORT
G015C HIGH VOLTAGE POWER CABLES TESTING INSPECTION REPORT
G015D HIGH VOLTAGE POWER CABLES OUTER SHEATH INSULATION REPORT
G015E HIGH VOLTAGE POWER CABLES CONNECTION & COMPLETION INSPECTION REPORT
G015G PARTIAL DISCHARGE TEST REPORT
OUTER SHEATH REPAIR OF MV OR LV
G016A
CABLE CABLE PREPARATION FOR REPAIR
G016B OUTER SHEATH REPAIR OF MV OR LV CABLE VISUAL INSPECTION BEFORE REPAIR
G016C OUTER SHEATH REPAIR OF MV OR LV CABLE REPAIR COMPLETION REPORT
G019 ELECTRIC MOTORS DELIVERY CHECK LIST
G019A ELECTRIC MOTORS FIXING & PRELIMINARY CHECKS
G019B ELECTRIC MOTORS BOLTING REPORT
G019C ELECTRIC MOTORS MEGGERING TEST REPORT
G019D ELECTRIC MOTORS RUN-IN TEST REPORT
G019E ELECTRIC MOTORS POLARISATION INDEX TEST REPORT
CONTROL STATION / JUNCTION BOX FIXING & PRELIMINARY CHECKS INSPECTION
G020
REPORT
G020A CONTROL STATION / JUNCTION BOX TEST CERTIFICATE
G022 UPS DELIVERY CHECKLIST
G022A UPS INSTALLATION & INSPECTION REPORT
G022B UPS TEST REPORT
G022C UPS ALARM FUNCTION TESTING REPORT
G023 ELECTRIC HEATER DELIVERY CHECKLIST
G023A ELECTRIC HEATER INSTALLATION REPORT
G023B ELECTRIC HEATER TESTING REPORT
G024 ELECTRICAL HEAT TRACING INSTALLATION AND INSPECTION REPORT
G024A ELECTRICAL HEAT TRACING TESTING REPORT
G025 CABLE LADDER / TRAY INSTALLATION INSPECTION REPORT
G026 EARTHING SYSTEM INSTALLATION AND TEST REPORT
G027 LIGHTING CIRCUIT FIXING & PRELIMINARY CHECKS INSPECTION REPORT
G028 LIGHTING CIRCUIT TESTING REPORT
G029 SOCKET OUTLET CIRCUIT FIXING & PRELIMINARY CHECKS INSPECTION REPORT
G030 SOCKET OUTLET CIRCUIT TESTING REPORT
G160 LV CABLE SPLICE CHECK LIST
G161 MV CABLE SPLICE CHECK LIST
POWER TRANSFORMER
DELIVERY CHECKLIST
Contractor:
TAG : DRAWING N. REV:
Sub TOS: Module: Unit: REPORT N. G001
Description:
CHECK RESULTS
ITEM
Acceptable N/A Remarks
1 Check packing list Record any missing material
Visually inspect transformer and auxiliary equipment for

2
mechanical damage and cleanliness
3 Check transport impact recorder
4 Check that all valves are in correct position (e.g.

Buchholz, sampling valve, valves detachable radiators)
5 Check oil levels through oil indicators

Install breathing device.
Check that plastic plugs have been removed from

breathing device and that the condition of the silica gel is
6
good
Visual check and record silica gel color:
Check color in vendor manual:

7 Check nameplate details are as per data sheet
APPROVED BY: CONTRACTOR VENDOR FW CLIENT
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
POWER TRANSFORMER
INSTALLATION / POSITIONING
REPORT Contractor:
Sub TOS: Module: Unit: REPORT N. G002A
Description:
This report confirms that the installation of Transformer as per above Tag has been
successfully completed against reference and applicable drawings (list to be hereby included):
Remarks:
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
POWER TRANSFORMER
FIXING & PRELIMINARY

INSPECTION REPORT
Contractor:
Sub TOS: Module: Unit: REPORT N. G002B
Description:
RESULTS
ITEM CHECK
1
Check that transformer is bolted to the foundation
Visually inspect transformer and auxiliary equipment for

2 mechanical damage and cleanliness. Check paint
scratches refinished
Check that transformer enclosures are secure, clean and
3
free of dust and debris
Check that air cable box bottom plate is non-magnetic in
4
case of single core cable connections
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
POWER TRANSFORMER
MEGGER TEST / GLANDS

TERMINATION INSPECTIONS REPORT
Contractor:
Sub TOS: Module: Unit: REPORT N. G002C
Description:
CHECK RESULTS
ITEM
Carry out a 1 minute insulation resistance test of the
transformer windings. Remove N- E link for test
1 (HV - LV + E) 5kV Megger (min 150 M)
(LV - HV + E) 1kV Megger (min 10 M)
2 Check tightness of glands and terminations
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
POWER TRANSFORMER
BOLTING REPORT
Contractor:
Sub TOS: Module: Unit: REPORT N. G002D
Description:
RESULTS
ITEM CHECK
Torque bolted connections ref. of tool
(torque wrench)

date
1
Size of bolts:
Type of bolts:
Value of torque:
Put mark on torqued bolts
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
POWER TRANSFORMER
INSTALLATION COMPLETION
INSPECTION REPORT
Contractor:
Sub TOS: Module: Unit: REPORT N. G002E
Description:
RESULTS
ITEM CHECK
Perform primary/secondary injection of

1.
51G from 51G current transformer to
switchgear
2. Check all boxes are closed properly
Verify transformer is grounded at 2 points

3.
by cables of at least 70 mm2
Check transformer neutral to LV
4.
switchgear earth and record size
5. Check cable clamping and supports
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
POWER TRANSFORMER
PRE COMMISSIONING INSPECTION

REPORT
Contractor:
Sub TOS: Module: Unit: REPORT N. G002F
Description:
RESULTS
ITEM CHECK
a1) Check operation of Buchholz
alarm (manually) up to alarm panel.
a2) Check the operation of Buchholz trip

contact and/or relief valve trip contact up
to switchgear and ensure relay trips circuit
breaker.
1 b) Check oil temperature alarm contact up to
alarm panel
c) Check oil level (min-max) contacts up

to alarm panel.
d) Check CT Neutral short circuit

terminals are properly installed (CT
terminals open)
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
SWITCHGEAR
DELIVERY CHECKLIST
Contractor:
Description:
RESULTS
ITEM CHECK
Check mechanical damage after delivery

(without unpacking if switchgear is
1
wrapped)
Packing list to be checked as per ITP
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
HIGH/MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
INSTALLATION & INSPECTION REPORT

Contractor:
Description:
RESULTS
ITEM CHECK
1. Verify that correct switchgear has been installed
Check switchgear and nameplate against GA diagram and

2.
single line diagram
Check switchgear for:(
(a) Mechanical damage

3.
(b) Alignment
(c) Foundation fixings
4. Check that doors are aligned correctly and can be opened fully
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
BOLTING INSPECTION REPORT

Contractor:
Description:
RESULTS
ITEM CHECK
Torque bolted connections ref. of tool (torque wrench)

date _
1.
Size of bolts:
Type of bolts:
Value of torque:
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE

CHECKS INSPECTION REPORT
Contractor:
Description:
CHECK RESULTS
ITEM
Inspect switchgear earthing bar. Record size and No. of

1. cables connected to earth and visually check that both
sides of cables are connected
Ensure bottom plates for feeders with single core cables

2.
are non-magnetic
3. Check that all cable entries are fully plugged / sealed
4. Check that glands are fitted correctly
5. Check that internals are free from dust, debris and tools
6. Ensure busbars are fully insulated / boots are installed
7. Ensure busbar chambers are free from dust and debris
8. Ensure correct operation of all busbar shutters
9. Check that all necessary labelling in present
Carry out 500V insulation resistance test on

10.
anti- condensation heaters. Min 10 M
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
PRE-COMMISSIONING
INSPECTION REPORT
Contractor:
Description:
RESULTS
ITEM
CHECK
1. Ductor test busbar bolted connections.Attach detailed

ductor report.
2. Carry out 5kV insulation resistance test on busbars

between phases and phase to earth (VT removed) Min
value 150 M
Before HV test After HV test

L1-L2/L3/E
L2-L1/L3/E
L3-L1/L2/E
Carry out a high voltage pressure test phase to earth
test voltages see table below (according IEC 62271)
3. Test Voltage is 80% of value in table (assuming this test
was performed 1 time before in the factory)
When 1 phase is tested, the other phases should be grounded
Phase L1-E L2-E L3-E
Leakage mA
Rated voltage Rated short-duration power-frequency withstand voltage

kV rms kV rms 1 min
3,6 10
7,2 20
12 28
Carry out insulation resistance test at 100V on all control

4. circuit wiring and switchgear bus wiring. (100V so that relays
do not have to be disconnected)
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION
TESTING REPORT
Contractor:
Sub TOS: Module: Unit: Report N. G005B
Description:
CHECK RESULTS
ITEM
1. Testing of the differential protection. Refer to vendor report
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
ELECTRICAL RELAYS TESTING REPORT

Contractor:
Description:
CHECK RESULTS
ITEM
Program all metering devices (if not done in FAT). Refer to

1.
vendor report
Set up and test the protective relays. (If not done in FAT)
2.
Refer to vendor report
3. Differential protection testing
4. Current transformer magnetizing curve test
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
INSTALLATION & INSPECTION

REPORT Contractor:
Description:
RESULTS
ITEM CHECK
1. Verify that correct switchgear has been installed
Check switchgear and nameplate against GA diagram and

2.
single line diagram
Check switchgear for:(

3.
(b) Alignment
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
BOLTING INSPECTION REPORT

Contractor:
Description:
RESULTS
ITEM CHECK

date _
1.
Size of bolts:
Type of bolts:
Value of torque:
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE

Contractor:
Description:
CHECK RESULTS
ITEM
Inspect switchgear earthing bar. Record size and No.

1. of cables connected to earth and visually inspect that
both sides of cables are connected
Ensure bottom plates for feeders with single core cables

2.
are non-magnetic
3. Check that glands are fitted correctly
4. Check that internals are free from dust, debris and tools
5. Ensure bus bars are insulated / boots are installed
6. Ensure bus bar chambers are free from dust and debris
7. Ensure correct operation of all bus bar shutters
8. Check that IP20 covers have been reinstalled
9. Check that all necessary labels are present
10. Carry out 500V insulation resistance test on anti-

condensation heaters. Min 10 M
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
PRE-COMMISSIONING
INSPECTION REPORT
Contractor:
Description:
CHECK RESULTS
ITEM
1. Ductor test busbar bolted connections.Attach detailed

ductor report.
Carry out 1 kV insulation resistance test on bus bars,

2. between phases and neutral and to earth (remove
any neutral
Before HV test After HV test

L1-L2/L3/E
L2-L1/L3/E
L3-L1/L2/E
Carry out a high voltage pressure test phase to earth for
1 min.
Power-frequency withstand test voltages see table below
3. (according IEC 61439)
Test Voltage is 80% of value in table (assuming this

test was performed 1 time before in the factory)
Phase L1-E L2-E L3-E N-E
Leakage mA
Rated insulation voltage Ui Dielectric test voltage Dielectric test voltage

(line to line) a.c. d.c.
V r.m.s V V
800 < Ui ≤ 1000 2200 3110
Carry out insulation resistance test at 100V on all control

4. circuit wiring and switchgear bus wiring (100V to prevent
any problems with electronics)
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
ELECTRICAL RELAYS TESTING REPORT

Contractor:
Description:
CHECK RESULTS
ITEM

1.
vendor report
Set up and test the protective relays. (If not done in FAT)
2.
Refer to vendor report
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
HIGH VOLTAGE POWER CABLES
(for cables rated voltage ≥ 7kV)
PRELIMINARY CHECK INSPECTION

REPORT
Contractor:
Description:
CHECK RESULTS
ITEM
From End: A
1. Check the cable glands
To End: B
2. On single core cables check that bottom plates and clamping

system are non-magnetic
3. Verify core continuity
4. Insulation resistance before termination execution
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
TESTING INSPECTION REPORT

Contractor:
Description:
CHECK RESULTS
ITEM
Execute cable end From End: A

1. termination following the
Vendor Specification (correct
lug bolt etc) To End: B
Check and record insulation (a) Core to core M

resistance at 5000V DC
and record lowest value
2.
after executing the cable
end termination (b) Core to earth M
(Minimum 100 M)
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
OUTER SHEATH INSULATION REPORT

Contractor:
Description:
CHECK RESULTS
ITEM
Check and record cable outer sheath insulation resistance at

1.
500V DC (only for buried cables)
Record earth loop resistance of each phase from

2.
switchgear end (value to be in line with design data)
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
CONNECTION &
COMPLETION INSPECTION
Contractor:
Description:
CHECK RESULTS
ITEM
Check earth connection of sheath/armouring.

1. Armour and lead sheath have to be grounded at least
on the primary side
2. Re-connect all cable cores and check against

interconnection diagram

date
Size of bolts:
3. Type of bolts:
Value of torque:
(bolting report to be completed or include data per

location and per type of bolt)
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
HIGH VOLTAGE
POWER
CABLES
Contractor:
Description:
AC High Voltage Test (Hipot)

Cable rated voltage: kV Cable designation:
Check termination not connected to equipment
Check ground connection of sheath and armouring
Termination kit/materials installed in accordance with vendor’s instructions
Type of installation: U/G - A/G Number of joints:
CABLE MARK Nr.
Phase Nr
Test kV – AC
Cable size
Test start hour & date
Ambient temperature: ……………..°C Climate: Dry Wet Air conditioned
TEST INSTRUMENT: Type: Serial number: Manufacturer:

Current
Leakage
mA 1)
Note:
1) Maximum current leakage value of 0,01 mA to be considered as acceptable for test result.
2) For existing medium voltage cable in service more than 5 years the voltage value applied for test to be reduced of 50% if not otherwise specified by
cable manufacturer.
SIGNATURES
CC O AFW CL
E RA H H
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
PARTIAL DISCHARGE TEST
REPORT
(sheet 1/5)
Contractor:
Sub TOS: Module: Unit: REPORT N. G015G
Description:
ITEM CHECK RESULTS Date
1 Location/Area Classification
2 Voltage grade:
3 Manufacturer
4 Manuf. drum No’s:
5 Serial Numbers
6 No. of conductors and size:
7 From equipment/ to equipment:
8 Design length:
9 Actual length:
10 Cable routing drgs:
Drgs From: To:

11 Cable interconnection
Start the measurement at 0,25 U0.
Then, the voltage is increased in small steps up to 1,7 U0.

12 Measurement
For each voltage level is data measured during 30
seconds.
The measured discharges are made visible in a discharge diagram. This is
summarized in discharges at test voltages ≤U0 and >U0 and is included in
this report. (see Figure 1)
An analysis of these discharge diagrams is listed in columns 4 to 10 of Table

13 Results 1. Where applicable, for each cable and each test voltage, the following is
given:
 The number of measured discharges >20pC and above noise level

of test instrument (#), the average discharge size (avg) with unit pC
 The number of phase in which the discharges were (Ph)
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
REPORT
(sheet 2/5)
Contractor:
Description:
14 Discharge diagram & Tabel
Figure 1: Discharges diagram (to be attached)

NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
REPORT
(sheet 3/5)
Contractor:
Description:
ITEM CHECK Date
14 Discharge diagram & Tabel
Table 1: Discharges
Cable Data <=U0 >U0 PD area

Object L Type # Avg Ph # Avg Ph [m] – [m]
cum [pC [pC
Termination
Dry
150kV S/S
XLPE
Cable
Heat
Joint 1 …
shrinkable
XLPE
Cable
Heat
Joint 2 …
shrinkable
XLPE
Cable
Termination …
Dry
DCU area

NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
REPORT
(sheet 4/5)
Contractor:
Description:
ITEM CHECK Date
15 Conclusions and recommendations
The conclusions and recommendations of these measurements are summarized in Table 2.
Table 2: Conclusions and recommendations
Posistion
Object Type Possible background Risk
[m]
Termination
Dry
150kV S/S
Cable XLPE
Joint 1 Heat
shrinkable
Cable XLPE
Joint 2 Heat
shrinkable
Cable XLPE
Termination
Dry
DCU area
Risks can be interpreted as follows
 Risk 1 = real chance of failure

 Risk 2 = some risk of failure, need action within one year
 Risk 3 = low risk, remeasure over 5 years
 Risk 4 = little chance of failure, remeasure optionally over 5 years

NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
REPORT
(sheet 5/5)
Contractor:
Description:
ITEM CHECK Date
Remarks:
16

NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
CABLE
CABLE PREPARATION FOR

REPAIR REPORT
Contractor:
Description:
CHECK RESULTS
ITEM
At the place where the cable is damaged, remove a ring of
width 5cm of the outer sheath in order to check for possible
1. water ingress. In case water is found on the cable armour,
remove sheath by increments of 5cm up to the point that no
water is found. Record the length of outer sheath that has
been removed
Record the amount of heat shrinkable tubes which will be
2. used for the repair. Evaluate the possibility of replacing the
damaged portion of the cable by another cable of equal or
greater section joined using splices.
3. Dry cable armour using hot air blower / torch
Apply 1 layer of water blocking tape on both ends of the

4. damaged section at ± 2cm from where the outer sheath
has been removed.
APPROVED BY: CONTRACTOR VENDOR AFW OWNER
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
CABLE
VISUAL INSPECTION BEFORE REPAIR

Contractor:
Description:
CHECK RESULTS
ITEM
1. Visual inspection before application of the heat shrinkable tube
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
CABLE
REPAIR COMPLETION REPORT

Contractor:
Description:
CHECK RESULTS
ITEM
Apply heat shrinkable tube following manufacturer’s
procedure. Ensure that after shrinking the heat shrinkable
1. tube extends ± 2cm beyond the water blocking tape. If the
tube is placed over another tube, ensure that the overlap of
the tubes is ± 15cm
See Note
Visual inspection of the cable repair after application of the

heat shrinkable tube. If possible, check if the distance
2. between the end of the heat shrinkable tube and the water
blocking tape is sufficient. If another tube will be used,
remove the zipper of the installed tube over at least the length
where the next tube will overlap (Loverlap) and then return to
Note: Ltol is the tolerance length, Ldamage is the portion of the cable where the outer sheath has been removed and Loverlap is the overlap length of two heat
shrinking tubes. Ltol is set to 2 cm and Loverlap is 15cm.
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
ELECTRIC MOTORS
DELIVERY CHECK
LIST
Contractor:
Description:
CHECK RESULTS
ITEM
1. Visually inspect motor for external damage
2. Check CE and ATEX certificates
3. Check equipment against general information data sheets
Record actual motor nameplate details and any additional

4. information not contained on data sheets (attach picture
of nameplate to format)
Hazardous Area class of protection including gas group
5.
temp class etc
6. Record location
7. Record Voltage (V)
8. Record Motor / Power Rating (HP / kW)
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
ELECTRIC MOTORS
CHECKS
Contractor:
Description:
CHECK RESULTS
ITEM
Check that motor is and fittings are suitable for
1.
area classification
2. Check that fan is free and fan cover secure
3. Rotate shaft by hand and check for freedom of movement
Check motor connections (STAR or DELTA) connection and

4.
record phase rotation
Inspect terminal box(es) flange surfaces (apply
5. Chemodex copper grease compound to flange
surfaces on Ex(d) enclosures) if applicable
6. Inspect terminal box(es) fixing bolts
Check that gaskets and seals are undamaged and

7.
fitted correctly
8. Check spare cable entries are plugged correctly
Visually check that earthing cable is connected

9.
Check and record for motor heater (if fitted)

10. (a) Rat i ng (Am ps/W at ts )
(b) V o l t a g e ( V o l t s )
Carry out visual inspection of (for MV Motor only):
(a) Winding temperature detector(s)
(b) Air temperature indicator(s)

11.
(c)Bearing temperature indicator(s)
(d) Vibration monitor(s)
(e) Condensation / Water detector(s)
12. Check supply to motor heater is connected
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
ELECTRIC MOTORS
BOLTING REPORT
Contractor:
Description:
RESULTS
ITEM CHECK
Torque bolted connections ref. of tool
(torque wrench)

date
1
Size of bolts:
Type of bolts:
Value of torque:
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
ELECTRIC MOTORS
MEGGERING TEST REPORT
Contractor:
Description:
Motor Winding Insulation Resist. Values (M ) e Minimum

Between Before After Acceptance Values
cable cable
* if 6 ends brought out connection connextio
n
L1 - L2 *
L2 - L3 *
100 M for
L3 - L1 * ALL Test
L1 - Earth Voltage
levels
L2 - Earth
L3 - Earth
Remarks
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
ELECTRIC MOTORS
RUN-IN TEST REPORT
Contractor:
Description:
Phase check
4Hr motor light run test:
Surface/ Bearing temperature

Vibrations
Speed
Phase current
Check operat. space heater
Check direction of rotation
Check earth connection
Check shaft rotates freely
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
ELECTRIC MOTORS
POLARISATION INDEX TEST REPORT
Contractor:
Description:
Dielectric absorb. ratio for motor above 600 Minimum

V (see Note) Acceptance Values
10' : 1' for 1.6

≤
1500HP
10' : 1' > 1600 HP 2
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
CONTROL STATION / JUNCTION BOX

Contractor:
Description:
CHECK RESULTS
ITEM
1. Verify installation / positioning vs IFC layout drawings
2. Check that all cable entries are fully plugged / sealed
3. Check that glands are correctly fitted
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
CONTROL STATION / JUNCTION BOX
TEST CERTIFICATE
Contractor:
Description:
CHECK RESULTS
ITEM
1. Check selector switch operation and locking facilities
Scale
Record ammeter scale and current ratio.
2. Verify that ammeter was tested & calibrated by
Vendor before delivery
Ratio
3. Measure insulation resistance of contacts, terminals, etc,
4. Check continuity of contacts
5. Check segregation of voltage levels in junction box and

that core terminations are correct
6. Check integrity of insulated earth connection
7. Bolt up terminal box lid (apply Chemodex copper

grease compound to flange surfaces of Ex(d) equipment
only)
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
UPS
DELIVERY CHECKLIST
Contractor:
Description:
RESULTS
ITEM CHECK

1
(without unpacking if UPS is wrapped)
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
UPS
INSTALLATION & INSPECTION

REPORT Contractor:
Description:
RESULTS
ITEM CHECK
1. Verify that correct UPS has been installed
Check UPS and nameplate against GA diagram and single

2.
line diagram
Check UPS for:(

3.
(b) Alignment
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
UPS
TEST REPORT
Contractor:
Description:
RESULTS
ITEM CHECK

1
(without unpacking if UPS is wrapped)
Rated Voltage (V): Substation: Rating (kVA):
UPS visual inspection procedure completed:
Battery and charger test procedure completed:
Vendor test sheets and start-up procedure available:
Insulation resistance: ................... MΩ
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
UPS
ALARM FUNCTION TESTING REPORT

Contractor:
Description:
CHECK RESULTS
ITEM
1. Alarms: completed and function tested
2. List alarms tested
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
ELECTRIC HEATER
DELIVERY CHECKLIST
Contractor:
Description:
CHECK RESULTS
ITEM
1. Check equipment against data sheet
2. Check that equipment is suitable for the area
3. Check that access to equipment is suitable
4. Check cable support to equipment is correct
Inspect for mechanical damage and that interior is clear of

5.
silica gel etc.
6. Check internals are free of dust and debris
7. Inspect for missing components
Inspect equipment label and record details if different from the

8.
data sheet
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
ELECTRIC HEATER
INSTALLATION REPORT
Contractor:
Description:
CHECK RESULTS
ITEM
1. Check security of fixings
2. Check earthing is done
Check circuit connections are tight and as per

3.
termination diagram
Check that spare cable entries are blanked off with

4.
correct stoppers
5. Check gaskets are undamaged and fitted correctly
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
ELECTRIC HEATER
TESTING REPORT
Contractor:
Description:
CHECK RESULTS
ITEM
1. Function test control circuit
2. Energised Tests
Volts
2a Switch on anti-condensation heater and record:
Amps
Carry out energised operational checks on main and

2b auxiliary power units, timers, relays, etc and prove
operational logic and interlocks are correct
3. Record load current at each control step
4. Verify correct operation of temperature control device
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
ELECTRICAL HEAT TRACING
INSTALLATION AND
INSPECTION REPORT
Contractor:
Description:
CHECK RESULTS
ITEM
1. Distribution board No & Circuit No.
2. Line N°
3. Junction Box Tag No’s
4. Visual inspection of installed tape for damage (see below)
4a Check securing supports and even distribution on pipe
4b Check installation on pipe and on pipe fittings is correct
4c Check tape termination and connection at junction box
4d Check installation of thermostat heat sensors on pipe surface
5. Tape end seal and connection kit and gland fitted correctly
6. Insulation entry kit correctly
7. Junction box gland fitted correctly
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
ELECTRICAL HEAT TRACING
TESTING REPORT
Contractor:
Description:
Tests Values MΩ Minimum Date
accept.
Circuit Insulation After cable After insulation Before energize values
number resistance installation but installation
between .before insulation
conductor > 100 M
s VS
megge
earth
r
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
CABLE LADDER / TRAY
INSTALLATION INSPECTION REPORT

Contractor:
Description:
CHECK RESULTS
ITEM
Check ladder/tray/route, is in accordance with design

1.
drawings including trays identification
2. Check ladder supports are in accordance with design drawings
3. Check ladder/tray material meets specification
Check ladder/tray is not hazard to personnel, block access

4.
ways, prevent removal of equipment
5. Check that rack/tray cut edges are de-burred and smooth
Check insulating spacers are fitted between rack and steel

6. supports (spacers only required where unprotected dissimilar
metals touch
Check bonding / earthing. of cable trays. Check that both sides

7.
are connected
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
EARTHING SYSTEM
INSTALLATION AND TEST REPORT

Contractor:
Description:
Location/System: Ambient temp °C Climate: Wet [ ] Dry[ ]

Type of earth rod: Diameter ᶲ: Length m:
Size of earth conductor: Depth of installation:
Material: □ Copper □ Galvanized Steel Type of Soil
Methode of test: □ V/ I □ with megger □ with ohm- meter
Item Measured value (Ohm) Location and system of earthing test Measured value
Earth Mesh Nr □ Electrical equipment system earth
Earth Rod Nr □ 1 measured at:…………………………..
2
3 Lighting arrester system earth
4 measured at:…………………………..
5
6 Low resistance neutral system earth
7 measured at:…………………………..
8
9 High resistance neutral system earth
10 measured at:…………………………..
Buried conductors and earth rods are located in accordance with dwg □
The continuity of the protective conductors (Pe) and equipotential conductors have been verified □
Earthing of equipotential connections for machines,panels, structures and all metallic parts are completed □
Air terminations and down conductors for lighting protection have been checked □
Terminals and earth busbars are correctly installed and fixing bolts are well tightened
□ Cable tails coiled and supported on cable frame □
All earhing cables are mechanically protected □
Max acceptable values: Test Instrument:
Earthing rod system ≤ 1 OHM (for individual earth rod) Type:
Lightning arrester earthing system ≤ 1 OHM (for interconnected system)
Electrical equipment earthing system ≤ 1 OHM (for interconnected Serial N°:
system) Neutral earth L.V. (600 V or less) ≤ 1 OHM
Neutral earth M.V. (low resistance) ≤ 1 OHM
Manufacturer:
Neutral earth M.V. (high resistance) ≤ 1
OHM
Remarks :

NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
LIGHTING CIRCUIT

Contractor:
Description:
Area Covered : Dist Board N°: Circuit N°:
CHECK RESULTS
ITEM
1. Check installation of cables and fittings is complete
1a Confirm installed no. of light fittings in circuit agrees with

drawings.
1b Check fittings are suitable for area
2. Check circuit fuse size/MCB and record
Check cable terminations and gland at distribution board

3.
and circuit identification is correct.
Check cable glands & terminations at all fittings and JB’s

4.
I.P washers are fitted and glands greased as required
4a Inspect lighting fittings and suspension details
4b Check fittings are accessible for maintenance
5. Check Tag labels at all lighting fittings and JB’S are complete
6. Check spare entries are plugged correctly
7. Check mechanical security of fittings and cabling
8. For Exd equipment:
8a Check that flanges and bolts on fittings &JB’s are

undamaged,and greased with approved type.
8b Greased with approved type
8c Gaskets are undamaged and fitted correctly
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
LIGHTING CIRCUIT
TESTING REPORT
Contractor:
Description:
Area Covered : Dist Board N°: Circuit N°:
CHECK RESULTS
ITEM
Immediately prior to the energisation, check insulation

1.
resistance of circuit from distribution board
Check illumination levels in all areas conform to

2. design specification. Record details of all non-
conformancies (especially in escape routes and stairways)
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
SOCKET OUTLET CIRCUIT

Contractor:
Description:
CHECK RESULTS
ITEM
1. Check equipment against general information data sheet
Confirm installed numbers of sockets in circuit agrees

1a
with drawings
1b Check fittings area suitable for area
2. Check for mechanical damage and security
2a Check cable terminated
2b Check spare entries are plugged correctly
3. Check cable glands and that IP washers are fitted as required
4. Check core phase polarity markers
5. Check polarity correct
4a Check no fixing screws missing (cover and box)
4b Check flanges on fittings and J-B’s are undamaged
4c Check that the gaskets are undamaged and fitted correctly
4d On Ex (d) equipment Check that approved anti seize

grease is applied to flanges, bolts &glands
6. Check earthing is done
7. Check plug interlocking / shutters correct
8. Verify where socket is supplied from (switch / dist board)

and corresponds to ‘fed from’ label
9. Check that socket is the correct type / standard for voltage
10. Ensure all circuit labels are correct
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
SOCKET OUTLET CIRCUIT
TESTING REPORT
Contractor:
Description:
CHECK RESULTS
ITEM
Measure insulation resistance (500V Megger – minimum 10
Megohms) of complete circuit from distribution board end
1.
(1000v on 3.phase sockets)
2. Confirm MCB with earth leakage protection has been tested.
3. Energise circuit and check voltage at each socket.
4. Check phase rotation at each socket
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
LV CABLE SPLICE CHECK LIST
TAG No: TAG des:

UNIT: Module: Drawing:
SubTOS: TOS: TAG OLD NEW
SPLICE MODEL AND SIZE CABLE SIZE OLD NEW
CHECK RESULTS Date
A. GENERAL CHECKS
1 Work location check
a) Is the work location clean and suitable to perform the splicing activities?
b) Are all necessary tools and equipment available?
c) Is the work location protected against weather conditions?
3 Are the cables type and number identified and known by all involved parties?
B. CHECKS DURING THE EXECUTION OF THE SPLICE
1 Were the shells (covers) cut on the exact size of the cable(s) to be spliced?
2 Was every cable layer cut according to the manufacturer instructions?
3 Was every cable layer cleaned with sandpaper?
4 Was the volcanic tape placed at the two ends of the shells?
5 Was the earthing wire section properly selected? (See Note 2)
6 Were the springs selected and installed according to manufacturer instructions?
C. INSTALLATION OF THE COUPLING CONNECTORS
1 Is the connector size suitable for the cable cross sections to be spliced? (See Notes 3,4,5)
2 Were the wires brought into correct position (correct phase rotation)?
3 Were the wires cut to the correct length?
4 Are the connectors in line (meaning: not staggered)? (See also Note 1)
D. FINAL CHECKS BEFORE FILLING THE CAST WITH THE PRODUCT
1 Is the cast in the exact horizontal position?
2 Are ventilation holes free?
3 Are proper gloves worn by the person appointed for the casting?
4 Was the scotch cast properly identified with cable number?
5 Was the product warmed inside the building up to 30°-35°C before mixing it?
6 Was final approval received?
E. CASTING WITH THE PRODUCT
1 Is the quantity of the product sufficient to fill completely the cast shell?
F. CHECKS AFTER THE CASTING OF THE SPLICE
1 Was the area cleaned before leaving the work spot?
NOTES:
1. No tape shall be used to cover the connections or cable heads
2. Earthing VOBst insulated wire size selection:
 Phase conductor up to 16mm²=> equal to the phase conductor
 Phase conductor from 25mm²=> 50% of wire section with a minimum of 16mm²
3. If the phase conductors of the cables to be jointed have different dimensions, the biggest conductor shall be reduced to the size of the smallest one by
removing the correct (calculated) amount of strings by junior saw
4. For phase conductors up to 4mm² "lusterklem" type connectors can be used with the wires OVERLAPPED
5. When “break bolts” connectors are used in conjunction with triangle type conductors (sector shaped stranded conductor cables) the wires should be
slightly twisted before breaking the bolts to ensure that they are equally spread in the coupling.
APPROVED BY: SUBCONTRACTOR FWI CLIENT

NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
EL.160 Rev. 0
MEDIUM VOLTAGE POWER CABLES
(for cables operating above 1 kV and below 7kV)

Contractor:
Description:
CHECK RESULTS
ITEM
1. No. of conductors and size:
2. Type of installation:
3. Check cable is supported correctly
Check cable labelling:

 Duct bank – at duct entry and exit
 U/G – to be identified by bands markers every 7,5
m and in any case at the two ends of the cables,
showing the complete cable item/number. It shall
4. be done with a metallic tag plate.
 A/G - the cables have to be identified by bands
markers every 15m and in any case at the two
ends of the cables, showing the complete cable
item/number. It shall be done with a metallic tag
plate.
5. Check cable bending radius is to manufacturer's

recommendations
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE

REPORT
Contractor:
Description:
CHECK RESULTS
ITEM
From End: A
To End: B

NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE

Contractor:
Description:
CHECK RESULTS
ITEM


and record lowest value
2.
after executing the cable
end termination (b) Core to earth M
(Minimum 100 M)
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE

Contractor:
Description:
CHECK RESULTS
ITEM

1.
500V DC (only for buried cables)
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
CONNECTION &
Contractor:
Description:
CHECK RESULTS
ITEM

on the primary side
2. Re-connect all cable cores and check against interconnection

diagram

date
Size of bolts:
3. Type of bolts:
Value of torque:

NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
MEDIUM
VOLTAGE POWER
CABLES
Contractor:
Description:
AC High Voltage Test (Hipot)

Cable rated voltage: kV Cable designation:
Check termination not connected to equipment
Check ground connection of sheath and armouring
Termination kit/materials installed in accordance with vendor’s instructions
Type of installation: U/G - A/G Number of joints:
CABLE MARK Nr.
Phase Nr
Test kV – AC
Cable size
Test start hour & date
Ambient temperature: ……………..°C Climate: Dry Wet Air conditioned

Current
Leakage
mA 1)
Note:
1) Maximum current leakage value of 0,01 mA to be considered as acceptable for test result.
2) For existing medium voltage cable in service more than 5 years the voltage value applied for test to be reduced of 50% if not otherwise specified by
cable manufacturer.
SIGNATURES
CC O AFW CL
E RA H H
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
ELECTRICAL POWER AND CONTROL
CABLE
(Cable rated voltage below 1 kV)

Contractor:
Description:
CHECK RESULTS
ITEM

plate.

recommendations
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
CABLE

REPORT
Contractor:
Description:
CHECK RESULTS
ITEM
From End: A
To End: B

NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
CABLE

Contractor:
Description:
CHECK RESULTS
ITEM


2. and record lowest value.
(b) Core to earth M
(Minimum 100
M)
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
CABLE

Contractor:
Description:
CHECK RESULTS
ITEM

1. 500V DC (only for buried cables equal to or more than 75m
in length)
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
CABLE
CONNECTION &
Contractor:
Description:
CHECK RESULTS
ITEM

on the primary side
2. Re-connect all cable cores and check

against interconnection diagram
For MCC power cable connections:

date
3. Size of bolts:
Type of bolts:
Value of torque:

NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
M.V. CIRCUIT BREAKER /
CONTACTOR)
PRELIMINARY CHECKS
INSPECTION REPORT Contractor:
Description:
Incomer/feeder for: Compartment:
Serial Nr.: Type: Air Vacuum Gas SF6 Rating:
CHECK RESULTS
ITEM
1. Check fuse rating (only for contactor)
2. Circuit breaker / contactor visual check completed
3. Check manual operation of withdrawable system
4. Check mechanical and electrical interlock system
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
M.V. CIRCUIT BREAKER / CONTACTOR)
RELAYS TESTING INSPECTION REPORT

Contractor:
Description:
CHECK RESULTS
ITEM
1. Perform primary injection for 51G CT (outgoing feeders).

2.
vendor report
Set up and test the protective relays. (If not done in FAT) Refer
3.
to vendor report
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
M L.V. MCC FEEDER / MOTOR STARTER
PRELIMINARY CHECKS
INSPECTION REPORT
Contractor:
Description:
CHECK RESULTS
ITEM
1. Power fuse rating in A
2. Drawer visual check completed
3. Check mechanical operation of main switch
4. Check mechanical operation of drawer (rack in/out)
Check mechanical operation of interlock between door

5.
and main switch
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
L.V. MCC FEEDER / MOTOR STARTER
RELAYS TESTING INSPECTION REPORT

Contractor:
Description:
CHECK RESULTS
ITEM
Program all metering devices (if not done in FAT). Refer

1.
to vendor report
Set up and test the protective relays. (If not done in FAT) Refer
2.
to vendor report
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
BATTERY AND BATTERY CHARGER
INSTALLATION & POSITIONING
REPORT
Contractor:
Description:
RESULTS
ITEM CHECK
1. Check that correct charger is installed in correct position
Check that the battery cell type is correct and that the
2.
correct number of cells are installed
3. Check the alignment of the cabinets
4. Battery and charger visual inspection complete
Check battery cells connection with presence of

5.
anticorrosive grease
6. Check battery cable connection
7. Check that IP20 covers are reinstalled
8. Check that charger is free of dust and debris
9. Check that all labels are installed and that they are correct
Verify grounding: record size and No. of cables connected to

10. earth and visually inspect that both sides of cables are
connected
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
BATTERY AND BATTERY
CHARGER TESTING
REPORT
Contractor:
Description:
RESULTS
ITEM CHECK
Commission the battery charger. Attach the
1.
commissioning report
2. Perform a battery capacity test. Attach the vendor report
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
LOW VOLTAGE BUSDUCT INSPECTION
REPORT
Contractor:
Description:
CHECK RESULTS
ITEM
1. Check wall/ceiling fastening
2. Check earth frame/support connection
3. Check alignment before bolting connections
4. Bus bar and main power connections tight
Torque bolted connections

Ref. of tool (torque wrench) Ref. last cali
bration certificate
Date
Size of bolts:
5. Type of bolts:
Value of
torque:
(bolting report to be completed or include data per location

NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
JUNCTION RESISTANCE /
INSULATION INSPECTION
REPORT
Contractor:
Description:
CHECK RESULTS
ITEM
Junction resistance/Junction insulation test. Refer to

1.
vendor report
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
BUS BAR INSULATION
RESISTANCE
REPORT
Contractor:
Description:
RESULTS
CHECK
Acceptable Not Accept
VALUES M Minimum
Bus bar insulation resistance between Before
After acceptable
SWGR/Equip
connection
SWGR/Equip values
connection
L1 – L2
L2 – L3
L3 – L1
L1/L2/L3/ - Neutral 1000 M
L1 – Earth 1000V Megger
L2 – Earth
L3 – Earth
Neutral – Earth
Ambient temperature °C
Climate ◻ Dry Wet Air conditioned
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
INSTALLATION COMPLETION REPORT
Contractor:
Description:
CHECK RESULTS
ITEM
1. Inspect sunshield installation
2. Check bolted connections to switchgear
3. Check bolted connections to transformer
4. Check rubber seal bus duct to transformer box
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
PHASE SEQUENCE / CONTINUITY TEST
REPORT
Contractor:
Description:
CHECK RESULTS
ITEM
1. Phase sequence / continuity test. Refer to vendor report
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
SMALL ELECTRICAL EQUIPM.
DELIVERY CHECKLIST
Contractor:
Description:
CHECK RESULTS
ITEM
1 Check packing list. Record any missing material
2 Check mechanical damage after delivery
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
PRELIMINARY CHECKS
AND INSTALLATION
Contractor:
Description:
CHECK RESULTS
ITEM
1. Verify that correct panel has been installed in the correct place
2. Check labelling is present and correct
Verify grounding: record size and No. of cables connected to

3. earth and visually inspect that both sides of cables are
connected
4. Check that IP20 covers have been reinstalled
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE

Contractor:
Description:
CHECK RESULTS
ITEM
Check if FAT has been performed. If not perform FAT

1.
checks at site
2. Perform insulation resistance test on the panel
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
FUNCTIONAL TESTING REPORT

Contractor:
Description:
CHECK RESULTS
ITEM
1. Perform functional tests on panel
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE

Contractor:
Description:
CHECK RESULTS
ITEM

plate.

recommendations
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
MV CABLE SPLICE CHECK LIST
(sheet 1 of 3)
TAG No: TAG des:
CHECK RESULTS Date

GENERAL CHECKS
1 Work location check
a) Is the work location clean and suitable to perform the splicing activities?
b) Are all necessary tools and equipment available?
c) Is the work location protected against weather conditions?
2 Are the cables type and number identified and known by all involved parties?
A. ALIGNMENT CABLES TO BE SPLICED
1 Is the proper shell available (check the marking on the shell)?
2 Is the delivered splice complete (material for XLPE cable, materials for paper/lead cable, resin, connectors)
3 Is the cable straight and in the correct connection position?
4 Is the paper lead cable in a good condition
B. XLPE CABLE PREPARATION
1 Is the outer sheet removed for a minimum distance of 550mm?
2 Is the metal armor removed at 25mm of the outer sheet?
3 Is the inner sheet removed at 30 mm of the outer sheet?
4 Is the lead sheet removed at 55mm of the outer sheet?
5 Is the paper sheet removed against the lead sheet?
6 Is the color code recorded on the conductors?
7 Were the conductors spread open?
8 Are the earth springs and earth wires installed in the correct positions?
9 Are the copper screens from the conductors removed against the springs?
10 Are the paper screens from the conductors removed and cut against the springs?
11 Is the color code recorded on the springs of the conductors?
12 Is the correct distance to peel of the semiconductor marked with tape on the conductors?
13 Is the conductor lubricated?
14 Has the tool we use for peeling of the semiconductor proper settings
15 Is the peeled conductor free of impurities?
16 Are the tapes on the conductors been removed?
17 Is the conductor insulation removed to install the compression joints?
18 Are the conductors cleaned with a special tissue?
19 Is the field-controlling tape and self-curing insulation tape installed?
20 Are the compression joints installed properly?
21 Is the water blocking tape installed?

NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
EL0161 rev.00
(sheet 2 of 3)
TAG No: TAG des:
CHECK RESULTS Date

C. PAPER-LEAD CABLE PREPARATION
1 Is the outer sheet removed for a minimum distance of 550mm?
2 Is the metal armor removed at 25mm of the outer sheet?
3 Is the rope layer removed and cut against the metal armor?
4 Is the paper sheet removed against the metal armor?
5 Is the lead roughened-up?
6 Is the lead removed at a distance of 150mm of the outer sheet?
7 Is the semiconductor paper removed against the lead?
8 Is there a piece of tape installed on the brown paper to prevent that the brown paper totally will be removed?
9 Was the brown paper removed?
10 Was it checked that the grease is NOT REMOVED from the cable?
11 Are the ropes between the conductors removed?
12 Is the grease spread over the conductors?
13 Were the conductors spread open gently?
14 Is the temporary tape removed?
15 Were the conductors foreseen with the yellow ribbon with an overlap of 50%?
16 Is the grey field controlling tape installed in the heart of the cable and around the lead with an overlap of 50%
17 Is the yellow ribbon installed around the field controlling tape
18 Is the conductor insulation removed to install the compression joints?
19 Is the distance according to the used joints correct?
20 Are the rubber insulation pieces installed over the conductors of the paper-lead cables?
21 Is the copper of the conductors been cleaned?
D. CONNECTING THE CABLES
1 Are the right conductors connected with each other?
2 Are the compression joints crimped in the right way?
3 Are the rubber insulation pieces placed in the final position?
E. METAL SCREEN ASSEMBLY
1 Is the black meshtape installed on the XLPE-cable?
2 Is the black meshtape installed on the Paper-lead cable?
3 Is the distance between the 2 rolls of meshtape correct so that the ends of the red metal screen becomes in the
center of the 2 rolls?
4 Is the red metal screen installed and fastened with ty-raps?
5 Are the copper screens from the XLPE cable connected to the copper bar?
6 Is the metal mesh and alu-clamp installed on the paper-lead cable and connected to the copper bar?
7 Is the alu-clamp fastened with the one-times to use tool (delivered with the splice)
8 Are the bolts in the copper bar fastened?

NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
EL.161 rev.00
(sheet 3 of 3)
TAG No: TAG des:
CHECK RESULTS Date

F. SHELL PREPARATION
1 Were the rubber spacers placed on the metal screen?
2 Is the cable outer sheet roughened and cleaned were the shell touch the cable?
3 Is the water blocking tape installed?
4 Is the mousse-tape installed?
5 Are the ends of the shell, cut-out following the thickness of the cables
6 Are the ends of the shell complete and properly closed?
7 Were the two halves of the shell placed around the connection and secured using the metal clips adjacent to the
cable entries and the final strips along the flange?
8 Were the air vents at each end of the shell punctured?
G. FINISHING THE CONNECTION

1 MAKE SURE THAT THE CABLES AND THE JOINT ARE WELL SUPPORTED
2 Were the resin mixed according to the instructions and the compound poured in with CAUTION by one of the
filling holes?
3 Was it checked that no air entered the shell at the height of the center of the cable or in the middle of
the connection?
NOTE: Where there is more than one pack of resin required it is advisable to mix each additional pack and
pour out immediately as the previous one
4 After the shell was completely full, were the plastic lids put on?
H. BACK FILLING
1 Was attention paid to ensure that the shell had not moved, especially before the resin was poured?
2 Is the jointing area free from stones or other sharp objects?
3 Was the sleeve supplemented and dammed with earth before starting backfilling?
NOTES:

NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
EL.161 rev.00
SITE QUALITY
CONTROL
INSTRUMENT Pag/Pag. 1 din/from 6
INSTALLATION

INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION
AFWI DWG N°: Rev: C00 APPROVED FOR

CONSTRUCTION
BD0955A-07A2.11
DWG. REV. DATE
M.Rizzo M.Mandelli
SIGNATURE: A.
MANTOVANI
04
03
02
01
00 Issued for Comments 15/11/2017 M.Rizzo M.Mandelli
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
AMEC FOSTER
ITALIANA S.r.l. 7 3 8 7 8 1 X 0 0 - X 3 1 2 0 0
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 30 31 80
Via S. Caboto, 15
20094 Corsico
(Milano) ITALY
doc.
Instalatia/Plant PF155 – POLYFUEL 7 8 1 8 0 0 0 0 1 4
Site Quality Control – Instrument Installation

JOB SPEC 1BD0955A- 07A2.11
INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION Rev.: C00
CONTENTS
I. SCOPE
II. SUBJECT
III. DEFINITION
IV. REFERENCE
V. PROCEDURE
VI. RECORDS
VII. ATTACHMENTS
I. SCOPE

related and applicable documentation. The most stringent requirement
shall always apply.
II. SUBJECT
This document refers to the Quality Control activities relevant to instrument

installation.
III. DEFINITION
A. RESPONSIBILITIES



inspection safely.
for review.

responsibilities.

PLAN)

CONTRACT.


 Sequence number
IV. REFERENCE


V. PROCEDURE
relevant formats thirty days before the starting of construction works
or thirty days before the beginning of new activities. In any case no



inspection.


construction works.
C. MINIMUM DUTIES
Inspection and testing shall be carried out in accordance with

statutory requirements and as defined in specific project documents.
The degree of inspection, testing, calibration and acceptance shall

be as agreed before commencement.
VI. RECORDS


VII. ATTACHMENTS
Attachment 1: ITP - Inspection & Test Plan (07A2.11

Attachment 2: -01). Quality Forms (07A2.11 -02).
Attachment 1 (1BD0955A-07A2.11)
Inspection and Test Plan

07A2.11 – INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION
Contractor:
INSPECTION AND TEST
PLAN
Test/Inspectio Document Responsibility

n Description Referenc CC FW CL NB
e
CALIBRATION OF INSTRUMENT
Check Testing Testing Testing
Instrument Equipment/
1 for Suitability and Validity Calibration 07A2.1 Equipment/Calibration E R
of Calibration Certificates 4 Certificates
Smart Configuration
2 Configuration data Data sheet Configuration Data E
(as Applicable)
Calibration
of
Transmitters: Calibration is not
Apply Pressure of 0%,
25%, 50%, 75%, 100%, Data Sheet & required if the vendor's
3 Data sheet F 0401 E W
75%, 50%, 25%, and 0% Vendor calibration certificate
of the calibrated range Instructions available
of transmitter and verify
the output readings
Calibration of Switches:
Apply appropriate
signal Data Sheet &
4 to the switch and check Data sheet F 0402 E W
Vendor Instructions
the set and reset points
as
per data sheet
Involvement:
Organization:
W = WITNESS / Inspection. Measuring & testing of work, and comparing the results with the design requirements FW= Foster
H = HOLD POINT. A point beyond which a work shall not proceed without the approval of Contractor, FW, Owner/ Owner’s Wheeler CL= Owner
Contractor:

Description Reference CC FW CL NB
Orifice Plates:
Check plate thickness,
orifice diameter, outer Data Sheet &
diameter, material and Vendor Instructions
type of orifice plate as
per data sheet
Calibration of Control Data Sheet &
6 Valve as per FWI Data sheet F 0404 E W
procedure Vendor Instructions
MOV’s Checks:
Operate motor operated
valve manually by hand
wheel and check for Data Sheet &
correct operations of open Vendor Instructions
and close limit switches,
local indicator, etc. (as
applicable)
Safety Relief Valves: Data Sheet &

8 Data sheet FW 3424 / FW 3425 E W W
As per FWI Vendor Instructions
procedures
Involvement:
Organization:
W = WITNESS / Inspection. Measuring & testing of work, and comparing the results with the design requirements FW= Foster Wheeler
H = HOLD POINT. A point beyond which a work shall not proceed without the approval of Contractor, FW, Owner/ Owner’s Inspector CL= Owner
(TPI), NoBo NB= Laboratory / Notified Body
Contractor:

On/Off valve:
Apply appropriate voltage
to the solenoid valves, air Data Sheet & Vendor
9 supply to the actuator of Data sheet F 0407 E W
Instructions
the shutdown valves and
check operation of the
valve & limit switches
Thermocouple/RTD
Mount stem in Data Sheet & Vendor
temperature by dry block Instructions
and apply temperature
Indicators:
Apply input signal by
using mA source of span
0%, 25%, 50%, 75%, Data Sheet & Vendor
100%, 75%, 50%, 25%, Instructions
and 0% of the indicator
range and verify the
readings
Involvement:
Organization:
H = HOLD POINT. A point beyond which a work shall not proceed without the approval of Contractor, FW, Owner/ Owner’s CL= Owner
Inspector (TPI), NoBo NB= Laboratory / Notified Body
Contractor:

Converters:
Apply input signal by
using mA source of span
0%, 25%, 50%, 75%, Data Sheet & Vendor
100%, 75%, 50%, 25%, Instructions
and 0% of the indicator
range and verify the
readings
Involvement:
Organization:
Contractor:

INSTRUMENT CABLES INSTALLATION AND TESTING

Material Inspection:
1 Cables, cable trays/racks, Material Certificates Cable Data sheet Material certificate E R
conduits and accessories
Cable core/screen
Cable drum continuity and wires continuous and
2 FWI Job Spec F 0411, F 0412, F 0414 E R
IR test 500 V for 1 min,
Support, cable
3 trays/racks, conduits and Approved Drawings FWI Job Spec F 0424 E R
accessories installation
Cable laying,
4 Approved Drawings FWI Job Spec F 0415 E R
segregation, dressing and
tags
Cable Glanding, Approved Drawings
5 FWI Job Spec FW 3367 E R
Termination and (Wiring Diagram)
Ferruling
6 Grounding of trays/racks Approved Drawings FWI Job Spec F 0424 E R
Cable core/screen
Cables Continuity and IR wires continuous and
7 FWI Job Spec F 0411, F 0412, F 0414 E R
Test 500 V for 1 min,
greater/equal
Involvement:
Organization:
Contractor:

INSTRUMENT SYSTEM
Installation of control
panels/junction
boxes/analysers, Approved Layout /
1 accessories, Wiring Drawings FWI Job Spec F 0416, F417 E W
location, levelling, and Vendor
anchor bolt fixing, Instructions
tightening and
routing (if required)
Installation of
Instruments and
accessories: P&ID, Approved
Layout / Wiring
2 1. Location & FWI Job Spec F 0418 E R
Drawings and Vendor
Elevation
Instructions
Mounting
Height
2. Direction of
Installation of Control P&ID, Approved
Valves / On-Off Valves / Layout / Wiring
3 MOV’s and accessories: FWI Job Spec F 0419 E W
Drawings and Vendor
1. Check direction Instructions
P&ID, Approved
Installation of
4 Layout Drawings and FWI Job Spec FW 3365 E R
impulse tubing and
Vendor Instructions
supports
Involvement:
Organization:

Contractor:
INSPECTION AND TEST
PLAN
INSTRUMENT SYSTEM
5 Pressure Test of P&ID, 1.5 Times
impulse
tubing FWI Job Spec FW 3365 E R
Design Pressure
Installation
Pneumatic Piping /
Tubing and supports:
1. Material Type
& size
P&ID, Approved
6 2. Route and Level
Check Layout Drawings and FWI Job Spec FW 3365 E
3. Slope of Vendor Instructions W
tubing/piping
4. Use of correct
compound for
threaded joints
In the Module yard

Leak Test of Pneumatic service test will be
7
P&ID, Service Test FWI Job Spec FW 3365 E R replaced by pressure test
Piping / Tubing
at operating pressure
P&ID, Approved
Layout / Wiring /
8 Loop Check FWI Job Spec F 0422 E H H
Loop Drawings and
Vendor Instruction
Involvement:
Organization:
W = WITNESS / Inspection. Measuring & testing of work, and comparing the results with the design requirements FW= Foster
H = HOLD POINT. A point beyond which a work shall not proceed without the approval of Contractor, FW, Owner/ Owner’s Wheeler CL= Owner
Attachment 2
Job Spec. 1BD0955A-07A2.11 INDEX

F0401 Calibration record for transmitter
F0402 Calibration record for switch
F0403 Check Report for Orefice Plate
F0404 Calibration Record for Control Valve
F0405 Calibration Record for Motor Operated Valve
F0407 Calibration Record for on/off valve
F0408 Calibration Record for Thermocouple/RTD
F0409 Calibration Record for indicator
F0410 Calibration Record for converter
F0411 Instrument Cable test report multi pair/triple
F0412 Instrument cable test report single pair/triple cable
F0414 Instrument cable test report LV power cable
F0415 Inspection Checklist Instrument Cable Laying
F0416 Inspection Checklist Control Panel/LCP/Analyzer Installation
F0417 Inspection Check List Junction Box Installation
F0418 Inspection Check List Instrument Installation
F0419 Inspection Check List installation of control valve ON/OFF valve/MOV
F0422 Inspection Instrument loop check
F0424 Cable Ladder/Tray Test Certificate
FW 3365 Instrument tubing inspection and test report
FW 3367 Instrument cable installation inspection report
FW 3424 Safety relief valve test report
FW 3425 Safety relief valve installation report
CALIBRATION
RECORD FOR
Contract: TRANSMITTER Contractor
Unit: Module:
SUBTOS: TAG:
TOS: SERIAL NO.:
MANUFACTURER: MODEL NO.:
DESCRIPTION: INPUT RANGE:
PROC CONNECTION: OUTPUT RANGE:
ELEC. CONNECTION: INST. DATA SHEET NO.:
PNEU. CONNECTION: DATE:
BEFORE CALIBRATION AFTER CALIBRATION
INPUT OUTPUT % ERROR INPUT OUTPUT % ERROR
0% 0%
25% 25%
50% 50%
75% 75%
100% 100%
75% 75%
50% 50%
25% 25%
0% 0%
TEST EQUIPMENT USED

SL. NO. DESCRIPTION SERIAL NO. CAL. DATE DUE. DATE
1
4
CALIBRATED BY:
Remarks: □ ACCEPTED □ REJECTED

Notes:____________________________________________________________________________
_
ACCEPTANCE CONTRACTOR FWI CLIENT
NAME :
SIGNATURE :
DATE :
F0401 rev. 00
CALIBRATION
RECORD FOR
Contract: SWITCH Contractor
Unit: Module:
SUBTOS: TAG:
TOS: SERIAL NO.:

MANUFACTURER: MODEL NO.;
PROC. CONNECTION: DIFFERENTIAL;
ELEC. CONNECTION: SET POINT:
DATE: INST. DATA SHEET NO.:
SWITCH SET POINT RESET POINT SWITCH SET POINT RESET POINT
HIGH HIGH
HIGH - HIGH HIGH - HIGH
LOW LOW
LOW - LOW LOW - LOW
TEST EQUIPMENT USED

SL. NO. DESCRIPTION SERIAL NO. CAL. DATE DUE DATE
1
3
CALIBRATED BY:

Notes:_____________________________________________________________________________

NAME :
SIGNATURE :
DATE :
F0402 rev. 00
CHECK REPORT FOR ORIFICE PLATE
Unit: Module:
SUBTOS: TAG:
TOS: DATE: DESCRIPTION:
DIMENSION AS PER DOCUMENT DIMENSION AS MEASURED

SL. NO. TAG NO
BORE OUTER BORE OUTER
DIA. (d) DIA. (D) THICKNESS mm DIA. (d) DIA. (D) THICKNESS mm
mm mm mm mm
1
TEST EQUIPMENT USED

1
CHECKED BY:

Notes:_____________________________________________________________________________

NAME :
SIGNATURE :
DATE :
F0403 rev. 00
CALIBRATION RECORD FOR
CONTROL VALVE
Unit: Module:
SUBTOS: TAG:
TOS:
DATE: SERIAL NO.:

BODY SIZE: AIR SUPPLY:
ELEC CONNECTION: BENCH SET:
PNEU. CONNECTION: SOV FIXED:
I/P CONVERTER INST. DATA SHEET NO.:
INPUT % OF OPENING INPUT % OF OPENING
4mA 4mA
8mA 8mA
12mA 12mA
16mA 16mA
20mA 20mA
16mA 16mA
12mA 12mA
8mA 8mA
4mA 4mA
LIMIT SWITCHES – OPEN AT %OF OPENING CLOSE AT % OF OPENING

AIR FAIL ACTION - START OPENING AT: START CLOSING AT:
TEST EQUIPMENT USED
1
3
CALIBRATED BY:

Notes:_____________________________________________________________________________

NAME :
SIGNATURE :
DATE :
F0404 rev. 00
CALIBRATION RECORD
FOR MOTOR OPERATED
Contract: VALVE Contractor
Unit: Module:
SUBTOS: TAG:
TOS: DATE:
SERIAL NO.:
DESCRIPTION: LOCATION:
MAIN SUPPLY VOLTAGE: INST. DATA SHEET NO.:
CONTROL VOLTAGE:
SL. NO. DESCRIPTION OBSERVATION REMARKS
1 NAME PLATE RATING/SPECIFICATION
2 AREA CLASSIFICATION
3 ENCLOSURE PROTECTION, SEALS, ETC.
4 ASSEMBLY AND BOLTING
5 OPEN/CLOSE LIMIT SWITCHES
6 TORQUE LIMIT SWITCHES
7 OPEN/CLOSE RUNNING
8 LOCAL INDICATOR
POSITION TRANSMITTER OUTPUT - (OPTIONAL)
VALVE POSITION OUTPUT % ERROR REMARKS
0%
25%
50%
15%
100%
75%
50%
25%
0%
TEST
INSULATION RESISTANCE MEASUREMENT MAIN CIRCUIT MΩ
CONTROL CIRCUIT MΩ
MEASURED CURRENT CLOSING: AMPS TRAVEL TIME CLOSING: SEC.
OPENING: AMPS OPENING: SEC.
TEST EQUIPMENT USED
1
2
3
Notes:_____________________________________________________________________________

NAME :
SIGNATURE :
DATE :
F0405 rev. 00
ON/OFF VALVE
Unit: Module:
SUBTOS: TAG:
TOS: SERIAL NO.:
BODY SIZE: AIR SUPPLY:
ELEC. CONNECTION: SOV FIXED:
PNEU. CONNECTION: INST. DATA SHEET NO.:
Sov VALVE LOCAL
LIMIT SWITCHES
SL. NO. VOLTA AIR SUPPLY POSITION INDICATION REMARKS
GE
OPEN CLOSE OPEN CLOSE OPEN CLOSE
1
LOCAL TRIP/RESET PUSH BUTTON FITTED □ YES □ NO
TIME TAKEN TO FULL OPENING/CLOSING OF THE VALVE SECONDS
TIME TAKEN TO REACH FAIL SAFE POSITION ON AIR SUPPLY FAILURE SECONDS
TIME TAKEN TO REACH FALL SAFE POSITION ON ELECTRICAL SUPPLV FAILURE SECONDS
FAIL POSITION STATE □ OPEN □ CLOSE □ LAST POS.

TEST EQUIPMENT USED
1
CALIBRATED BY:

Notes:_____________________________________________________________________________

NAME :
SIGNATURE :
DATE :
F0407rev. 01
THERMOCOUPLE / RTD
Unit: Module:
SUBTOS: TAG:
TOS DATE:
TYPE: □ THERMOCOUPLE □ RTD SERIAL NO.:

DESCRIPTION: TRANSMITTER RANGE:
PROC. CONNECTION: INST. DATA SHEET NO.:
ELEC. CONNECTION:
INPUT OUTPUT TEMP. AS PER % OF ERROR REMARKS
% OF INPUT TEMPERATURE
0%
25%
50%
75%
100%
75%
50%
25%
0%
TEST EQUIPMENT USED
SL. .NO. DESCRIPTION SERIAL NO. CAL- DATE DUE DATE
1
4
CALIBRATED BY:

Notes:_____________________________________________________________________________

NAME :
SIGNATURE :
DATE :
F0408 rev. 00
INDICATOR
Unit: Module:
SUBTOS: TAG:
TOS: DATE:
SERIAL NO.:
MANUFACTURER; MODEL NO.:
PROC. CONNECTION: OUTPUT RANGE:
PNEU. CONNECTION:
0% 0%
25% 25%
50% 50%
75% 75%
100% 100%
75% 75%
50% 50%
25% 25%
0% 0%
TEST EQUIPMENT USED
1
3
CALIBRATED BY:

Notes:_____________________________________________________________________________

NAME :
SIGNATURE :
DATE :
F0409 rev. 00
CONVERTER
Unit: Module:
SUBTOS: TAG:
TOS: DATE:
SERIAL NO.:
MANUFACTURER; MODEL NO.:
PROC. CONNECTION: OUTPUT RANGE:
PNEU. CONNECTION:
0% 0%
25% 25%
50% 50%
75% 75%
100% 100%
75% 75%
50% 50%
25% 25%
0% 0%
TEST EQUIPMENT USED
1
3
CALIBRATED BY:

Notes:_____________________________________________________________________________

NAME :
SIGNATURE :
DATE :
F0410 rev. 00
Pair No./ Triple
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
TAG:
From:
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
DWG:
DATE:
NAME:
Continuity of
Test Voltage:
FWI Contract
SIGNATURE:
each core of the
Instrument used
ACCEPTANCE
pair / triple
Triad) IR values in
M.Ohms (Pair /
Triad to Pair /
Type
Armour/Shield) IR values in
M.Ohms (Pair t/
FWI
Triple to
TOS:
Module:
(Shield to IR values in
Cable Size:
Armour) M.Ohms
DESCRITPION:
Serial No.
Pair No.
PAIR/TRIPLE
To:
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
REPORT MULTI
Continuity of
INSTRUMENT CABLE TEST
each core of the
Manufacturer
pair / triple
SUBCONTRACTOR
Triad) IR values in
SUBTOS:
Unit:
M.Ohms (Pair /
Triad to Pair /
No. of Core:
Armour/Shield) IR values in
Calibration date
M.Ohms (Pair t/
Triple to
Contractor
CLIENT
IR values in
M.Ohms (Shield
to
Due date
F0411 rev. 01
REPORT SINGLE PAIR/TRIPLE
CABLE Contractor
Contract: UNIT: MODULE:
Ref. Drg.: TOS: SUBTOS:
TAG: DESCRIPTION:
Test Voltage: Cable Size: No. of Core:
From: To:
IR values in M.Ohms IR values in M.Ohms (Core to

Core No. Continuity of each core
(Core to Core) Armour/Shield)
3
Instrument used Type Serial No. Manufacturer Calibration date Due date
Remarks:
ACCEPTANCE FWI SUBCONTRACTOR CLIENT

NAME :
SIGNATURE ;
DATE:
F0412 rev. 01
REPORT LV POWER
Contract: CABLE Contractor
Unit: Module:
SUBTOS: TAG:
TOS: Ref. Drg. & Rev.:
Test Voltage: DESCRIPTION: Date:
Cable TAG: Cable TAG:
Cable Size & DESCRIPTION: Cable Size & DESCRIPTION:
From: To:
IR values in M.Ohms (Core to Core) IR values in M.Ohms (Core

Core Core Continuity
- Minimum Value to Armour/E) -Minimum
Value
R
Y
B
N
E
Remarks:
NAME:
SIGNATURE :
DATE:
F0414 rev. 01
INSPECTION CHECKLIST
INSTRUMENT CABLE
Contract: LAYING Contractor
Unit: Module:
SUBTOS: TAG:
TOS: Date:
Ref. Dwg. & Rev.:
DESCRIPTION:
Inspections
Item
Description of Activity Completion Date Acc./Rej./NA
no.
1 Cable trays / racks check for quality and conformance to specification
Check route of sub-tray, conduits / conduit extension of tray and

2
sizes to specification
3 Check all supports are secure
4 All fabrication cuts painted to specification
5 Changes in route from drawing updated (as-built attached)
6 Check grounding connection and continuity to ground
Cables laid on tray / rack are segregated, dressed, tied / clamped

7
at correct interval to specification
8 Check cable tags correct as per cable schedule
9 Cable trays / racks outdoor cover installed -
10 Entry / exit sealed made good
Remarks
NAME:
SIGNATURE :
DATE:
F0415 rev. 00
CONTROL
PANEL/LCP/ANALYSER
INSTALLATION
Unit: Module:
SUBTOS: TAG:
TOS: Date:
Ref. Dwg. & Rev.:
DESCRIPTION:
Inspections
Item
Activity Description Completion Date Accepted NA
No.
1 Panel dimension and alignment verified correct as per drawing.
2 Checked location, accessibility and orientation as per drawing.
3 Checked supports/anchoring strong and rigid.
4 Cabinet locking system correct
5 Incoming and outgoing cable size and type verified as per cable schedule.
6 Cabling, and cable entry is correct, unused entries plugged/sealed tight.
Checked cable glands size and accessories as per schedule, correct
7
and tight.
Termination ferruling and dressing are correct as-per drawing and
8
neatly done.
Screen/drain wires provided with heat shrinkable sleeves and
9
connection verified.
10 Segregation of intrinsic and non-instrinsic wiring / terminations
11 Cable correctly installed and supported.
12 Cable tag no. verified.
13 Internal components securely fitted, Tagging of all parts correct.
14 Cabinet nameplate and labels verified.
15 Earthing bars and connections correct.
16 Earthing of doors correct.
17 Earthing of mounted / bolted parts correct.
18 Spare provision to specification.
19 Panel accessories complete and material to specification.
20 Ventilation openings / filters correct.
21 Coding pin on plug / socket correct.
22 Megger / continuity test results satisfactory
23 Area classification of instrument verified.
Remarks:

NAME:
SIGNATURE :
DATE:
F0416 rev. 01
INSPECTION CHECK LIST JUNCTION BOX
INSTALLATION
Unit: Module:
SUBTOS: TAG:
TOS: Date:
Ref. Dwg. & Rev.:
DESCRIPTION:
Inspections
Item
No.
Junction Box dimension and accessories verified correct and
1
complete as per drawing.
2 Checked location, accessibility and orientation as per drawing.
3 Checked supports/anchoring strong and rigid.
Incoming and outgoing cable size and type verified as per

4
cable schedule.
Checked cable glands size and accessories as per schedule, correct
5
and tight,
Termination ferruling and dressing are correct as per drawing and
6
neatly done.
7 Cable tag no. verified.
8 Unused entries plugged/sealed tight.
9 Grounding complete and tight.
10 Spare provision to specification.
11 Nameplate and tag wires for JB verified.
Remarks:

NAME:
SIGNATURE :
DATE:
F0417 rev. 01
INSTRUMENT
Contract: INSTALLATION Contractor
Unit: Module:
SUBTOS: TAG:
TOS: Process Hook-up Drwg. No. & Rev.:
DESCRIPTION: Date:
P&IDNo.&Rev.:
Equipment / Line No.:
Inspections
Item
No.
1 Instrument location as per drawing and P & ID.
2 Checked instrument accessibility and orientation.
3 Instrument tag no., calibration sticker and tag plate verified.
4 Instrument support strong, rigid and free from vibration.
6 Process hook up installation, routing verified and hydro-tested.
Cable gland, termination, ferrule and connection polarity correct

7
& tight.
8 Cable size and tag no. verified.
11 Instrument accessories complete and material to specification.
12 Sunshade provided, as required.
Remarks:
ACCEPTANCE CONTRACTOR I FW CLIENT

NAME:
SIGNATURE:
DATE:
F0418 rev. 00
INSTALLATION OF CONTROL
VALVE ON/OFF VALVE/MOV
Unit: Module:
SUBTOS: TAG:
TOS: Date:
DESCRIPTION:
P & ID No, & Rev.: Pnuematic Hook-up Dwg. No.:
Equipment/ Line No.:
Inspections
Ite
m
No.
1 Valve location as per drawing and P & ID.
2 Checked accessibility and orientation of valve accessories.
3 Valve tag no., calibration sticker and tag plate verified.
4 Fail safe position provided, to specification.
5 Area classification of valve electrical accessories verified.
6 Instrument accessories complete and material to

specification.
Pnuematic hook up installation, Touting verified and
7
leak- tested.
Cable gland, termination, ferrule and connection polarity
8
correct
& tight.
9 Cable size and tag no. verified.

Checked installation of HS/Local Control Station, supports
12
and fabrication cuts painted.
Remarks:

NAME:
SIGNATURE:
DATE:
F0419 rev. 00
INSPECTION INSTRUMENT LOOP CHECK
Unit: Module:
SUBTOS: TAG:
TOS: Date:
Ref. Dwg. & Rev.:
DESCRIPTION:
Inspections
Item
Activity Description Yes No NA Date
No.
1 Identification tag of all components
2 Loop compenent energized
3 Analog input/output signal
4 Digital input/output
5 Input loop components working
6 Output loop components working
7 Pneumatic input/output signal
8 Accessories working
9 Final element action
10 System ready to work
11 Range high and low are matching field/console/documentation
12 Fail action primary element/transmitter
13 Alarms are working properly
14 Inpulse tubing pressure test done
Rising % Falling %
LOOPS
0 50 100 50 0
Field to Console (AI)
Console Reading
DCS O/P to CV’S (AO)
Open Close
Digital Input (DO)
Digital Output (DI)
Remarks:

NAME:
SIGNATURE :
DATE:
F0422 rev. 03
CABLE
LADDER/TRAY TEST
Contract: CERTIFICATE Contractor
Unit: Module:
SUBTOS: TAG:
TOS DATE:
DESCRIPTION: DWG:_ Rev:_
1 Layout DWGs Number

Check ladder/tray/route, is in
2
accordance with design drawings
Check ladder supports are in

3
accordance with design drawings
Check ladder/tray material meets

4
specification
Check ladder/tray is not hazard to

5 personnel, block access ways, prevent
removal of equipment
Check that rack/tray cut edges are de-

6
burred and smooth
Check insulating spacers are fitted

between rack and steel supports
7
(spacers only required where
unprotected dissimilar metals touch)
Check bonding/earthing of rack

8 ……………………………………(Max 0.1to adjacent structure)
conforms to earthing philosophy
9 Check protective kicks plates installed

Check rack identification is correct to
10
specification
11 Test equipment calibration details
Remarks:

NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
F0424 rev. 00
INSTRUMENT TUBING INSPECTION
& TEST REPORT
SYSTEM NO: CONTRACTOR:

LOOP NO: INST TAG NO:
MODULE NO: UNIT :
Notes: 1) All fields are to be completed as appropriate. Any non applicable fields shall state "NA".
1.0 GENERAL DATA: (from drawings, specification and equipment records etc.)
Type: Tube Size: Service (liquid/gas/inst
air): Piping Isometric Dwg No / Vessel Sketch:
Hook-up Dwg No: Data Sheet:
Location Dwg No: P&ID No:
2.0 INSPECTION: YES N/A NO
2.1 Confirm process connection point is in accordance with the P&ID.
2.2 Confirm the installation is in accordance with design hook up, (slope, seal pots, etc).
2.3 For cryogenic services, confirm tubing insulation has been installed.
2.4 Confirm HP / LP connections are correct.
2.5 Confirm tubing size is suitable for application.
2.6 Confirm transmitter manifold has been installed for the correct service (e.g. vent for
liquid service and drain for gas service).
2.7 Tubing is supported, protected and secured using non conductive tubing clamps.
2.8 Tube fittings & thread engagement correct and no mismatchings found.
2.9 Tubing has been cut using approved techniques (e.g. not cut with
grinder), is clean and deburred with no welding spots.
2.10 Tubing identification installed.
2.11 End caps and bug screens installed where required.
2.12 Drain/vent points installed at high/low points.
2.13 Confirm whether installation is wet leg and labelled appropriately.
2.14 Tubing runs and number of joint connections are not excessive.
2.15 Where couplings are fitted sufficient access has been allowed for maintenance.
2.16 All air regulation equipment installed.
2.17 Instrument air functional.
2.18 Vents / drains directed to safe location.
3.0 FUNCTIONAL TEST
Test Equip: Serial No: Cal Cert. Exp Date:
Test Equip: Serial No: Cal Cert. Exp Date:
Test / Record Test Result Comments
Record Test Pressure Test Medium
Record Test Pressure
Record Test
Duration Record Test
Result
Remarks* / No Remarks* (*Delete as applicable)
COMPLETED Contractor FWI Owner

BY COMPANY
SIGNATURE
NAME
DATE
FWI 3365 Rev 0
INSTRUMENT CABLE INSTALLATION
INSPECTION REPORT
Contract UNIT No:

TOS: Sub TOS: CONTRACTOR:
LOOP NO: CABLE NO:
INST TAG NO: J.B. NO* / EQUIP NO*:
Notes: 1) All fields are to be completed as appropriate. Any non applicable fields shall state "NA".
1.0 GENERAL DATA: (from drawings, specification and equipment records

etc.) From: To:
Type: No of Cores: Size:(mm²): Insulation Grade: V
System Voltage: (V) Jointed: (Yes/No)
Duty: Comm's: Power: Control: Other(specify):
2.0 INSPECTION: YE N/A NO
2.1 Confirm cable size, type, rating, and start and finish points are S
correct according to cable schedule.
2.2 Confirm cable numbering and ferrules are correct and the correct crimping
tool has been used.
2.3 Confirm cable installation and containment system is satisfactory, and
cable is not damaged over the entire length.
2.4 Confirm all cores are terminated.
2.5 Confirm that cable minimum bending radius has not been exceeded.
2.6 Confirm all cable glands are complete, tight and suitable for area
classification.
2.7 Confirm the cable was installed with end caps fitted, and
manufacturers pulling tension has not been exceeded.
2.8 Confirm correct cable, cable spacing, and fixings used (ties, trefoil clamps,
and banding) are at the correct spacing.
2.9 Confirm cable core phasing / polarities are correct.
2.10 Confirm armouring and screen earthing are correct.
2.11 Confirm cable is available for test.
2.12 Confirm cable tags are installed at the correct intervals, in
accordance with project standards.
COMPLETED Contractor FWI Owner

BY COMPANY
SIGNATURE
NAME
DATE
FWUK OU-3367 Rev 0
SAFETY RELIEF VALVE TEST REPORT
FWI Contract No

TEST PACK NO: MAIN P&ID:
RV No: MODULE No:
1.0 VALVE DATA
Manufacturer: …………………………………………………………… Req. No: ………………………………….
Type: …………………………… Model No: …………...………….. Serial No: ………………………………..
Inlet size: ……………………… Outlet size: ……………………… Orifice No: ……………………………….
2.0 OPERATING DATA

Set Pressure: ………………………………………………Back Pressure: ………………………………………………
Spring Set Pressure: ………………………………………Operating Temperature: …………………………………….
3.1 PHYSICAL CHECK YES N/A NO

1. Body material correct
2. Connections correct
3. Spring material correct
4. Nozzle material correct
5. Disc material correct
6. Bellows material correct
8. Temporary items removed (e.g. hydroplugs)
7. Screwed cap
9. Test gag
10. Locking device
11. Lifting lever: Open Packed
4.0 TEST RESULTS
Units Specified Value Test Result Remarks
Cold spring set pressure
Reseat pressure
Seat leakage rate
[ANSIrB147.1
Rema (APIRemar
ks* / No 527)] ks* (*Delete as applicable)
COMPLETED BY Contractor FWI Owner

COMPANY
SIGNATURE
NAME
DATE
FWI-3424 Rev 1.xlsx
SAFETY RELIEF VALVE - INSTALLATION REPORT
FWI Contract No

TEST PACK NO: MAIN P&ID:
RV No: MODULE:
1.0 GENERAL DATA

Manufacturer: …………………………………………………………… Req. No: ………………………………….
Type: …………………………… Model No: …………...………….. Serial No: ………………………………..
Inlet size: ……………………… Outlet size: ……………………… Orifice No: ……………………………….
2.1 INSTALLATION BEFORE TESTING YES N/A NO

1. Installation complete to allow pipework completion
2. Are the safety block valves oriented with stems horizontal or downwards
3. Do atmospheric safety valves discharge stacks have drain holes
4. Where snuffing steam is required is the manifold located in a safe location
5. Is the safety valve discharge piping sloped away from the safety valve
6. Are bleeders installed where required
Mechanical Contractor: …………………………………………………………… Date: ………………………….
FWI: ………………………………………………………………………… Date: ………………………….
3.1 TESTING BY
1. Set pressure from flow sheet at ………….…..…… bar
2. Set pressure at test ……………......……………… bar
3. Signature: ……………………………………………………………………… Date: ………………………….
4.1 REINSTATEMENT YES N/A NO

1. Are the valves painted per requirements
2. Correct bolts
3. Correct gasket
4. Label fitted
5. Temporary items removed (e.g. hydroplugs)
6. Valve is reinstated in correct location after shop test and is ready for operational use
Commissioning Group: ……………………………………………………... Date: ………………………….
Operations Group: ……………………………………………………... Date: ………………………….
COMPLETED BY Contractor FWI Owner

COMPANY
SIGNATURE
NAME
DATE
FWI-3425 Rev 1.xlsx
SITE QUALITY
CONTROL
INSULATION Pag/Pag. 1 din/from 6
WORK

INSULATION WORK
AFWI DWG N°: Rev: C00 APPROVED FOR CONSTRUCTION

BD0955A-07A2.12 DWG. REV. DATE
M. Rizzo M.Mandelli SIGNATURE: A. MANTOVANI
04
03
02
01
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
AMEC FOSTER
ITALIANA S.r.l. 7 3 8 7 8 1 X 0 0 - X 3 1 3 0 0
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 30 31 80
Via S. Caboto, 15
20094 Corsico
(Milano) ITALY
doc.

INSULATION WORK
BD0955A-07A2.12

INSULATION WORK Rev.: C00
CONTENTS
I. SCOPE
II. SUBJECT
III. DEFINITION
IV. REFERENCE
V. PROCEDURE
VI. RECORDS
VII. ATTACHMENTS
BD0955A-07A2.12

I. SCOPE

This document shall be read in conjunction with the CONTRACT and all
other related and applicable documentation. The most stringent
requirement shall always apply.
II. SUBJECT
This document refers to the Quality Control activities relevant to

Insulation Works.
III. DEFINITION
A. RESPONSIBILITIES



inspection safely.
for review.

responsibilities.
BD0955A-07A2.12

The Quality Control Plan is a CONTRACTOR document addressing all

quality control requirements detailed in this Job Specification and
other applicable documents included in the CONTRACT.
requirement included in this Job Specification, in Subcontract
Requisition and relevant attachment and/or added as and when
required during the execution of the CONTRACT including vendor
documents and CONTRACTOR supplied material and equipment.


 Sequence number
IV. REFERENCE


the above. It is however, CONTRACTOR’s responsibility to take them into
duly consideration as applicable along with contractual requirements
where the most stringent ones shall always apply.
CONTRACTOR shall not deviate from Contractual requirements unless

formal approval is obtained from EMPLOYER.
BD0955A-07A2.12

V. PROCEDURE
thirty days before the beginning of new activities. In any case, no


Control Plans along with relevant formats as/if necessary to keep
them current against the actual scope of work.

inspection.


construction works.
BD0955A-07A2.12

C. MINIMUM DUTIES
Insulation shall be in accordance with design requirements, project

drawings and specifications.
The work shall be executed in accordance with the Project

specification, standard or code.
All the activities shall be jointly managed between Contractor and

EMPLOYER supervisor. Any deviation from the Project specification,
Code, Standards shall be discussed and approved by EMPLOYER and
then the Client.
VI. RECORDS

through scope of work execution and until turn over to EMPLOYER.

VII. ATTACHMENTS
Attachment 1: ITP - Inspection and Test Plan (07B2.12-

01). Attachment 2: Quality Forms (07B2.12-02).
Discipline INSULATION WORK ITP: IS-100 CON. STD.: 07A2.12

Description Referenc CC AFW CL NB
e
INSULATION WORK
Material inspection: Material
1 Job Specification Job Specification Visual RA RA
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS)
2 Surface Piping inspection 07A2.12 07A2.12 IS.001 E RI
3 Check thickness of paintings 82A1, 07A2.12 82A1, 07A2.12 IS.001 E RI
4 Check thickness of Insulation 82A1, 07A2.12 82A1, 07A2.12 IS.001 E RI
5 Line Labelling 82A1, 07A2.12 82A1, 07A2.12 IS.001 E RI

H = HOLD POINT. A point beyond which a work shall not proceed without the approval of Contractor,AFW, Owner/ Owner’s
INSULATION WORK COMPLETION REPORT

IS.001/
AMECFW Contract:
Circiut/System: ITP Code: REPORT N. IS.001/_ Page: of
Equipment Insulation Insulation Supports Aluminium Seal Insulat. ACCEPTANCE
Line Nr type thickness layer valves Contractor FWI
REMARKS: Final Acceptance
CONTRACTOR AMECFW CLIENT
Name: Name: Name:
Signature: Signature: Signature:
Date: Date: Date:

CBD CONTROL / Designer Checked
Painting works Date

Painting works

CONSTRUCTION
BD0955A-07A2.13
DWG. REV. DATE
M.Rizzo M.Mandelli
SIGNATURE: A.
MANTOVANI
04
03
02
01
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
AMEC FOSTER
ITALIANA S.r.l. 7 3 8 7 8 1 X 0 0 - X 3 1 4 0 0
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 30 31 80
Via S. Caboto, 15
20094 Corsico
(Milano) ITALY
doc.
SITE QUALITY CONTROL – Painting works
PAGE : 2 of 5
REV. : C00
DATE : 10 November 2017
CONTENTS
1 - REFERENCE
3 - RECORDS
4 - ATTACHMENTS
AUTHORISATION.
PAGE : 3 of 5
REV. : C00
1. REFERENCE
- 1BD0874Z-07A2.00 Construction QC requirements.
- All applicable Standards, Codes, Specifications listed in

the Subcontract Requisition, which is part of the CONTRACT.
Required inspections and tests by Local Regulation may not be
included in this document. However, CONTRACTOR shall
strictly adhere to Local Regulation and shall report the execution
to EMPLOYER.
Equivalent and applicable Project codes rise above Local
Regulation if the second are less stringent. In case of conflict
between Local Regulation and Project Code, the most stringent
shall apply.
2. MINIMUM DUTIES
– In order to reach the requested quality of works at lower

cost items the CONTRACTOR will paint item before their
installation as much as possible.
– The finishing coat will be applied in field.
– Piping supports must be painted before the piping is installed.
– All the items that will be inaccessible after their erection must
be painted before installation.
CONTRACTOR shall mask or suitably protect the following item

during the application of paint products:
– Equipment Nameplates.
– Valve stems.
– Load scales on Spring Hangers and supports.
– Pump shafts and other machined surfaces.
– Gauge glasses, thermometers, pressure gauges etc.
– Welds areas on pressure piping systems (until the Pressure Test
Execution).
AUTHORISATION.
PAGE : 4 of 5
REV. : C00
– Material Heat Numbers on Pressure Piping Systems, (until the

Pressure Test Execution if not previously released for painting by
the project parties).
CONTRACTOR shall execute the Inspection/Test as indicated into the

approved ITP.
Preparation and application
CONTRACTOR shall:
– Sandblast the surfaces to be painted (as per AmecFW &

OMV Petrom Job Spec.) in order to obtain an uniform white
metallic colour and slightly rough for a primer satisfactory grip.
– Employ skilled labour in painting works, since best protection
is achieved by uniform coating thickness. Painting work
personnel must be familiar with product information cards in
order to know mixing ratios, dilution and utilization times.
– Use solvents specified by the manufacturers.
3. RECORDS

CONTRACTOR shall issue testing and inspections documentation in

accordance with the approved QC forms.
AUTHORISATION.
PAGE : 5 of 5
REV. : C00
4. ATTACHMENTS
PAINTING WORKS
QC forms:
PT.001 Painting Completion Report
AUTHORISATION.
Discipline PAINTING WORKS ITP: PT-100 CON. STD.: 07A2.13

PAINTING WORKS
Material inspection: Material
1 07A2.13 07A2.13 Visual R R
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS)
2 Check Surface Preparation 83A1, 07A2.13 83A1, 07A2.13 PT.001 E RI

83A1,
3 Check Painting/Coating Cycle 83A1 Line List PT.001 E RI
Isometric
Check
4 83A1 83A1 PT.001 E RI
Painting/Coating
5 Color Check 83A1 83A1 PT.001 E RI
ASTM standards
6 Adhesion Test 83A1 PT.001 E RI
(ASTM D3359 – 08)

R = REVIEW. Verification and confirmation that the design requirements have been met AFW= Amec Foster Wheeler
PAINTING COMPLETION CERTIFICATE

PT.001/
AMECFW Contract:
Circuit/System: ITP Code: REPORT N. PT.001/ Page: of
Equipment/ Surface Painting Painting Painting Finish Adhesion Color ACCEPTANCE
Line Nr Preparation System Thickness coats Color Test Coding Subcontractor «branch»
REMARKS: Final Acceptance
SUBCONTRACTOR AMECFW CLIENT
Name: Name: Name:
Signature: Signature: Signature:
Date: Date: Date:

30/10/17 A. F.
Lomazzi Carnevale
CONTROL Designer
OF MEASURING
& TESTING Pag/Pag. 1 din/from _7
EQUIPMENT
CBD

OF MEASURING & TESTING EQUIPMENT

CONSTRUCTION
A. Lomazzi F. Carnevale DWG. REV. DATE
SIGNATURE: A.
Prepared Verified Approved MANTOVANI
04
03
02
01
00 Issued for Comments 30/10/2017 A. Lomazzi F. Carnevale
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
AMEC FOSTER
WHEELER Nr. proiect / Project no. Nr. desen / Drawing Rev/Rev
ITALIANA S.r.l. 7 3 8 7 8 1 X 0 0 - X 3 1 5 0 0
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 30 31 80
Via S. Caboto, 15
20094 Corsico
(Milano) ITALY
doc.
SITE QUALITY
CONTROL OF
MEASURING
& TESTING EQUIPMENT
OF MEASURING Rev.: C00
& TESTING EQUIPMENT Date: 30 Oct. 2017
CONTENTS
I. SCOPE
II. SUBJECT
III. DEFINITION
IV. REFERENCE
V. PROCEDURE
VI. RECORDS
VII. ATTACHMENTS
I. SCOPE
This document provides the guidance and minimum requirements for

inspecting, checking and testing activities related to the subject of this
document.
This document shall be read in conjunction with other applicable

documentation included in the CONTRACT.
II. SUBJECT
This document refers to the control of measuring & testing

equipment.
III. DEFINITION
CONTRACTOR shall execute and control HIS activities included in the scope
of the CONTRACT in accordance with CONTRACTOR Quality Control Plan
and any other documented procedure deemed necessary for the execution.
Amec Foster Wheeler or others parties’ signature on inspection, examination

and test reports does not release the CONTRACTOR from his responsibilities.
IV. REFERENCE
listed in the Contract Requisition, which is part of the CONTRACT.

this document. However CONTRACTOR shall strictly adhere to Local
Regulation and shall report the execution to Amec Foster Wheeler.
Project Code, the most stringent one shall apply.
CONTRACTOR shall timely report any deviation from Project requirements

and no deviation shall be implemented without prior approval from Amec
Foster Wheeler.
WI-AA-QAS003 Test Instrument Calibration Certificate Verification

V. PROCEDURE
MINIMUM DUTIES
Test equipment used by CONTRACTORS shall be suitable to carry out

all measurements and test prescribed in Contract Documents.
Test Equipment shall be within calibration tolerances with necessary

current certification traceable to National or International standards to
be capable of the accuracy and precision necessary.
CONTRACTOR shall establish the extent and frequency of such

calibration checks shall maintain records as evidence of control and
shall guarantee the traceability of test equipment and relevant
calibration certificates.
1. Loaned
Equipment
When measurement and test equipments are owned by or hired

to CONTRACTORS or third parties, evidence and register shall
be kept on site and made available for Amec Foster Wheeler
inspection.
In both cases is required
to:
- Determine the measurements to be made and the accuracy

required, and select the appropriate inspection, measuring
and test equipment that is capable of the necessary accuracy
and precision;
- Define the process to be employed for the calibration of
inspection, measuring and test equipment, including details of
equipment type, unique identification, location, frequency of
checks, check method, acceptance criteria and the action to
be taken when results are unsatisfactory;
- Assure that the environmental conditions are suitable for the
calibrations, inspections, measurements and tests being
carried out.
2. Handling and Storage
Test equipment shall be handled, preserved and stored such

that the accuracy and fitness for use are maintained.
3 Calibrated Measurement Instrument
3.1 All final tests shall be executed using calibrated measurement

instrument that shall be compatible with the acceptance criteria
of the measurement and the relevant uncertainty. All final
measurements shall be accompanied by the uncertainty value.
3.2 When a CONTRACTOR is in charge of testing, instruments used

shall be suitable for the measure to be done, and the relevant
certification shall comply with point 3.5.
3.3 Operating range and uncertainty (U) of the test instrument

should be according the measuring acceptance criteria (A). See
Figure
1. For example, if there is a FINAL measurement of 50 °C (M)
with an acceptance criteria of + 1°C (A), the recommend
instrument shall be selected with an uncertainty (U) of + 0,33 °C.
There are not fixed rules, but is a good practice to (where is
possible) define the test instrument as:
Uncertainty (U) = Acceptance Criteria (A) / 3
U U
A M A
Figure 1
3.4 The instruments shall be handled and stored in a suitable way, in

order to maintain their characteristics.
Before the use, the user shall check the following points as a
minimum:
· Test instrument characteristic in accordance to the previous
3.3 point (type, operating range, uncertainty, etc).
· Correct operation.
· Battery status and other accessories availability.
· Calibration certificate contents according to 3.5 and
relevant validity.
Maintenance and calibration need to be regularly performed to

ensure device reliability. Improper use may affect the reliability
of the device.
3.5 The calibration certificate shall include the following information:
· Description, Manufacturer, type and Serial Number of the

test instrument.
· Description, Manufacturer, type and Serial Number of the
Reference instrument (used to calibrate the test
instrument).
· Copy of the calibration certificate of the reference
instrument or equivalent (see Attachment 1) calibrated.
· Compared measuring values and calculated errors (over
the entire process range).
· Calibration
procedure.
· Uncertainty.
· Date of the calibration and
Signature.
· When an adjusting, modification or reparation is occurred,
pre and post calibration may be required.
3.6 Validity of a Calibration certificate

There is not a rule for the validity extent of a certificate. The
calibration duration shall be in accordance to the use of the
instrument, which shall be defined by the owner. However a
good practice indicates that a period of 1 year is acceptable.
Longer periods shall be supported by enough data to give
confidence of the performance stability.
3.7 Calibration certificate for reference instruments.

The calibration of the reference instrument shall be performed by
an Accredited Laboratory and there is an agreement between
approved laboratories in Europe for a mutual and bilateral
acceptance (See attachment 1 for the list).
VI. RECORDS
A calibration register of all measurement/test equipment shall be maintained

by the CONTRACTOR and show as a minimum:
1) Description of Equipment and unique serial number.

2) Date of manufacture/purchase.
3) Dates of all calibrations and results

4) Current certification.
5) Planned calibration intervals.
6) Source of calibration used to establish relationship to nationally recognised
standards.
The serial number of test equipment shall be noted on all test certificates, in
order to allow traceability of test equipment and relevant calibration
certificates.
CONTRACTORS’ calibration procedures and records shall be made available

for inspection by Amec Foster Wheeler.
VII. ATTACHMENTS
Attachment 1: European co-operation for Accreditation (EA) Multi and

Bilateral Agreement Signatories (07B2.14-01).
Publication
Reference EA-01/08
EA
Multi and Bilateral
Agreement
Signatories
PURPOSE
It presents the list of the EA Multi and Bilateral agreement signatories.
December 2008 - rev.25 Page 1 of 11

EA-01/08 • EA Multi and bilateral Agreement Signatories
Authorship
The publication has been written by the EA secretariat.
Official language
The text may be translated into other languages as required. The English language
version remains the definitive version.
Copyright
The copyright of this text is held by EA. The text may not be copied for resale.
Further information
For further information about this publication, you can contact your national member of EA
or the EA MLA committee.
Please check our website for up-to-date information

http://www.european-accreditation.org/
Date of endorsement : -
Date of implementation :
- Transitional period : -
December 2008 – Rev.25 Page 2 of 11

EA MULTI AND BILATERAL AGREEMENT AREAS

1 Calibration laboratories
2 Testing laboratories
3.1 Certification bodies, products
3.2 Certification bodies, quality systems
3.3 Certification bodies, persons
3.4 Certification bodies, environmental management systems
4 Inspection bodies
SIGNATORIES
Membership in the EA MLA starts at the date of decision by the MAC.
• AUSTRIA
BMWA - Bundesminister für Wirtschaft und Arbeit
1 23 June 1998
2 6 March 1997
3.1 23 June 1998
3.2 23 June 1998
3.3 23 June 1998
3.4 12 March 2004
• BELGIUM
BELAC
1 28 February 1997
2 28 February 1997
3.1 24 November 1998
3.3 17 October 2003
4 17 October 2003
• BULGARIA
BAS – Bulgarian Accreditation Service
3.2 18 March 2005

3.3 18 March 2005

• CZECH REPUBLIC
CAI - Czech Accreditation Institute
1 24 November 1998
2 24 November 1998
4 17 October 2003
• DENMARK
DANAK - Danish Accreditation
1 13 December 1990
2 13 May 1992
3.4 23 June 1998
4 23 September 2004
• ESTONIA
EAK – Estonian Accreditation Centre
1 12 March 2004
2 12 March 2004
3.1 18 March 2005
3.2 18 March 2005
3.3 18 March 2005
3.4 18 March 2005
4 12 March 2004
• FINLAND
FINAS - Finnish Accreditation Service
1 1 December 1989
2 17 May 1993
3.4 23 June 1998
4 17 October 2003

• FRANCE
COFRAC - Comité Français d’Accréditation
1 1 December 1989
2 13 May 1992
3.4 23 June 1998
4 17 October 2003
• GERMANY
DACH (Deutsche Akkreditierungsstelle Chemie GmbH)

2 23 June 1998
DAP (Deutsches Akkreditierungssystem Prüfwesen GmbH)

2 30 November 1994
4 14 October 2005
DKD (Deutscher Kalibrierdienst)

1 1 December 1989
TGA (Trägergemeinschaft für Akkreditierung GmbH)
2 30 November 1994
3.2 18 May 1995
3.4 23 June 1998
4 18 March 2005
These Accreditation Bodies are Members of the German

Accreditation Advisory Board.

• GREECE
ESYD – Hellenic Accreditation System
1 12 March 2004
2 12 March 2004
3.1 18 March 2005
3.2 18 March 2005
3.3 18 March 2005
3.4 18 March 2005
4 12 March 2004
• IRELAND
INAB – Irish National Accreditation Board
1 17 June 1993
2 17 June 1993
3.1 15 October 2002
3.2 23 June 1998
3.4 23 June 1998
4 5 October 2006
• ITALY
SINAL - Sistema Nazionale per l’Accreditamento di Laboratori

2 17 May 1993
SINCERT - Sistema Nazionale per l’Accreditamento degli Organismi

di Certificazione e Ispezione
3.1 18 May 1995
3.2 18 May 1995
3.3 18 May 1995
3.4 23 June 1998
4 17 October 2003
SIT - Servizio di Taratura in Italia

1 1 December 1989

• LATVIA
LATAK – Latvian National Accreditation Bureau
1 15 October 2002
2 15 October 2002
3.1 15 October 2002
3.2 15 October 2002
3.3 15 October 2002
4. 4th April 2006
• LITHUANIA
LA – Lithuanian National Accreditation Bureau
1 15 October 2001
2 15 October 2001
3.1 15 October 2001
3.2 14 October 2005
3.3 14 October 2005
3.4 14 October 2005
4 14 October 2005
• MALTA
NAB-MALTA – National Accreditation Board
2 2 April 2008
• NETHERLANDS
RvA - Raad voor Accreditatie
1 1 December 1989
2 13 May 1992
4 17 October 2003
• NORWAY
NA - Norwegian Accreditation
1 15 January 1993
2 14 December 1993
3.4 23 June 1998
4 17 October 2003

• POLAND
PCA – Polskie Centrum Akredytacji
1 23 September 2004
2 23 September 2004
3.1 23 September 2004
4 14 October 2005
• PORTUGAL
IPAC - Instituto Português de Acreditação
1 4 April 2006
2 4 April 2006
3.1 4 April 2006
3.2 4 April 2006
3.3 4 April 2006
3.4 4 April 2006
4 4 April 2006
Note: IPQ, Instituto Potuguês da Qualidade, was a signatory for

th th
Calibration and Testing from 26 November 1997 until 9 June, 2004.
• ROMANIA
RENAR – Romanian Association for Accreditation
2 14 October 2005
• SLOVAKIA
SNAS – Slovak National Accreditation Service
1 21 March 2001
2 21 March 2001
3.1 15 October 2002
3.2 15 October 2002
3.3 15 October 2002
3.4 15 October 2002
4 17 October 2003

• SLOVENIA
SA – Slovenian Accreditation
1 17 october 2003
2 17 october 2003
th
3.1 4 April 2006
th
3.2 4 April 2006
th
3.4 4 April 2006
th
4 4 April 2006
• SPAIN
ENAC - Entidad Nacional de Acreditación
1 19 July 1995
2 30 November 1992
3.4 23 June 1998
4 17 October 2003
• SWEDEN
SWEDAC - Swedish Board for Accreditation and Conformity Assessment
1 1 December 1989
2 13 May 1992
4 17 October 2003
• SWITZERLAND
SAS - Swiss Accreditation Service
1 1 December 1989
2 14 December 1993
3.3 23 June 1998
3.4 23 June 1998
4 17 October 2003

• TURKEY
TURKAK – Turkish Accreditation Agency
th
1 4 April 2006
th
2 4 April 2006
th
th
3.2 4 April 2006
th
th
th
4 4 April 2006
• UNITED KINGDOM
UKAS - United Kingdom Accreditation Service
1 1 December 1989
2 13 May 1992
3.4 23 June 1998
4 17 October 2003

Bilateral agreements
Country, body Scope Date of signature
Australia, NATA Testing, calibration 28/02/1996

Inspection 02/04/2008
Brazil, Inmetro Testing, calibration 30/01/2001
Hong-Kong, HKAS Testing and calibration 07/06/2000
New Zealand, TELARC now IANZ Testing and calibration 23/09/1996

South Africa, SANAS Testing, calibration 16/12/1993
signature for testing and calibration between NLA and EAL 28/02/97
EMS certification 25/11/1998
United States, A2LA Testing and calibration 21/09/1999
Australia New Zealand, JAS-ANZ Product and EMS certification 07/06/2000
Singapore, SAC Testing and calibration 27/03/2000
Tunisia, TUNAC Calibration and Testing 02/04/2008
Israel, ISRAC Testing and Calibration 15/10/2001

EAL, European co-operation for Accreditation of Laboratories and EAC, European Accreditation of Certification, merged in November 1997
to create EA, European co-operation for accreditation.
December 2008 - rev.25 Page 11 of 11

SITE QUALITY
CONTROL
Modif/Changes/NCR Pag/Pag. 1 din/from 6
& Technical Query

Modif/Changes/NCR & Technical Query

CONSTRUCTION
BD0955A-07A2.15
DWG. REV. DATE
M. Rizzo M. Mandelli
04
03
02
01
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
AMEC FOSTER
ITALIANA S.r.l. 7 3 8 7 8 1 X 0 0 - X 3 1 6 0 0
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 30 31 80
Via S. Caboto, 15
20094 Corsico
(Milano) ITALY
doc.

PAGE : 2 of 6
REV. : C00

CONTENTS
I. SCOPE
II. SUBJECT
III. DEFINITION
IV. REFERENCE
V. PROCEDURE
VI. RECORDS
VII. ATTACHMENTS
AUTHORISATION.
PAGE : 3 of 6
REV. : C00

I. SCOPE
Scope of this procedure is to describe how to identify and to control modifications,

changes and non-conformities arisen during construction and define Technical
Query.
The procedure applies to modifications, changes and non-conformities originated
during the construction in field in any phase relevant to:
– documentation issue;
– equipment and/or material
receiving;
– inspection to Contractor;
– prefabrication;
– erection;
– Final test.
II. SUBJECT
This document refers to the Modification / Changes / Non Conformity Report (NCR) &
Technical Query.
III. DEFINITION
Non-conformity
Non-conformity is a failure to comply with requirements as specified by Issued

for Constructions Project documents.
Technical Query
Form that Subcontractor shall fill, sign and submit to FWI for any queries related
to technical issues on the Project (see attached form TQ.001)
Other Definitions
Quality Conformity to specified requirements

Request of execution of additional works,
RWE (Request of
not included in original FWI and/or
Work Execution)
Contractor scope of work.
Engineering Mistake Mistake of engineering found at site during
construction
Discrepancy identified in final product received
Supplier Product Discrepancy in site
AUTHORISATION.
PAGE : 4 of 6
REV. : C00

Unforeseen event that modifies the conformity

"Accident" of the product to originally specified
characteristics
Modification of product technical
Transporter "Accident" or
characteristics, occurred during its
Discrepancy
transportation
Contractor " Accident" or Alteration of Contractor field activities,
Discrepancy with deviations from contractual requirements
Change of contractual design data, identified

Field Design Change in site
Documents produced by Field Engineering at

SKL (Sketch Layout) site
IV. REFERENCE
1BD0955C -07A2.00 Construction QC requirements
V. PROCEDURE
Modifications, changes, non-conformity and discrepancies management
All functions involved in the project execution shall apply the following scheme to
manage and control the modifications, changes, non-conformity, discrepancies
identified during field construction phase.
ACTIVITY CONTROL TOOL RECORDS

Quality Form, WI-CON001 Quality Form, Quality Form
Non Conformity
WI-QA-QAS Register
Request of Work RWE Document,

RWE, WI-SBC012
Execution RWE Register
Back charge, Corrective Action Dossier,

Supplied Product
WI-CON204, Discrepancy VNCR and Back charge
Accident/Discrepancy
Report Register
Back charge, Corrective Action Dossier,

Transporter
Accident/Discrepancy WI-CON204, Discrepancy VNCR and Back charge
Report Register
AUTHORISATION.
PAGE : 5 of 6
REV. : C00

Contractor RWE + Back charge Corrective Action Dossier,

Accident/Discrepancy WI-SBC012, WI-CON204 Back charge Register
SKL + Quality form to SKL+RWE Document,

Engineering Mistake Engineering + RWE, Corrective Action Evidence,
WI- CON001 Q. Form+SKL+RWE
Registers
SKL+RWE
Field Design Change SKL + RWE
Document,
SKL+RWE Registers
Corrective Action Dossier,
Quality Form/RWE, RWE + Back charge
Construction Back charge Document, RWE +
Accident
WI-BC-HSE Quality Form + Back
charge + QF Register.
Work Accident Quality Form / RWE, Corrective Action Dossier,

(involving items Back charge RWE + Back charge
supplied or erected Document, Quality Form +
by Others) WI-BC-HSE Backcharge Register.
Registers will include the

following:
– Identification by sequence
number
– Issue date
– Reference to original
document
– Open/closed status.
All products that have been found not in accordance to the requirements shall be
clearly identified and segregated to avoid to be used in the construction activities.
In case of Non Conformity with requested repairing action, at the completion of the
relevant activities the Supervisor will check the adequacy and correctness of work
and will assure that all relevant documentation is complete. Project QA/QC
Coordinator will verify the completeness of Corrective Action Dossier.
QA System Manager periodically reviews the Quality Forms and relevant corrective
actions to identify repeated and recurring non-conformities.
The dysfunctions will be communicated to the responsible of the involved discipline,
which will take care to adopt measures to improve the outlined specific activities.
AUTHORISATION.
PAGE : 6 of 6
REV. : C00

Non Conformity Documentation
Project QA/QC Site Coordinator has the duty and responsibility of monitoring the
close out of Non Conformity, the complete execution of the Corrective Actions and
the adequacy and completeness of the relevant documentation.
Attachment 2 shows the way Site NCR shall be processed and managed.
VI. RECORDS
All Non-Conformity Report with all Corrective Action Dossier shall be collected
recorded and sent to H.O. for records.
VII. ATTACHMENTS
NCR & TQ forms

NCR flow
management
AUTHORISATION.
07A2.15 – SITE NCR MANAGEMENT
FWI QC Contractor/
Originator
Coordinato FWI Const Manager FWI Field Eng.
r Vendor
Identifies Non
conforming
action and/or
item
1. Assigns NCR
Number
2. Updates
NCR register
3. Signs and Yes

forwards to NCR
FWI Const approved ?
manager
approval
No
Propose
Corrective action END
and identifies
impacts if any
Reviews the Proposed CA
Yes
Proposed CA
approved ?
No
Define the CA that shall be implemented
Implement the
approved CA and
notify upon
completion
No
CA follow
up ok ?
Yes
 Signs NCR close

out and
updates NCR
register
accordingly
 Sends copy of
updated
register to
H.O.
END
NON CONFORMITY REPORT

NC.001/
AMECFW Contract:
ITEM DESCRIPTION:
DESCRIPTION OF THE NON-CONFORMANCE:
AMECFW QC Co-ordinator: DATE

AMECFW Construction Manager: DATE
PROPOSAL: Use as is Rework Repair Other
CORRECTIVE ACTION PROPOSAL: Copy to Project Engineer
Discipline: Author: AMECFW Others Name:
AMECF
IMPACT ON NONE SCHED & COST MORE DISCIPL SAFETY
W
AGREEMENTS
POLICY
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
DUE on Action By
AMECFW \ Construction Manager: Date:
ACTION VERIFIED AND NCR CLOSED BY:

QC Co-ordinator:
Signature: Date:
OTHER REQUIRED APPROVALS:

TECHNICAL QUERY REPORT

TQ.001/
AMECFW Contract:
Submitted by: Submitted to: REPORT N.

TQ.001/
Reviewed by QA/QC dept: Department: Submission date:
We request the following clarification:

AREA-UNIT-SYSTEM-TOS:
DISCIPLINE
DESCRIPTION:
DRAWING No. AND Rev.:
ATTACHMENTS:
Reply by AMECFW:
Signature
Name:
Position:
Date:
CBD Date / Checked
SITE Designer
QUALITY
Punch list
management

Punch list management
AFWI DWG N°: BD0955A-07A2.16 Rev:C00 APPROVED FOR

CONSTRUCTION
M.
M. Rizzo DWG. REV. DATE
Mandelli
SIGNATURE: A MANTOVANI
04
03
02
01
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
AMEC FOSTER
ITALIANA S.r.l. 7 3 8 7 8 1 X 0 0 - X 3 1 7 0 0
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 30 31 80
Via S. Caboto, 15
20094 Corsico
(Milano) ITALY
doc.
SITE QUALITY CONTROL – Punch list management
PAGE : 2 of 9
REV. : C00
CONTENTS
I. INTRODUCTION
II.I. RESPONSIBILITIES
III. PROCEDURE
IV. ATTACHMENTS
AUTHORISATION.
PAGE : 3 of 9
REV. : C00
I. INTRODUCTION
A. Scope of work
This procedure defines work process, roles and responsibilities for preparation,
issuing, management and clearance of punch list items that require
action/verification by the AMEC FW Site Supervision and/or the Client.
B. Definitions
Client/Customer/Owner: is the Company that has awarded the contract to
AMEC FW
Pre-commissioning Non-operating adjustments and cold alignment
checks. These activities verify the completeness
of the installed equipment/components.
Commissioning: All activities performed after achievement of
Ready for Commissioning certificate for each
Unit/System.
Punch List Register: The overall electronically generated punch list,
which identifies all punch items by system, sub-
system, circuit (as the case is) and discipline,
and capable of being sorted by category, and
any combination of the above.
Original Punch List: The “original” list of punch list items, which are
turned over to Punch List Co-ordinator by the
P.L. Originator, for incorporation into the Punch
List Register (see Attachments).
Performer: Subcontractor’s personnel who execute the work
related to punch list item(s).
Punch List (P.L.): A compilation of punch items as per see
Attachments.
Punch List Coordinator: An individual assigned to co-ordinate the entire
registration, tracking and updating of the Punch
List Register.
Punch List Item: Description of an item or activity which is: not
completed, outstanding or, in some way,
deficient and fails to meet the requirements of
the project specifications, drawings, procedures,
etc. and is required to be provided or corrected.
Punch List Originator AMEC FW or Client assigned, Superintendent or
Supervisor who belongs to the Construction or
Commissioning organization.
AUTHORISATION.
PAGE : 4 of 9
REV. : C00
QC Inspector: The Quality Control Inspector in the context of

this procedure and work process means AMEC
FW Quality Control Inspector(s) / Field
Supervisors.
Record Book: Documents are collected and catalogued by
System, Sub-system circuit, site and discipline in
the Record Book.
Sub-system: Subdivision of a system containing group of
facilities elements, able to perform a given
operational function, and as defined on the
commissioning sub-system boundary
documents.
System (TOS): Major subdivision of an installation, being either
process or utility, including all the equipment
required for that system to operate, and as
defined on the commissioning system boundary
documents.
Hydraulic Circuit: Subdivision of a system and/or Subsystem,
containing a group of facilities that can be
hydraulically tested at once as it will be approved
by the Field Project Engineer and/or
Construction Manager.
Subcontractor Entity (and its legal successors in title) named as
Subcontractor in the AMEC FW or Owner
purchase order and/or the contract awarded to
the Subcontractor to perform specific services
and/or works.
Test Package: All the documentation and Quality forms that the
Subcontractor will have to deliver to AMEC FW
before Mechanical Completion.
AUTHORISATION.
PAGE : 5 of 9
REV. : C00
C. Reference documents
1BD0974Z -07A2.00 Construction QC requirements
II. RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Punch List Coordinator

The Punch List Coordinator shall be responsible of the following activities:
 Ensuring that punch lists compiled by AMEC FW and/or the Client, are
complete and then transferred, registered and numbered correctly and
finally uploaded into the Punch List Register database.
 Ensuring that the Punch List Register is maintained up-to-date as soon as
new punch items are identified, proper action taken, and follow-up for
closing-out, in a timely manner.
 Ensuring that proper reports are delivered to respective organizations.
 Ensuring that the Master Punch List Record Book is maintained up-dated.
 Retaining records of all original punch list, changes and closures.
 Returning to the Originator electronic print outs of input for verification of
correct entry.
 Notification to the Originator about reasons why any punch item is rejected
if any from input to Punch List System.
 After consultation with and approval of Construction Manager, invite the
Client, with 3 days advanced notice, to punch-out a certain circuit,
subsystem or system, as the case is.
 Plan, together with the P.L. Originator and the Subcontractor, the timing for
P.L. clearing.
 Verify that the plan of the P.L. clearing is maintained by the involved
Subcontractor.
B. Punch List Originator

AMEC FW and Client representatives shall originate punch lists. The Punch
List Form is enclosed in Attachment A. The Punch List Originator will fill up the
form adding the requested information.
The Originator is responsible for:
 Quality of input, correct identification of items, as well as adequate support
documentation.
 Tracking of own items to ensure that they appear on the Punch List
Register for action in due course, following receipt of electronic input form
for verification of entry.
 Verifying that the involved Subcontractor actually clear the punch list at the
planned date.
 Verification and acceptance of the completed item in the field.
AUTHORISATION.
PAGE : 6 of 9
REV. : C00
 Sign off the completed item record sheet.

 Prepare the final P.L. (see Attachment) and manage it with the same
procedure of the Construction P.L. (see Attachment)
III. PROCEDURE
A. WORK PROCESS
Once the subcontractor deems that a circuit, equipment, a sub-system or a

system is mechanically completed and the relevant test package is ready,
subcontractor submits the test package to AMEC FW P.L. Coordinator notifying
AMEC FWI to review the enclosed Construction P.L. (see attachment).
P.L. Coordinator advises AMEC FW Discipline Supervisor to review, to have a

walk-around and to consolidate the Construction P.L. with Subcontractor at the
time convened.
AMEC FW Construction Manager notifies, case by case, Client to participate

to the consolidation of the Construction P.L. with AMEC FW and
Subcontractor.
Client contribution with its own P.L. can be achieved upon one of the following
case that AMEC FW Construction Manager considers the most appropriately
case by case:
 Inviting the Client to do its P.L. with AMEC FW, if Client did not attend
the consolidation of the P.L. between subcontractor and AMEC FW.
 Inviting the Client to attend the test if items under “A” category are
closed; the invitation shall include the consolidated P.L. and shall be sent
to Client minimum three working days before the date of the test
 Inviting the Client to attend the test at the given date even if items under
category “A” are still open, being understood that those items shall be
cleared before the execution of the test; the invitation shall be sent to
Client minimum five working days before the date of the test with the
relevant P.L.
P.L. Coordinator and Originator shall monitor that the Construction P.L. items are
cleared within the planned date and shall update the P.L. status and register
accordingly.
P.L. Originator shall sign each single item of the Construction P.L. that
subcontractor indicates cleared out and, on the contrary, P.L. Originator shall
mark the Construction P.L. item as “REJECTED” and shall specify the reason
of the rejection.
AUTHORISATION.
PAGE : 7 of 9
REV. : C00
The Final P.L. (see attachment) is issued when all items of the construction P.L.
under category “A” and a substantial number of items under categories “B” and
“C” are cleared out.
The clearance of item under category “A” shall determine the execution of the
test or the hand over as the case indicates.
B. PUNCH ITEM CATEGORY CODING

Each Punch Item shall have a category code of either A, B, C.
The code defines when the agreed punch item is to be cleared, i.e. during which
phase of the plant completion.
Category A Items of a specific system or sub-system or circuit under this
category are to be cleared before hydraulic test or functional
test execution.
Category B Items of a specific system or sub-system, or circuit under this
category can be cleared before Turnover to owner.
Category C Items of a specific system or sub-system or circuit under this
category can be cleared after Turnover to owner.
The punch item category code is initially assigned by the Punch List Originator.
This code could be consolidated and/or modified by the punch list review team
during the dedicated weekly meetings.
Where possible, marked-up drawing will be enclosed to punch lists, in order to
clearly identify the punch list items by System/Subsystem (e.g. P&ID) and/or
location.
In case that a punch item cannot be registered for lack of necessary information,
it will be returned to the Punch List Originator for completion and re-submittal.
Punch List form shall be unique to the subsystem. Multi subsystems shall not
appear on the same input form. Similarly it is acceptable to input single items
against a specific subsystem. This will ease retrieval, identification and storage
on a system/subsystem basis.
Where a drawing is referenced, all punch list items contained on the input form
shall be applicable to that drawing. Items must also be from the same
subsystem, to facilitate ease retrieval, identification and storage on a
system/subsystem basis.
C. PUNCH ITEMS CONSOLIDATION AND PROCESSING
Punch items will be registered once consolidated by the involved parties in the
punch list, transmitted to the Punch List Coordinator who will review it and record
in the Punch List Register.
AUTHORISATION.
PAGE : 8 of 9
REV. : C00
Any disputed item of contentious nature shall be referred to the Punch List
Coordinator for review and resolution.
D. PUNCH LIST AND PUNCH ITEM NUMBERING

Each punch list and relevant punch items submitted to the Punch List
Coordinator for input into the Punch List Register, will be automatically numbered
upon initial entry by the computer database software for tracking and closeout
purposes.
The printout of electronic punch lists (with the assigned number on the list as
well as each punch item), will be then delivered from P.L. Coordinator to the
relevant Punch List Originator, who shall be able to track the progress of the
input sheet.
In the event that some items are not included in the Punch List Register, reasons
for the non-inclusion will be clearly identified and stated on the form returned to
the Originator (refer to the following section).
E. PUNCH LIST REPORT AND MEETINGS

Punch List Coordinator shall issue an agreed Punch List Weekly Status Report.
Frequency of the Status report shall be adapted to site needs. Additionally,
punch list reports can be compiled and issued on request.
A weekly meeting will be held to update and coordinate the punch list situation
and to verify its status.
F. PUNCH ITEM CLOSURE
All punch list items shall be cleared and signed off according to matrix shown in
the Final Punch List.
A list of authorized signs from AMEC FW and the Client for closing-out punch
items shall be maintained and updated as necessary.
This list shall also include the originator and any other required authorities for
closing-out punch items.
G. PUNCH ITEM STATUS DEFINITION AND CHANGES
Punch items submitted to the Punch List Coordinator and included in the Punch
List Register are classified as “ACTIVE” until they are cleared.
The “ACTIVE” status can be changed only with parties’ agreement during the
periodical punch list review meeting in the following ways:
 “DELETED” status is generally foreseen for items found as duplication of
previous inserted ones. Permanent deletion of the punch item number is
not permitted by the software database.
AUTHORISATION.
PAGE : 9 of 9
REV. : C00
 “HOLD” status is assigned to the punch items considered as disputed.

Punch items with “HOLD” status can be subsequently changed to
“ACTIVE” or “DELETED” status, as per the agreement reached in the
punch list Committee meetings.
 “SOLVED” status is assigned to punch list items that have been solved and
so that can be cleared.
IV. ATTACHMENTS
QC forms
PL.001 Construction Punch List

PL.005 Final Punch List
AUTHORISATION.
Attachment “A”
CONSTRUCTION PUNCH LIST

PL.001/
AMECFW Contract:
Discipline: Equipment/Item: AREA/UNIT/SYSTEM:
Originator:  AMECFW  Client Name:
No.: PL.001/ Doc. Ref. no.: Rev.:
Date Doc. Ref. no.: Rev.:
Rev. 0 1 2 3 Doc. Ref. no.: Rev.:
Contractor Completion
Work Remedial Works Categor Originator
Item No. y A, B, Agreed Date Actua Acceptance
C l Signature
Date
REMARKS: Items to be repaired, completed or corrected before equipment can be safely operated, essential for:
A Functional Test
B Turnover
C After turnover
Attachment “B”
FINAL PUNCH LIST

PL.005/
AMECFW Contract:
Discipline: Equipment/Item: AREA/UNIT/SYSTEM:
Originator:  AMECFW  Client Name:
No.: PL.005/ Doc. Ref.. Rev.:

no.: _
Date Doc. Ref.. Rev.:
no.: _
Rev. 0 1 2 3 Doc. Ref.. Rev.:
no.: _
Work Description of works Categor Completion Date
Item No. y B, C Agreed Actual

Date Date
REMARKS: Items to be repaired, completed or corrected before equipment can be safely operated, essential for:
B Turnover
C After turnover
ACCEPTANCE OF WORK LIST REMEDIAL

WORKS
SUBCONTRACTOR AMECFW Client AMECFW Client
COMPANY
SIGNATURE
NAME
DATE
CBD / Designer Checked
SITE Date
MATERIAL
MANAGEMENT
SITE MATERIAL MANAGEMENT
AFWI DWG N°: BD0955A- Rev: C00 APPROVED FOR CONSTRUCTION

M. Rizzo M. Mandelli SIGNATURE: A. MANTOVANI
04
03
02
01
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
AMEC FOSTER
WHEELER ITALIANA
S.r.l. 7 3 8 7 8 1 X 0 0 - X 3 2 1 0 0
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 30 31 80
Via S. Caboto, 15
20094 Corsico
(Milano) ITALY
doc.
SITE MATERIAL MANAGEMENT

JOB SPEC : 1BD0955A -07A4.01
PAGE : 2 of 26
REV. : C00
DATE : 10 November2017
SITE MATERIAL
MANAGEMENT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 SCOPE...................................................................................................................................... 3
2 SUBJECT.................................................................................................................................. 3
3 DEFINITION AND ACRONYMS............................................................................................... 3
4 REFERENCES.......................................................................................................................... 3
5 PROCEDURE............................................................................................................................ 3
5.1 SITE FACILITIES AND STORAGE........................................................................................ 3
5.1.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................... 3
5.1.2 Warehouses....................................................................................................................... 4
5.1.3 Computer facility................................................................................................................. 4
5.1.4 Storage Equipment............................................................................................................. 4
5.1.5 Storage inside the warehouse............................................................................................5
5.1.6 Laydown Yard..................................................................................................................... 6
5.1.7 Storage in the laydown yard...............................................................................................6
5.1.8 Storage and handling of cement lined piping (by Civil Contractor).....................................7
5.2 SITE MATERIAL CONTROL DOCUMENTS..........................................................................7
5.2.1 Site material control documents.........................................................................................7
5.3 MASTER CONTROL OPERATIONS.....................................................................................9
5.3.1 Warehouse receiving.......................................................................................................... 9
5.3.2 Piping Material Planning................................................................................................... 12
5.3.3 Issues of piping material................................................................................................... 14
5.3.4 Pipe Fabrication................................................................................................................ 17
5.3.5 Material lost or damaged by the Contractor (costs shall be recovered from the
Contractor) ...................................................................................................................................... 17
5.3.6 Issues of Material Different from piping............................................................................17
5.3.7 Inventory checks............................................................................................................... 18
5.4 MATERIAL DISCREPANCIES............................................................................................. 18
5.4.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................... 18
5.4.2 Receiving check................................................................................................................ 19
5.4.3 Recording and Reporting of Discrepancies......................................................................19
5.4.4 Notes on Handling Overages............................................................................................ 20
5.4.5 Notes on Handling Shortages........................................................................................... 21
5.4.6 Notes on Handling Damage and Losses..........................................................................22
5.4.7 Responsibility for Resolving Discrepancies......................................................................23
5.4.8 Discrepancy Report Distribution and Outline of Recipient Activities.................................24
6 RECORDS............................................................................................................................... 25
7 ATTACHMENTS..................................................................................................................... 26
AUTHORISATION.
JOB SPEC : 1BD0955A -07A4.01
PAGE : 3 of 26
REV. : C00
SITE MATERIAL
MANAGEMENT
1 SCOPE
This Job Specification provides the codes and documents referenced covers the following main
aspects related with site material management:
 Site facilities and storage.
 Site material control documents.
 Master control operations.
 Material discrepancies.
2 SUBJECT
Modalities and prescriptions for implementation of Material Control at site.
3 DEFINITION AND ACRONYMS

Field Material Management System Computerized system used to manage and control
material receiving, allocation, issue and material
certification (AMUSE-CON).
BOM Bill of Material
HO Home Office
MIR Material Issue Request
MRS Material Receipt Slips
MSDS Material Safety Data Sheet
QC Quality Control
4 REFERENCES
Reference documentation for this procedure is as follows:
 1BD0955A -07A2.00 Construction QC requirements.
 1BD0955A -07A4.02 Site Material Preservation.
5 PROCEDURE
5.1 SITE FACILITIES AND STORAGE
5.1.1 Introduction
There will be a central warehouse and laydown yard for project
materials. In general, the warehouse facility will comprise of the
following:
 A secure covered warehouse building including:
 A secure quarantine area (for non-conformities).
 A cold room instrument store.
 Material Safety Data Sheet showcase.
 A fenced open laydown area partially sheltered.
Materials will be stored according to the following general criteria:

 Steel structure.
AUTHORISATION.
JOB SPEC : 1BD0955A -07A4.01
PAGE : 4 of 26
REV. : C00
SITE MATERIAL
MANAGEMENT
 Piping.
 Electrical and Instrument Cables.
 Lighting features.
 Instruments.
Major attention shall be paid to those materials (e.g. paints, lubricants etc.) to be accompanied by
MSDS.
In
particular:
 Availability of MSDS against Purchase Order requirements shall be verified and if missing
the relevant material shall be rejected.
 Copy of the MSDS shall be displayed and made available for consultation (e.g. put it in
plastic transparency) in proximity of where the relevant material is actually stored. This to
ensure for instance that storage conditions are the proper ones and personnel can be
aware of the safety precautions for handling the material in normal or emergency
circumstances
5.1.2 W arehouses
The warehouses will be laid out in a logical fashion to ensure a good material flow. Sufficient aisles
will be provided to ensure unrestricted access for fork lifts and / or trolleys.
Adequate storage is provided by way of bins, racks and pallets to accommodate the categories
and quantities of material as specified for the Project.
When laying-out the warehouse, provisions have been made
for:
 Separate receiving and issue areas.
 A designated quarantine area for non-conforming materials.
 A secure area for electronic instruments.
 A secure area for millwright material and for other items which by nature of their size and
attractiveness are particularly vulnerable to pilferage.
5.1.3 Computer facility
Material controller and Material system operator will be located in the Amec FW offices. In order to
allow the activities, they will provide a suitable lines for the Field material management system.
The computer connection with the Amec FW server shall be done on the basis of the following
scheme.
Site
AmecFW HO
Vendor Yard
5.1.4 Storage Equipment

Pallet racking, housing pallets fitted with collars and internal dividers will provide the majority of
internal storage requirements. A limited quantity of standard partitioned shelving will be provided
for instrument and electrical items. This combination coupled with drop over shelves and stackable
tote pans will maximize storage flexibility throughout the Project.
AUTHORISATION.
JOB SPEC : 1BD0955A -07A4.01
PAGE : 5 of 26
REV. : C00
SITE MATERIAL
MANAGEMENT
The warehouse weatherproofing will be appropriate to the material stored.

5.1.5 Storage inside the warehouse
Material will be binned or racked in Material Classification Code (MCC) Sequence, with rows of
helves or racks, as necessary, assigned for the storage of material in commodity groupings.
5.1.5.1 Small Bore Valves (<=2")
They will be stored in MCC Number or Requisition Number, letter and item sequence.
All valves will be metal tagged with the Foster Wheeler Commodity code.
Alloy or S.S. valves will not be stored in contact with C.S. valves, but in a separate
Sub/Warehouse.
This is a general statement which also applies to fittings and piping, both small and large bore
diameter.
5.1.5.2 Small Bore Fittings (<=2")
They will be stored considering:
 Material specification.
 Type of connection (screwed or socket weld or butt weld ).
 Size.
5.1.5.3 Small Bore Piping (<2")

Where practical, it will be stored inside warehouse on purpose-built racks, considering:
 Material specification.
 Size.
 Schedule.
 Studbolts and Jack Screws
 Segregated according to Specifications and then by diameter and length.
5.1.5.4 Gaskets
Segregated according to type (compressed fiber/spiral wound/special etc.), then by pressure rating
and size.
5.1.5.5 Electrical Materials

Including small cable, conduit and fittings, light fittings, push button starters, panels etc.
5.1.5.6 Instruments and Accessories

Whenever practicable, these items will be retained in manufacturers' original packing.
5.1.5.7 Oils and Paints

Stored complying with applicable local laws and Refinery procedures.
5.1.5.8 Millwrights Materials

This includes those items temporarily removed from equipment for safety or convenience.
AUTHORISATION.
JOB SPEC : 1BD0955A -07A4.01
PAGE : 6 of 26
REV. : C00
SITE MATERIAL
MANAGEMENT
5.1.5.9 Miscellaneous
Any other items that must be stored inside e.g.: power and lighting distribution boards, control
valves etc.
5.1.6 Laydown Yard

This will be hard standing and drained with access roads of suitable duty to take required lifting or
transporting equipment.
The area will be fenced with a main secure access gate for delivery and collection vehicles.
All pipes will be laid on transverse dunnage, securely wedged and stacked.
Pipes will not be pyramid
stacked.
All large items will have adequate weather protection and be supported on
dunnage.
5.1.7 Storage in the laydown yard

In general, the following will be stored in the laydown
yard.
5.1.7.1 Valves (>2")

Large bore valves will be stored outside, in the sheltered area, and according to tagging etc. as
indicated in item A6 above.
5.1.7.2 Fittings (>2")

They will be stored outside
considering:
 Type of fitting (elbows, tees etc.).
 Material specification and color coding.
 Size and schedule.
 Fittings will be laid in such a way as to avoid collection of water.
5.1.7.3 Piping (>=2")

Bulk piping material will be laid on transverse sleepers and securely
wedged.
5.1.7.4 Unit Materials

Minor Equipment Items will be stored in the yard until their foundations are ready to be loaded or
until the schedule calls for, whereas main equipment items (e.g. heavy columns, heavy equipment
etc.) will directly be unloaded from the transportation vehicles on site, as adjacent as possible to
their final position.
All large items shall be adequately protected and supported by dunnage to facilitate slinging, and to
avoid contact with the ground.
5.1.7.5 Fabricated Steelwork
See paragraph
5.1.1.
AUTHORISATION.
JOB SPEC : 1BD0955A -07A4.01
PAGE : 7 of 26
REV. : C00
SITE MATERIAL
MANAGEMENT
5.1.7.6 Bulk Steel Shapes

See paragraph 5.1.1.
5.1.7.7 Electrical and Instrument Cable

They will be stored in a separate compound.
5.1.8 Storage and handling of cement lined piping (by Civil Contractor)
Particular care shall be given to storage and handling of cement lined piping:
 Fork lifts shall not be used for loading and unloading bundles of pipes and fittings.
 Cement lined pipes shall be stacked in parallel fashion. Straw filled sacks or equivalent
shock-absorbing materials shall be provided and placed every 1-1,5 meters in longitudinal
direction of pipes so as to keep pipes separated.
 Pipes shall always be supported, so as to avoid excessive flexure, bending or deflection,
during storing, laying and transportation. Supports shall be longitudinally placed every
about 1.5 m for pipe 6” and smaller and every about 2.0 m for larger pipe.
 The ends of stored pipes shall be protected against impacts by mean of wood panels fixed
on ground at a distance of about 0,5 meters from the pipes.
 Lined pipes/fittings shall not be run over by vehicles or by people.
 It is forbidden to handle any lined pipe/fitting by rolling.
 It is forbidden to handle any lined pipe/fitting using its ends as lifting points (i.e. for hooks
or forks).
 Not flanged ends of lined pipe/fitting shall be protected by means of caps.
 Flanged ends of lined pipe/fitting shall be protected by means of wood discs, bolted or
firmly fixed to the flange.
 Branch connections (flanged and not) shall be protected as described in previous points.
5.2 SITE MATERIAL CONTROL DOCUMENTS

5.2.1 Site material control documents
Site Material Controller shall be responsible for all material from the time it is received on site until
has been issued to the Contractor, handed over to the Owner or disposed of as scrap or surplus.
The Site shall maintain their accountability records in four (4) distinct groups, viz.:
1 Purchase Orders.
2 Master Files which are maintained in sequential order and where applicable with copies on
their relevant Purchase Order file.
 Receipts
 Discrepancy Report
 Receiving Check Lists IN-1
 Material Receipt Slips IN-2
 Allocations and Issues

 Availability Check Requests and Reports
 Material Issue Requests (FIELD MATERIAL MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM) OG-1.
AUTHORISATION.
JOB SPEC : 1BD0955A -07A4.01
PAGE : 8 of 26
REV. : C00
SITE MATERIAL
MANAGEMENT
 Material issue Requests Summary (FIELD MATERIAL

MANAGEMENT SYSTEM) OG-2.
3 Material Control Logs which are maintained in sequential order and for the group control of
various activities.
 Receipts
 Daily Receiving Record MRS LOG
 Daily Receiving Reports
 Discrepancy Report Log
 HO Material Progress Schedule MPS
 Stock Records
 Stock Records
 Quality Control
 PMI Report
 Records of Allocations and Issues per Drawing/Line
These records are held within Field Material Management System and are
available as visual display or print-out.
 Master Files of Material Test Certificates
All Chemical Analysis and Mechanical Test Certificates, and Letters of
Conformity shall be marked with the Purchase Order Number and the
Requisition Item Number against which the material was supplied. In
addition, Certificates for material which is subject to spectroscopic checks
as part of the Positive Material Identification (PMI) Procedure, shall be
marked with the PMI Report Number.
Following acceptance of certification and related material by the Material
Controller, the Test Certificates shall be filed as follows:
 PMI Material: One (1) copy in a PMI Certification Master File (only
for PMI made at Warehouse). One (1) copy in the related Material
requisition File.
 NON-PMI Materials: All copies in the related Material Requisition
File.
4 Material Disposal Files which contain records of how surplus material and spares have
been disposed of towards the completion of the Project.
AUTHORISATION.
JOB SPEC : 1BD0955A -07A4.01
PAGE : 9 of 26
REV. : C00
SITE MATERIAL
MANAGEMENT
5.3 MASTER CONTROL OPERATIONS

5.3.1 W arehouse receiving
5.3.1.1 Receipt of a Consignment
All consignments shall be received in a designated reception Area for inspection and checking
against documents.
On arrival of a delivery vehicle at the Warehouse Receiving Point the Material Controller shall
carry out the following procedure:
 Ensure that the driver hands-over all the related delivery documents.
 Examine the Advice or Consignment Note to confirm that the Consignment is intended for
the Project.
 Conduct a package count and check for visible damage to packaging or goods wherever
possible prior to offloading. In cases of damage or loss the delivery order must be signed
for receipt with reservation indicating briefly the respective damage or
loss.
 The Purchase Order Number shown on each Supplier's Advice Note or Packing List shall
be keyed-in at the Field Material Management System Warehouse terminal in order to
produce a RECEIVING CHECK LIST (IN-1, see Attachment 5).
 The Carriers delivery note shall be stamped "Received by Amec FW- Unexamined"
number, then dated and signed.
 Record the details of each Consignment on the DAILY RECEIVING REPORT (see
Attachment 1, FLD080).
5.3.1.2 Receiving Bulk Materials, Other than Pipe

All deliveries shall be unloaded in the Receiving Area.
It shall be the responsibility of the Amec FW Site Material Controller to generate the RECEIVING
CHECK LIST (IN-1).
5.3.1.3 Detailed Receiving Checks (Inspection)

The Amec FW Site Material Controller shall withdraw a copy of the relevant Purchase Order from
the Site Material Control File.
He shall identify all delivered items against their related Purchase Orders and Material
Requisitions, and check material received for compliance with:
 Specifications Certification and Quantities as in the Supplier's Packing List,
Advice/Delivery Note.
 Specifications, Certification, and Marking as in the Purchase Order and Requisition,
including Material Colour Coding - In particular a check shall be provided to ensure that
valve have plate with AMEC FW commodity
code-
Failure by the Supplier to supply the required certification or to carry out the required
marking constitutes a dis¬crepancy.
Where a discrepancy relating to certification or marking is discovered, the detailed
receiving check of the subject items shall continue in order that possible additional
dis¬crepancies can be reported simultaneously.
 Quantities due in accordance with the marked-up record copy of the Purchase Order or
RECEIVING CHECK LIST as applicable.
AUTHORISATION.
JOB SPEC : 1BD0955A -07A4.01
PAGE : 10 of 26
REV. : C00
SITE MATERIAL
MANAGEMENT
Where the material received is subject to Overage, Shortage or Damage, immediate

action shall be taken in accordance with the procedure for Handling Material
Discrepancies, see section D.
Material shall be held in quarantine pending receipt of correct certification etc. and the
cancellation of the DISCREPANCY REPORT.
5.3.1.4 Completion of Inspection

Following satisfactory receiving checks, the Material Controller shall endorse the RECEIVING
CHECK LIST (IN-1).
The original Mill Certificates that arrive with the goods become an integral part of the system after
the Material Controller has checked them as being satisfactory.
Amec FW warehouse staff shall carry out quantity checks, store the material and sign the
completed RECEIVING CHECK LIST (IN-1).
The Amec FW Site Material Controller shall enter the PMI Report, Mill Test Certificates, Vendor
Advice Note and signed (IN-1) into the system’s records and files.
5.3.1.5 Receiving Check List

Following the acceptance, by the system, of the entered Purchase Order Number, the Visual
Display Unit (VDU) will display details of all the items covered by the Purchase Order including
delivery status to-date. This allows comparison with the delivery documents and verification of the
quoted Amec FW Purchase Order Number and the Supplier's identity.
Having verified the Purchase Order Number, the operator is required to key-in the Supplier's
Advice or Packing Note Number.
The RECEIVING CHECK LIST (IN-1) shall be used by the Amec FW Site Material Controller to
record details of receipt relating to a single delivery per Supplier Advice or Packing Note Number,
against the respective Purchase Order.
 Quantity Advised: per item on Supplier Advice or Packing Note.
 Quantity Received Good: fully acceptable for use.
 Quantity Received Bad: includes all forms of discrepancy.
 Test Certificates Received: YES/NO.
 Bin Location/s:Separate location for discrepancy (Quarantine Bin).
 Discrepancy Report Number (Where applicable).
5.3.1.6 Recording Receipts

When receipt details from the RECEIVING CHECK LIST are entered, the system generates a
MATERIAL RECEIPT SLIP (IN-2). This bears the same serial number as the related (IN-1) and
records details of Material reported as "Received Good" and respective Bin/Storage Locations. It
also records details of any material reported as "Received Bad" and the related Discrepancy
Report Number.
Generation of the MATERIAL RECEIPT SLIP (IN-2) updates the warehouse "Free Stock" records
in line with the "Received Good" quantities. Details of items "Received Bad" and their storage
location are recorded in a Damaged Material Suspense File.
The MATERIAL RECEIPT SLIP (IN-2), once signed by the Site Material Controller, is the
confirmation of material' receipt at Site, enabling the HO Procurement Group and Accounts
AUTHORISATION.
JOB SPEC : 1BD0955A -07A4.01
PAGE : 11 of 26
REV. : C00
SITE MATERIAL
MANAGEMENT
Departments to update their records. In addition to its serial number, the (IN-2) bears a sequential
delivery number against the related Purchase Order.
The System maintains a record of MATERIAL RECEIVING CHECK LIST (IN-1) numbers,
identifying those against which matching MATERIAL RECEIPT SLIPS (IN-2) have yet to be
produced. Daily monitoring of this 'Outstanding MRS Record' shall be carried out by the Amec FW
Site Material Controller and checked against the DAILY RECEIVING REPORT (see Attachment 1,
FLD080) prior to its distribution.
5.3.1.7 Daily Receiving Report

Upon receipt of completed MATERIAL RECEIPT SLIPS (IN-2), the Site Material Control action
them as follows:
 Transfers the relevant details from the MATERIAL RECEIPT SLIPS to the DAILY
RECEIVING REPORT (CON-M4);
 Distributes copies of the MATERIAL RECEIPT SLIPS and any related DISCREPANCY
REPORTS. (Distribution in accordance with Coordination Procedure).
5.3.1.8 Major Equipment Direct to Site Location

Whenever practicable, major items of equipment, not to be installed on PAU/PAR, shall be
received at the Warehouse and re-directed to the appropriate site lo-cation for unloading on to
prepared foundations. This simultaneous receiving and issuing operation shall be documented as
follows:
 A MATERIAL RECEIVING CHECK LIST (IN-1) shall be prepared to record receipt of the
item.
 This shall be signed by the AmecFW Material Controller and the Construction Contractor
responsible for the erection of the item, upon receipt on site.
 The entry of receipt details to system records shall be consistent with standard procedures.
The "Bin Location" entered shall indicate the warehouse issuing the receipt and that a
direct delivery was made.
 A Demand MIR (OG-1, see Attachment 7 and 8) shall be processed to maintain FIELD
MATERIAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM records.
5.3.1.9 Recording Receipts (Resolution of Discrepancies)

Adjustment of the records for "Received Bad" materials is required
when:
 The Bad Material is returned to the Supplier
 The Discrepancy is resolved and material can be taken into usable stock
 The Bad Material is declared as scrap.
In order to adjust the "Received Damage" status of this material as in (1), (2) or (3) above, it is
requested to generate first a RECEIVING CHECK LIST (IN-1), using the applicable Purchase
Order number and the Supplier's Advice Note number against which the subject material was
delivered.
The details entered as the "Delivery Identity" depend on the type of adjustment,
viz.:
 When the Discrepancy has been resolved, the words "DISCREPANCY NO. RESOLVED"
shall be entered.
AUTHORISATION.
JOB SPEC : 1BD0955A -07A4.01
PAGE : 12 of 26
REV. : C00
SITE MATERIAL
MANAGEMENT
 When material is being returned to the Supplier, the serial number of the covering ADVICE
NOTE shall be entered followed by the words "RETURN TO SUPPLIER".
 When the bad material is declared as scrap, the words "TO SCRAP" shall be entered,
followed by the reference of the document authorizing the action.
The entry of the appropriate explanatory reference in the "Delivery Identity" field provides an
important audit record.
Removal of material from the "Received Bad" suspense file is achieved by entering the requisite
quantity in the "RECEIVED BAD" cell, and the relevant Discrepancy Report Number on the IN-1.
Entry of these details in the system will generate an additional MATERIAL RECEIPT SLIP sub-part
bearing all the explanatory references.
Where the discrepancy has been resolved and the material is to be taken into usable warehouse
stock, a new IN-1 sub-part is generated. This is used to adjust the "RECEIVED BAD" quantity and
to report the rectified material as "RECEIVED GOOD" with its revised warehouse storage location.
The resultant MATERIAL RECEIPT SLIP sub-parts (IN-2) will record details of both transactions
and at the same time close the related DISCREPANCY REPORT.
Where the Bad Material is declared as scrap, no further system operations are required following
the transfer to the scrap location.
In all the above cases, copies of all the MATERIAL RECEIPT SLIPS sub-parts generated shall be
distributed in accordance with the Project Coordination Procedure.
5.3.1.10 Site Material Control Checks

The Site Material Controller shall perform daily checks on the DAILY RECEIVING REPORT (see
Attachment 1, FLD080) and DISCREPANCY REPORT LOG (see Attachment 3 and 4), in order to
ensure that correct maintenance, updating and distribution procedures are being followed.
5.3.2 Piping Material Planning

The FIELD MATERIAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM is used not only for the management of the
warehouse but also for an efficient and profitable management of the piping bulk material by
matching the available bulk material with the available piping engineering documentation. The
FIELD MATERIAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM is therefore used also by the site construction
planning and Site Material Coordination.
5.3.2.1 Piping Work Schedules

FIELD MATERIAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM is designed to provide assistance and information’s
based on engineered Drawing requirements, material receipts and issues and planned execution
of construction activities.
FIELD MATERIAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM availability checking and allocation facilities in the
field shall be used to establish planned work schedules based on proven and secured availability
of material requirements.
Material Availability Checks shall be carried out against the engineered material categories
requirements of Drawings or Drawings and Lines forming each Contractor's proposed work
schedule as determined by the Construction Plan. Once proven the full availability of material, the
same shall then be allocated for issue against the specified Drawing/Line numbers and the work
AUTHORISATION.
JOB SPEC : 1BD0955A -07A4.01
PAGE : 13 of 26
REV. : C00
SITE MATERIAL
MANAGEMENT
schedule confirmed. Partial allocation is possible on a case by case basis subject to the verbal /
written approval of the Construction Manager.
The System records the allocation of material categories to the Drawing/Line numbers and reduces
the warehouse "Free Stock" accordingly. The allocation has a control number assigned and the
System generates documentation for issue bearing this number, a MATERIAL ISSUE REQUEST
(OG-1, see Attachment 7 and 8) for each Drawing and Line, a MATERIAL ISSUE REQUEST
SUMMARY (OG-2, see Attachment 9) covering the whole allocation and a MATERIAL ISSUE
REQUEST DRAWING DETAILS (OG-1+BOM Status, see Attachment 8).
The OG-1 is normally used for individual demand issues to Contractors. It may also be used to
check individual Drawing/Line quantities within a summarized total on MATERIAL ISSUE
REQUEST SUMMARY (OG-2).
The OG-2 is normally used for bulk issues to Fabricators and
Erectors.
As soon as full or part issues are made and recorded in the System, an updated MATERIAL
ISSUE REQUEST (OG-1) is generated showing the balance of the allocated quantity yet to be
issued.
The List of Material Categories for the Project is:
Field erection material
"F
"
Shop material "S"
Steam tracing material “H”
5.3.2.2 Material Availability Checks

 Action by the Amec FW Field Material System Engineer
The Amec FW Field Material System Engineer shall process the Drawing/Line numbers
and material category into the System. This will produce an AVAILABILITY REPORT (see
attached samples) consisting of:
 A list of Drawing/Line numbers for which material is 100% available,
indicating that at the time of the check, sufficient material was available to
permit allocation against the drawings and lines listed below.
 A list of Drawing numbers for which insufficient material is available to
allow allocation.
 A 'Consolidated List of Material' relating to the Drawing/Line numbers with
100% material availability.
 A consolidated list of material for Drawing/Line numbers on which
shortages exist.
 Where the AVAILABILITY REPORT (STAT-2) identifies Draw¬ings/Lines
which are not suitable for planned allocation due to non-availability of
material it also lists the items and quantities which are not available.
5.3.2.3 Evaluation of the AVAILABILITY REPORT

 Action by Construction Planning Engineer
The Construction Planning Engineer shall review the AVAILABILITY REPORT with the
Construction Manager and shall decide on which Drawing/Lines they wish work to proceed.
5.3.2.4 Allocation of Material

The Amec FW Field Material System Engineer shall process the Drawing/Line numbers on the
report into the system as follows:
AUTHORISATION.
JOB SPEC : 1BD0955A -07A4.01
PAGE : 14 of 26
REV. : C00
SITE MATERIAL
MANAGEMENT
 A pre-allocation availability check is automatically carried out as the first stage of allocation.
Material will be allocated to Drawings/Line with 100% Material availability.
 Where material for a Drawing/Line cannot be al-located in total due to non-availability of
material, it is possible to proceed with a partial allocation and issue of available material if
authorized by the Construction Manager. Non-available items shall be entered on the
FIELD MATERIAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM Shortages File, where they will be
automatically matched with subsequent material receipts.
 Following an allocation the System generates individual MATERIAL ISSUE REQUESTS
(OG-1) for each Drawing/Line number showing details of the allocated material, MCC
Number, description, quantity and storage location.
Additionally, when an allocation consists of multiple Draw¬ing/Line numbers a MATERIAL ISSUE
REQUEST SUMMARY (OG-2) is generated which consolidates and details the material allocated
in one batch.
The MIR’s will bear a number assigned by the
System.
Piping drawings (isometrics, etc.) are supplied to Contractors without Bill of Material (BOM). For
drawing for which all materials are available the OG1 represents also the BOM for the category of
material being used.
5.3.2.5 Confirmation of Allocation

Amec FW Field Superintendent will receive an endorsed copy of the MATERIAL ISSUE REQUEST
(OG-1) for each Drawing/Line within his allocation. He shall also receive a copy of the MATERIAL
ISSUE REQUEST SUMMARY (OG-2) for the withdrawal of material. This shall be marked up to
show the requested quantity and the signature of the AMEC FW Superintendent authorizing the
Contractor to requests the issue at the warehouse.
One copy of each MIR (OG-1) and MIR SUMMARY (OG-2) shall be retained on the Site Material
Control Master File under Contractor name.
One copy shall be passed to the Warehouse issues Section and the material prepared for issue
and one copy to be done at the Contractor.
5.3.2.6 Shortages (Non-availability of material)

Critical shortages shall be recorded together with the Drawing/Line Number and Area Code for
which the item/s are required. The Shortages File can be printed and utilised to target expediting
effort by the Construction planning and/or Material Coordination.
5.3.3 Issues of piping m aterial

5.3.3.1 Preparation for Issue (Bulk Material)
One copy of the MATERIAL ISSUE REQUEST SUMMARY (OG-2) and one copy of each
MATERIAL ISSUE REQUEST (OG-1) shall be passed to the Amec FW Site Material Controller.
Material shall be prepared for issue, either in bulk per SUMMARY MATERIAL ISSUE REQUEST
(OG-2) or individually per Drawing/Line using the MATERIAL ISSUE REQUEST (OG-1).
The Amec FW Site Material Controller shall retain his copy of the MIR on a live file. On
presentation of the authorized withdrawal copy he shall match his warehouse copy with that
presented by the Contractor.
AUTHORISATION.
JOB SPEC : 1BD0955A -07A4.01
PAGE : 15 of 26
REV. : C00
SITE MATERIAL
MANAGEMENT
5.3.3.2 Issue (Bulk Materials)

Contractors, behind Amec FW warehouse’s personnel, shall counter check and collect their
material from the Warehouse or relevant Laydown Yard.
All issues of bulk materials are made against specifical
locations.
The System produced MATERIAL ISSUE REQUEST (OG-1) or MATERIAL ISSUE REQUEST
SUMMARY (OG-2) requires entry of requested quantities and an approved authorizing signature
before submission for issue of material. Authorization shall be by the Construction Manager or a
nominated Amec FW representative.
The MATERIAL ISSUE REQUEST (OG-1) issued by Amec FW Construction Planning Engineer to
the Field Superintendent shall be used by the Contractor to request issue of material.
Details of material issued shall be recorded on both Contractor and Warehouse copy together with
the signature of the issuing officer and the recipient.
Details of material issued are entered into the System by Site Material Controller from the signed
issue copy of the MATERIAL ISSUE REQUEST (OG-1) or MATERIAL ISSUE REQUEST
SUMMARY (OG-2) as applicable. This updates the System's stock and allocation
records.
As a general rule Contractor will have to withdraw in one lot all the materials listed in the OG-
1/OG-
2. Where this does not occur the following will
apply:
The material will be clearly identified by MIR number and kept, as far as possible, separate from
other stored materials. The Contractor will not be permitted to withdraw other MIR’s / materials
until any backlog has been cleared.
Following the entry of the issue details the System generates an updated OG-1 or OG-2 showing
the current issue status including any balance of the allocation to issue.
Copies of the updated MATERIAL ISSUE REQUEST (OG-1) shall be marked up and distributed in
the same way as the original, allowing subsequent part issues to be made until the allocation is
expended.
5.3.3.3 Overage Issues of Pipe

 Definition of Pipe Overage
The issue of pipe in excess of the allocated MTO and cutting allowance quantity. This
applies to a single or batch of Drawing requirements. Pipe overage can only be accurately
measured at the time of the final issue within a
batch.
 Control of Overage Issues of Pipe
It shall be the policy of the AMEC FW Site Material Controller to keep overage issues of
pipe to a minimum and, where practical, eliminate them altogether.
 Recording the Issue of Pipe Overage
Overage issues shall be reported and recorded in such a way that by reference to the
system records, the overage held by each Contractor can be readily identified.
When completing the issue details on the MATERIAL ISSUE REQUEST (OG-1) or (OG-2)
the Amec FW Site Material Controller shall enter the total quantity issued. Where this
figure exceeds the quantity shown in the column headed "Allocated Quantity", an overage
issues has been made and the overage quantity shall be entered in the column headed
“Rounded”.
The Amec FW Site Material Controller and the Recipient shall sign the MIR confirming
both the issue and receipt of the quantities recorded.
The Recipient has signed for the total quantity received including any overage of pipe.
When reporting to the System that the (OG-1) or (OG-2) has been issued the System will
AUTHORISATION.
JOB SPEC : 1BD0955A -07A4.01
PAGE : 16 of 26
REV. : C00
SITE MATERIAL
MANAGEMENT
record the quantities issued. The difference between the Planned Allocation quantity and
that actually issued, i.e., the Pipe Rounding will be recorded by the System.
 Monitoring Contractor Pipe Overage Holdings
Regular monitoring of pipe overages held by each Contractor shall be carried out by Site
Material Coordination.
 Return of Overage
Amec FW Site Material Controller shall at appropriate intervals prepare MATERIAL
RETURN ADVICE notes calling on the Contractor to return surplus material to the Amec
FW Warehouse.
5.3.3.4 Material Returns

Amec FW Site Material Controller shall prepare a communication to notify the Fabrication/Erection
Contractor and the Fabrication Superintendent that the material specified is to be returned to the
nominated Amec FW Warehouse without delay.
Three (3) copies of the communication shall be forwarded to the Construction Manager or AMEC
FW Field Superintendent, as appropriate, for action by the Contractor.
One (1) copy shall be retained in a MATERIAL RETURN Master File per Sub-
Contractor/Area.
The Fabrication or Erection Contractor shall return the specified material together with two (2)
copies of the MATERIAL RETURN ADVICE showing details of material being returned to the
nominated Warehouse.
It must be recognized that return of all the requested items may be impractical. When this is the
case, the Fabricator or Erection Contractor shall endorse the item/s accordingly on the MATERIAL
RETURN ADVICE. This endorsement requires the signed approval of the responsible Amec FW
Superintendent.
All returned material shall be inspected before acceptance into usable stock. If required alloy
piping materials shall be subject to PMI re-check. Each item on the MATERIAL RETURN
ADVICE shall be endorsed by the inspector indicating whether suitable for subsequent use or
scrap.
Rejected items shall be clearly marked as SCRAP and all returned material shall remain in
quarantine pending update of FIELD MATERIAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM records. One (1)
signed receipt copy of the MATERIAL RETURN ADVICE shall be returned to the Contractor via
the Amec FW Field Superintendent.
One (1) signed receipt copy shall be retained by Amec FW Site Material Controller for subsequent
action and filing.
 Recording the Return Transaction.
The Amec FW Site Material Controller receipt copy of the MATERIAL RETURN ADVICE shall be
considered for action as follows:
 Recover of all Surplus and Not Required items using the System Return materials
features. The System will record these items as returned to stock.
AUTHORISATION.
JOB SPEC : 1BD0955A -07A4.01
PAGE : 17 of 26
REV. : C00
SITE MATERIAL
MANAGEMENT
5.3.4 Pipe Fabrication

5.3.4.1 Batch issue Procedure
Shop fabrication material shall be issued to each piping Contractor in batches, against specified
drawings, in accordance with the project fabrication program.
In principal only drawings for which Shop material is 100% available shall be confirmed for batch
allocation and issue, partial allocation can be made with prior approval of the Construction
Manager.
5.3.4.2 Action by Contractor on Receipt of Material

On arrival of each consignment at his works the Contractor shall immediately carry out a detailed
receiving check of the material against the accompanying documentation.
The Contractor shall sign and return one (1) receipt copy of the MATERIAL ISSUE REQUEST
(OG-2) to the Amec FW Site Material Controller at the AMEC FW Warehouse.
The Contractor shall note any discrepancies on the receipt copy of the MATERIAL ISSUE
REQUEST (OG-2)
5.3.4.3 Contractor' Requests for Additional Material

Valid grounds for requesting additional material
are:
 MTO errors.
 Revisions to Isometrics.
 Field modifications authorized by AMEC FW.
5.3.5 Material lost or damaged by the Contractor (costs shall be recovered from the Contractor).
To obtain additional material, the Contractor shall prepare and submit a manual MATERIAL ISSUE
REQUEST (Fill-up type). Each list shall record the additional requirements for a single
Drawing/Line and shall include details as follows:
 The MCC number and quantity of each item requested.(if known)
 The Drawing/Line number for which the material is required.
 The reference number of the MATERIAL ISSUE REQUEST SUMMARY (OG-2) which
covered the batch issue of Shop material for the subject Drawing/line.
The request for additional material shall be approved by the AMEC FW Field Engineer and the
All issues of additional material shall be reported back to the Engineering MTO
Groups.
5.3.6 Issues of Material Different from piping

No FIELD MATERIAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM planned allocation is made for materials and
drawings different from the bulk piping one (in line instruments, equipments, etc.). For such
material the Contractor will prepare manual withdrawal endorsed by the appointed speciality
Supervisors/Field superintendent. Such manual withdrawal slips will be converted in a FIELD
MATERIAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM generated OG-1 by the Site Material Controller.
On the basis of the above OG-1 Site Material Controller will issue the material to Contractor having
the OG-1 signed for receipt. It will be the duty of the specialty supervisor to check overage
AUTHORISATION.
JOB SPEC : 1BD0955A -07A4.01
PAGE : 18 of 26
REV. : C00
SITE MATERIAL
MANAGEMENT
availability and if it is the case, via Field Engineering issue a field Material Requisition to replenish,
if any, the overage. Back charges to Contractors for loss or damaged material as well as return to
warehouse of unused material will be handled as per item.
5.3.7 Inventory checks

Site Material Controller shall ensure regular inventory checks. Frequency shall be dictated by
project needs and quality of stored material. As a general rule, a full inventory check shall be
performed on a monthly basis as a minimum.
Selected inventory checks for special material may be conducted more
frequently.
It is preferable to suspend all FIELD MATERIAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM operations and
materials withdrawn from warehouse during the execution of the inventory check in order to
facilate the check.
Inventory check shall be conducted against FIELD MATERIAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM Site
Material Status Report (see para B1.2).
Free stock and unused surplus indicated in FIELD MATERIAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM report
shall be physically checked in all warehouse location. Any discrepancy shall be duly reported and
action to be defined and implemented to close the incongruity.
Site Material Controller shall ensure and maintain auditable records of all material received, the
related storage location and performed inventory checks.
Executed checks shall be filed by dates and by MCC cost code/sequential
letter/number.
At the end of the construction activities and before dismantling the warehouse, Site Material
Controller (or other delegated by the Construction Manager or Project Manager) shall conduct the
final inventory check. The final check report shall be handed over to Construction Manager.
5.4 MATERIAL DISCREPANCIES

5.4.1 Introduction
Discrepancies may be discovered at any time during the Warehouse material receiving and
subsequent control operations.
Discrepancies normally fall into the following main
categories:
5.4.1.1 Overages
Where the quantity of material delivered exceeds the Purchase Order quantity, or the quantity
shown on the Supplier's Advice/Delivery Note or Packing Note.
5.4.1.2 Shortages
 Where the quantity of material delivered is less than that shown on the Supplier's
Advice/Delivery Note or Packing Note.
 Where material supplied does not meet the Specification stated in the Purchase Order
and/or Requisition. This includes defective material.
 Where the Supplier fails to comply with the Purchase Order requirements with respect to
certification, identification, marking or protective treatment.
AUTHORISATION.
JOB SPEC : 1BD0955A -07A4.01
PAGE : 19 of 26
REV. : C00
SITE MATERIAL
MANAGEMENT
5.4.1.3 Damage or Loss

Which may result from action or negligence on the part
of:
 The Supplier.
 The Carrier.
 The Fabricator or Erection Contractor.
This procedure details the methods by which material discrepancies shall be recorded and
subsequently handled at the material receiving point and in the Home Office.
Discrepancies arising from damage or loss while being shipped by transport arranged by AMEC
FW trafic Department are referred to as "Shipping Discrepancies".
5.4.2 Receiving check

The majority of discrepancies will be found during the receiving check carried out by the
Warehouse Receiving section against Purchase Order, Requisition, Supplier's Advice/Delivery
Note or Packing List and Material Certification.
The receiving check shall comprise initial checking before the material is unloaded, and
subsequent detailed item checking. In the event of a discrepancy being detected while the material
is still on the transport, photographs shall be taken for record purposes. The detailed item check
shall cover quality as well as quantity.
Certain specified deliveries e.g., Hermetically-sealed Supplier-warranted items, may be exempted
from this detailed item check and related documents shall be so endorsed. A careful check shall be
made on the condition of the packing or containers of such items in order to identify and report any
possible damage at the time of the receiving check.
Both the quantity advised and the actual quantity of usable items received against an
Advice/Delivery Note and also the quantity of damaged, unusable or missing material or docu-
mentation shall be recorded on the MATERIAL RECEIPT SLIP
( IN-2 ) as
applicable.
Material received without certification as specified in the Purchase Order or order attachments
shall be rejected, and a Discrepancy Report issued even if the material itself appears to be
complete and undamaged (see Para. D5.4). Exception to the above can be authorized by the
5.4.3 Recording and Reporting of Discrepancies

5.4.3.1 Discrepancy Log
A DISCREPANCY LOG shall be maintained by the Site Material Control Group ascribing a serial
number to each discrepancy, giving a brief description, and recording the preparation of each
Report, the action taken and the status through to resolution. Copies of the Log shall be issued
montly to the AMEC FW Material Coordination and the Project Manager. The AMEC FW Material
Coordination shall ensure that details of HO action to resolve including re-order are entered in the
Log.
5.4.3.2 Transmit Advance Report

In advance of the issue of a Discrepancy Report, and to ensure that Supplier and/or Carrier receive
notification of the discrepancy within the statutory notification/claim period, email advice of the
AUTHORISATION.
JOB SPEC : 1BD0955A -07A4.01
PAGE : 20 of 26
REV. : C00
SITE MATERIAL
MANAGEMENT
discrepancy shall be issued immediately by the AMEC FW Site Material Controller, with copies as
applicable to:
 HO Procurement: Amec FW Procurement Coordinator or AMEC FW Site Material Coordin.
 Trafic: Amec FW Trafic Dept. or AMEC FW Site Material Coordinator
 Supplier: Despatch Manager/Accounts Department
 Carrier: Depot Manager
This email shall identify the discrepancy and shall quote the following references:
 Amec FW:
 Purchase Order Number
 Requisition Number
 Item Number
 Discrepancy Report Number
 Supplier
 Advice/Delivery Note Number
 Carrier
 Consignment Note Number
 Vehicle Number
The Amec FW Construction Manager shall be advised immediately of all discrepancies affecting
critical items and major equipment.
5.4.3.3 Discrepancy Report

Formal notification of a discrepancy shall be by the issue of a DISCREPANCY REPORT (sample
copy is attached) which shall be completed by the Site Material Controller at the place and time
that the discrepancy is discovered.
The serial number of the Discrepancy Report shall be entered on the relevant Material Receipt Slip
and Daily Receiving Report.
The Discrepancy Report shall be issued within three working days of receipt of the subject
material. It shall be supported by photographs, and a Technical Inspection Report where
applicable.
A Master File of Discrepancy Reports shall be maintained by the Site Material Coordination and
reviewed in conjunction with the Discrepancy Report Log.
5.4.3.4 Distribution of Discrepancy Report

Discrepancy Reports relating to local Purchase Orders will be copied to the Site Purchase Officer
and not to the HO Procurement.
Discrepancy Reports covering the receipt of damaged or defective Material will be distributed to
the AMEC FW HO Procurement and Field Engineer and will be accompanied by related
photographs and Field Engineering technical reports wherever applicable.
5.4.4 Notes on Handling Overages

5.4.4.1 Stocking of Overage Material
Overage material shall be taken into stock, pending written instruction from the Project Manager
regarding the return or retention of the subject material.
AUTHORISATION.
JOB SPEC : 1BD0955A -07A4.01
PAGE : 21 of 26
REV. : C00
SITE MATERIAL
MANAGEMENT
5.4.4.2 Items Fabricated by Contractor

The Subcontracts Administrator shall be advised when overages apply to deliveries of items
fabricated off site under contract.
5.4.5 Notes on Handling Shortages

5.4.5.1 Shortages against Supplier's Advice/Delivery Note
Where material appears to have been short shipped or lost in transit, immediate action shall be
taken to obtain replacements, as described in Para’s D3. and D8.
5.4.5.2 Material not in accordance with Purchase Order

Where the material supplied appears not to be as described in the Purchase Order or relevant
Requisition, the material shall be stored in a quarantine holding area. In case of doubt, the Amec
FW Field Engineering Manager or Field Project Engineer shall be requested to confirm
acceptability before action is taken with the Supplier.
If the material is incorrect, and it is agreed that it shall be returned to the Supplier, this shall be
done at Supplier's cost, under cover of an Amec FW ADVICE NOTE.
5.4.5.3 Unauthorized Material Substitution

Where there is no evidence that material substitution has been authorized, the material shall be
stored in a quarantine holding area pending confirmation.
Substitutions are discrepancies to be reported, unless written authority to accept the substitution
has been issued by Engineering and Procurement Group.
The material shall not be taken into stock until written confirmation has been obtained. If this is not
forthcoming the material shall be returned to the Supplier at his cost, under cover of an Amec FW
ADVICE NOTE.
5.4.5.4 Incomplete Certification

Where the Supplier fails to conform to Purchase Order require¬ments in respect to certification,
the related material shall be stored in a quarantine holding area pending receipt of proper
certification.
A record of all such material is maintained within FIELD MATERIAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM.
This record shall be regularly reviewed by the Site Material Controller in conjunction with the
Discrepancy Log.
The material shall not be taken into stock until certification is complete. If no certification is
forthcoming, the material shall be returned to the Supplier at his cost under cover of an Amec FW
ADVICE NOTE. Deviations to the above can be specifically authorized by the Construction
Manager.
5.4.5.5 Inadequate Material Identification Marking

Where the Supplier fails to conform to the Requirements of the Purchase Order and Requisition in
respect to:
 Material numbering or tagging (each valve must have nameplate with commodity code).
 Colour coding.
AUTHORISATION.
JOB SPEC : 1BD0955A -07A4.01
PAGE : 22 of 26
REV. : C00
SITE MATERIAL
MANAGEMENT
 Specification/treatment marking.
 Any other marking required by the Purchase Order.
Material shall be stored in a quarantine holding area pending rectification of the discrepancy by the
Supplier. If it is impractical for the Supplier to rectify the discrepancy and the material can be
positively identified, arrangements shall be made for remedial action to be taken at Supplier's cost,
by means of the Back charge Procedure.
A record of all such material is maintained within FIELD MATERIAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM.
This record shall be regularly reviewed by the Site Material Controller in conjunction with the
Discrepancy
Log.
The material shall not be taken into stock until the required identification marking has been
provided.
5.4.5.6 Inadequate Protection

In case the Supplier fails to comply with the requirements of the Purchase Order and Requisition in
respect of items such as protection against rust/corrosion and/or fitting of end caps and blanks.
 Equipment Susceptible to Damage
In case this type of discrepancy applies to items such as:
 Mechanical Equipment (e.g. Pumps, Compressors, Drivers, Heat
Exchangers, Lined Vessels, etc.)
 Electrical Equipment (e.g. Switchgear, Transformers, etc.)
 Instrumentation (e.g. Panels, MOV’s, etc.)
The discrepancy may have already caused damage by allowing the ingress of water,
sand etc.
All such discrepancies shall be referred to the Field Engineering Manager or Field
Project Engineer for a Technical Inspection Report. Where damage is found, the
damage discrepancy procedure shall be followed.
 Other Material and Equipment
In case this type of discrepancy applies to material or equipment other than the above
where no damage is apparent, the following action shall be taken:
 Temporary protection shall be fitted to prevent damage occurring before
correct protection is provided.
 Should the Supplier fail to rectify the discrepancy the Site Material
Controller shall ensure that the Equipment/Material is properly protected
and that the costs incurred are recovered from the Supplier, by means of
the Backcharge Procedure.
5.4.6 Notes on Handling Damage and Losses

5.4.6.1 General
When material is damaged or lost, it is important to establish who is responsible. Site Material
Controller has to establish, whenever possible:
 The cause of the damage or loss.
 The time when the damage or loss occurred.
 The responsible for the material at the time the damage or loss occurred.
AUTHORISATION.
JOB SPEC : 1BD0955A -07A4.01
PAGE : 23 of 26
REV. : C00
SITE MATERIAL
MANAGEMENT
It is essential to record accurately and report the extent of damage. The Discrepancy Report shall,
whenever possible, include photographs of the damaged items. Details of damage shall be
recorded on both the Carrier's and Amec FW copies of the Advice/Delivery Note.
Where damage or loss has occurred in the Warehouse/Laydown area or on the job site, the Site
Security Officer and Construction Manager shall be informed.
5.4.6.2 Caused by Supplier or by the Supplier's Negligence

Damage or loss of this nature may
comprise:
 That which occurred prior to acceptance by the Carrier and which is recorded on the
Carrier's Consignment Note. Such an endorsement provides supporting evidence in a
subsequent claim against the Supplier. The Receiving Warehouse personnel shall mark up
the Carrier's Delivery Note confirming the damage, with further detail if considered
necessary.
 That which has occurred in transit due to inadequate handling or packing by the Supplier.
 That which is discovered on opening an undamaged packing case.

5.4.6.3 Caused by Carrier or by the Carrier's Negligence
Damage or loss of this nature may
comprise:
 That which occurred due to mis-handling by the Carrier, and is visible upon delivery
 That which is subsequently discovered.
If the Carrier cannot prove otherwise, it shall be assumed that he is responsible for the damage. All
copies of the Carrier's Consignment Delivery Notes and the Supplier's Advice/Delivery Note shall
be marked up, clearly and precisely, detailing the damage involved, before signing for receipt.
5.4.6.4 Caused to Issued Material by Fabrication or Erection Contractor

This includes damage or loss while the material is in the custody of a Fabrication or Erection
Contractor when:
 The Fabricator/Erection Contractor is transporting material or fabricated items to or from
the AMEC FW warehouse or between their works and those of another
Fabricator/Contractor, or
 The material is in the Fabricator's works or Erection Contractor's work
area. This does not include loss by scrapping during the course of fabrication.
Where damage or loss involves a Fabrication Contractor, the Contractor shall be required to report
full details of damage or loss. The assigned AMEC FW Supervisor at the Fabrication works shall
countersign this report and ensure that copies are transmitted by the Fabricator to the Site Material
Controller and the Contracts Administrator in order that cost recovery procedures may be initiated.
5.4.7 Responsibility for Resolving Discrepancies

5.4.7.1 Discrepancies on Home Office Purchase Orders
The Procurement Group originating the Purchase Order is normally responsible for resolving
discrepancies believed to have occurred prior to delivery by the Supplier to the point specified in
the delivery terms. The responsibility for providing prompt and full advice of such discrepancies is
of the Site Material Control Group.
AUTHORISATION.
JOB SPEC : 1BD0955A -07A4.01
PAGE : 24 of 26
REV. : C00
SITE MATERIAL
MANAGEMENT
Under certain circumstances the Site Material Controller may wish to undertake the responsibility
of resolving the dis¬crepancy directly with the Supplier/Carrier. In such cases the Site
Material Controller shall advise the Procurement Group accordingly in the Discrepancy advice
email and Report, followed by copies of all subsequent related correspondence.
5.4.7.2 Discrepancies on Local Purchase Orders

These shall be resolved by the Site Material Controller in conjunction with Local Purchase
Officer.
5.4.7.3 Discrepancies discovered after Issue of a "Clean" Material Receipt Slip

Where discrepancies are found after a "clean" Material Receipt Slip has been issued for the
subject delivery, the responsibility for resolving the discrepancy with the Supplier is of the Site
Material Controller. The Procurement Group responsible for placing the related Purchase Order
will provide assistance as requested in order to secure prompt resolution of the discrepancy.
5.4.7.4 Damage or Loss caused by Fabrication or Erection Contractor

The responsibility for resolving the discrepancy is of the Construction Manager and Subcontract
Administrator. Damage or loss will normally be made good either directly by the Fabricator or
Erection Contractor, or by the Field Engineering Manager / Field Project Engineer, raising an
Insurance Requisition covering the purchase of replacement materials.
5.4.8 Discrepancy Report Distribution and Outline of Recipient Activities

5.4.8.1 Project Manager (HO)
Review overall action, using copy of DISCREPANCY REPORT
LOG.
5.4.8.2 Construction Manager (Site)

Review overall action, using copy of DISCREPANCY REPORT
LOG.
5.4.8.3 Site Material Controller / Site Material Coordination

 Establish nature and extent of discrepancy and enter discrepancy in the applicable
DISCREPANCY REPORT LOG.
 Provide advance advice of discrepancy by email, in case of shortage state whether
packing intact or damaged.
 Arrange survey by Insurance.
 Prepare and issue a detailed DISCREPANCY REPORT.This shall include a clear
statement as to:
 What action is required of HO recipients, including requirement of
replacement/s.
 What action, if any, has been taken by Site, including involvement of
Insurance Surveyor.
 Whether in the opinion of AMEC FW Chief Field Engineer and the
Insurance Surveyor the discrepancy is due to faulty packing.
 Whether material has been short packed, i.e., packaging intact.
AUTHORISATION.
JOB SPEC : 1BD0955A -07A4.01
PAGE : 25 of 26
REV. : C00
SITE MATERIAL
MANAGEMENT
The estimated cost of repairs or replacements, including overheads etc. as


applicable.
 Distribute the DISCREPANCY REPORT according to Project Coordination Procedure.
5.4.8.4 Field Engineering Manager / Field Project Engineer

 Determine with the Insurance Assessor or Supplier's Representative, as applicable,
whether:
 The discrepancy is apparently due to faulty packing.
 The damage is repairable and estimated costs.
 Replacement/s are required.
 Backcharge or Insurance Procedure applies.
 Advise Site Material Controller and Material Coordinator accordingly.
 Initiate cost recovery procedure, as appropriate, ensuring that all site costs directly
attributable to the discrepancy are taken into account.
5.4.8.5 Insurance Agent/Surveyor.

Where appropriate within the terms of the Project Insurance Cover and by arrangement with Site
Management, carry out an Insurance Survey at the advised location.
5.4.8.6 AMEC FW Procurement Group

 On receipt of a DISCREPANCY REPORT, arrange appropriate action to resolve
discrepancy with the Supplier, record action in DISCREPANCY REPORT LOG and advise
Site Material Coordination of action.
 Arrange placement of order for replacement Material Requisition.
 Monitor outstanding discrepancies in the Discrepancy Report Log.
6 RECORDS
Inspections and certifications shall be carried out in accordance with QC procedures and
Inspection and Test Plan.
CONTRACTOR shall issue testing and inspections documentation in accordance with the
approved QC forms.
AUTHORISATION.
JOB SPEC : 1BD0955A -07A4.01
PAGE : 26 of 26
REV. : C00
SITE MATERIAL
MANAGEMENT
7 ATTACHMENTS
 AMUSE sample documentation
1 MRS List (FLD080)
2 Discrepancy report
3 Discrepancy report log (by vendor)
4 Discrepancy report log (by MRS)
5 Material receiving check list (IN-1)
6 Material receiving slip (IN-2)
7 Material issue request OG-1
8 Material issue request (by warehouse) OG-1
9 Material issue request summary OG-2
10 Availability Check - Report
11 Availability Check - Allocation Summary
12 Availability Check - Allocation + BOM Details
15 Availability Check – Allocation: Shortage
16 Shortage summary
AUTHORISATION.
Printed on: 14 Jul 15
FLD080 - MRS List
Job : 1-BD-0711A
PO Warehouse Issue Arrival
MRS 00416 0 WHS OPTARA 08 Jul 15 08 Jul 15
GATE 4
(37) P IT011 PIPES, FITTINGS, FLANGES 11st MTO Pack. List : see the remarks
6500739991
82761357-82761358-82761355- 82761359-
82761356-82765278-82765281-82765284-82765292-82765294-82765297-82765300-82765286- 82765304-
82764497-827665302-827665303-827665304-82764497-82765302-82765303-82765304-82765286-82765303-8276530482765
286-8276305-82765917-
MRS 00415 0 WHS KAAI 473 08 Jul 15 08 Jul 15
BAAN 9
P IT026 STEEL STRUCTURES Pack. List :
6500750710
..\QRP\FLD080_080.qrp Printed on:14-07-2015 08:32:53 AM Page 1 of 1 AMUSE

MRS - 00061 / Discr. 7 12-Nov-2014
Contract : 1BD0711A DISCREPANCY Project : OPTARA PROJECT - Lot 3A
REPORT
Client : TOTAL RAFFINADERIJ Location : ANTWERP (BELGIUM)
ANTWERPEN
P.O. : P FORGED VALVES - 11st MTO Client PO : 6500744348 Warehouse : WHS OPTARA GATE
IT015 4
Supplier : B.F.E. S.R.L. BONNEY FORGE Mat'l arrived : 12-Nov-2014
TOTAL Optara Project Scheldelaan 16 (Gate 4) Kaai 447
2030 ANTWERPEN Belgium / TOTAL Optara Project / Scheldelaan 16 (Gate 4) Kaai 447 / 2030 ANTWERPEN / Belgium
see Discrepancy Report

Discrepancy : 7 Action By: Mantovani/Cavaldonat Due: 25-Nov-2014 Closed:
Failure : Ball valve arrives equipped with lever handle instead of handwheel .
Correction : Valves has to be replaced
Received Discrepancy
Material from PO Rev : 0 Lot PO qty Receiv. Qty Weight Discr. Qty Weight
1512B/03 Forged Carbon Steel Valves: Ball Type ASTM A105N (NORMALIZED) * ASME B16.34 / API 608 * ASME B16.10 * REGULAR PORT, END ENTRY. * 150# * RF * 125 - 250 AARH * BALL
VALVE, FLOATING BALL, FIRESAFE COSTR., ANTISTATIC DEVICE, ANTI-BLOW OUT STEM. * SS316 BALL AND STEM, PTFE SEATS AND
SEALS. * ASTM A193 Gr.B7 / ASTM A194 Gr.2H * SPIRAL WOUND SS316L / GRAPHITE * GRAPHITE PACKING * General Note: SEE ATTACHED
JOB SPEC. 51A1. *
003 1-1/2" HANDWHEEL OPERATOR * MAXIMUM DESIGN A 3 ... 3 27.0 kg 3 27.0 kg
TEMPERATURE = 200 deg.C
Unique Code : *
512BA.0011
MR 27.0 kg 27.0 kg
PO 0 27.0 kg 27.0 kg
Rev Received Discrepancy
Receiv. Qty Weight Discr. Qty Weight
Material from PO Rev : 2 Lot PO qty
1512B/05 Forged Carbon Steel Valves: Ball Type ASTM A105N (NORMALIZED) * ASME B16.34 / API 608 * ASME B16.10 * REGULAR PORT, END ENTRY. * 300# * RF * 125 - 250 AARH * BALL
VALVE, FLOATING BALL, FIRESAFE COSTR., ANTISTATIC DEVICE, ANTI-BLOW OUT STEM. * SS316 BALL AND STEM, PTFE SEATS AND
SEALS. * ASTM A193 Gr.B7 / ASTM A194 Gr.2H * SPIRAL WOUND SS316L / GRAPHITE * GRAPHITE PACKING * General Note: SEE ATTACHED
JOB SPEC. 51A1. *
001 3/4" HANDWHEEL OPERATOR * MAXIMUM DESIGN A 2 ... 2 kg 2 kg
TEMPERATURE = 200 deg.C
Unique Code : *
512BB.0011
MR 0.0 kg 0.0 kg
PO Rev 2 0.0 kg 0.0 kg

Received Discrepancy
Discrepancy 7 Total Weight 27.0 kg 27.0 kg
..\QRP\FLD080_6.qrp Printed on: 14-07-2015 08:35:50 Page 1 of AMUSE
AM
1
Printed on : 14-Jul-2015
Contract : 1BD0711A Discrepancy Log (by Project : OPTARA PROJECT - Lot 3A
Vendor)
Client : TOTAL RAFFINADERIJ ANTW ERPEN Location : ANTW ERP (BELGIUM)
Weight
Issued W arehouse PO Mat'l Due Close Received Discrepancy
Arrival d
B.F.E. S.R.L. BONNEY FORGE
MRS - 00061 / 7 12-Nov-2014 WHS OPTARA P IT015 FORGED VALVES - 11st MTO 12-Nov-2014 25-Nov-2014 27.0 27.0 kg
GATE 4
Client PO : 6500744348
B.F.E. S.R.L. BONNEY FORGE By : Mantovani/Cavaldonat
Total Weight in this Report 27.0 27.0 kg

..\QRP\FLD080_8.qrp Printed on: 14-07- 08:36:54 Page 1 of AMUSE
2015 AM
1
Contract : 1BD0711A Discrepancy Log (by Project : OPTARA PROJECT - Lot 3A
MRS)
Client : TOTAL RAFFINADERIJ ANTW ERPEN Location : ANTW ERP (BELGIUM)
Weight
Issued W arehouse PO Mat'l Due Close Received Discrepancy
Arrival d
MRS - 00061 / 7 12-Nov-2014 WHS OPTARA P IT015 FORGED VALVES - 11st MTO 12-Nov-2014 25-Nov-2014 27.0 27.0 kg
GATE 4
Client PO : 6500744348
B.F.E. S.R.L. BONNEY FORGE By : Mantovani/Cavaldonat
Total Weight in this Report 27.0 27.0 kg

2015 AM
1
MRS - 00412 ./ 14-Jul-2015
Contract : 1BD0711A Material Receiving - CHECK LIST (IN-1) Project : OPTARA PROJECT - Lot 3A
ANTWERPEN
P.O. : P IT056 Client PO : 6500786363 Warehouse : WHS OPTARA GATE 4

Supplier : HANWEL BELGIUM NV Packing List : Mat'l arrived : 03-Jul-2015
Lot PO qty Received Balance GOOD BAD Damaged OOS Docs Receiving Weight
Checked by Date
Signature in this box applies to all pages
Material from PO Rev : 5

1596V/0 Material Requisition for Variable Spring Hanger
3
025 VSH-00-025 (VARIABLE SPRING HANGER) A 1 ... 1
Certificate Nr. :
Heat Nr. :
P.M.I. Nr. :
026 VSH-00-026 (VARIABLE SPRING HANGER) A 1 ... 1
Certificate Nr. :
Heat Nr. :
P.M.I. Nr. :
Received
AM
1
MRS - 00412 v" 03-Jul-
2015
Contract : 1BD0711A MATERIAL RECEIPT SLIP (IN- Project : OPTARA PROJECT - Lot 3A
2)
ANTWERPEN
P.O. : P IT056 Client PO : 6500786363 Warehouse : WHS OPTARA GATE 4

Supplier : HANWEL BELGIUM NV Packing List : Mat'l arrived : 03-Jul-2015
Lot PO qty Received Balance GOOD BAD Damaged OOS Miss Docs GOOD Weight
Material from PO Rev : 5
1596V/0 Material Requisition for Variable Spring Hanger
3
025 VSH-00-025 (VARIABLE SPRING HANGER) A 1 ... 1 INSIDE
026 VSH-00-026 (VARIABLE SPRING HANGER) 1 INSIDE

A 1 ...
AM
1
MIR - 00686 13-Jul-

2015
MATERIAL ISSUE REQUEST (OG-1)
Contract : 1BD0711A Allocation Type : Planned Project : OPTARA PROJECT - Lot 3A
Client : TOTAL RAFFINADERIJ ANTWERPEN Location : ANTWERP (BELGIUM)
From : WHS OPTARA GATE 4 >>>>>>> To : +FABRICOM-IREM

Eng. qty Calc. qty Shortage Surplus Allocated Qty Allocated Weight
Prepared by Authorized Date
by
Date
Signature in this box applies to all pages Signature in this box applies to all pages
Remark : MIR686 Mat. for iso 50362102 ( (Partial) )
BOM List Current Allocation Status 14-Jul-15
Type MR Status % (...) % (pipe)
Unit : 00 SA : 57 Drawing : HY50362102 Rev : 1 Object : HY5036 Shop D Partial 66.67% 100.00%
Unit : 00 SA : 57 Drawing : HY50362102 Rev : 1 Object : HY5036 Type : Shop
1541S/02 Carbon Steel Pipe: Seamless 006 6" SCH. STD 17.5 17.5 17.5 m 494.6 kg
B.E. *
ASTM A106 Gr. B * SMLS * * ASME B36.10M * SEE ATTACHED JOB SPEC 50A10/1. Unique Code : 541SG.AAEG
MODERATE WET H2S SERVICE. *
1551E/02 Carbon Steel BW Fittings: Non-Reducing 004 6" SCH. STD 6 6 6 ... 61.2 kg
ASTM A234 WPB * 90 DEGREES ELBOW LONG RADIUS * ASME B16.9 * SMLS * Unique Code : 551EF.AAHG
B.W. * SEE ATTACHED JOB SPEC 50A10/2. MODERATE WET H2S SERVICE. *
1551H/21 Carbon Steel SW/Thrd Fittings: Non-Reducing 001 3/4" 3 3 ... 0.0 kg
6000# *
ASTM A105N (NORMALIZED) * HALF COUPLING THREADED * ASME B16.11 * THDD Unique Code : 551Hf.AAAH
* SEE ATTACHED JOB SPEC 50A10/2. MODERATE WET H2S SERVICE.
* BOM 556.4 kg Allocated Weight 555.8 kg
Weight
99.89%
BOM(s) Total Weight 556.4 kg MIR Weight 99.89% 555.8 kg
2015 AM
1
MIR - 00684 13-Jul-

2015
MATERIAL ISSUE REQUEST (by Warehouse) (OG
Contract : 1BD0711A Allocation Type : Planned Project : OPTARA PROJECT - Lot 3A
From : WHS EXTERNAL OPTARA >>>>>>> To : +FABRICOM-IREM

Eng. qty Calc. qty Shortage Surplus Allocated Qty Allocated Weight
Prepared by Authorized Date
by
Date
Signature in this box applies to all pages Signature in this box applies to all pages
Remark : MIR684 Mat.for SC55473101 (Partial)
BOM List Current Allocation Status 14-Jul-15
Type MR Status % (...) % (pipe)
Unit : 00 SA : 57 Drawing : SC55473101 Rev : 1 Object : SC5547 Shop 0 Partial 33.33% 100.00%
Unit : 00 SA : 57 Drawing : SC55473101 Rev : 1 Object : SC5547 Type : Shop
1541S/03 Carbon Steel Pipe: Seamless 008 2" SCH. STD 2.5 2.5 2.5 m 13.6 kg
B.E. *
ASTM A106 Gr. B * SMLS * * ASME B36.10M * General Notes: SEE ATTACHED JOB Unique Code : 541SG.0003
SPEC. 50A10/1.
* WH = WHS 2.5 m Bin = OUTSIDE
EXTERNAL OPTARA
1551S/05 Carbon Steel Fittings: Swage Nipples 015 2" SCH. STD 3/4" SCH. 160 4 4 ... 0.0 kg
LEB-SEP *
ASTM A234 WPB * ECCENTRIC SWAGE * MSS SP-95 * SMLS * General Notes: SEE Unique Code : 551SF.0040
ATTACHED JOB SPEC. 50A10/2. *
1551W/04 Carbon Steel BW Fittings: Reinforcing Branches 001 3/4" SCH. 160 2" 4 4 4 ... 1.6 kg
ASTM A105N (NORMALIZED) * NIPOLET * MSS SP-97 * P.E. * General Notes: SEE Unique Code : 551Wf.0001
ATTACHED JOB SPEC. 50A10/2.
* WH = WHS OPTARA GATE 4 4 ... Bin = INSIDE
1561W/11 Carbon Steel Flanges: Welding Neck 001 2" SCH. STD 4 4 ... 0.0 kg
W.N. * ASTM A105N (NORMALIZED) * ASME B16.5 * 300# * RF * 125 - 250 AARH * Unique Code : 561Wb.0003
General Notes: SEE ATTACHED JOB SPEC. 50A10/3.
* BOM 35.2 kg Allocated Weight 15.2 kg
Weight
43.20%
BOM(s) Total Weight 35.2 kg MIR Weight 43.20% 15.2 kg
2015 AM
1
MIR - 00679 / 1 13-Jul-

2015
MIR Summary (Warehouse Pick List) (OG-2)
Allocation Type : Planned Project : OPTARA PROJECT - Lot 3A
Contract : 1BD0711A Location : ANTWERP (BELGIUM)
Client : TOTAL RAFFINADERIJ ANTWERPEN
From : WHS OPTARA GATE 4 >>>>>>> To : +FABRICOM-IREM

Eng. Qty Allocated Qty / Bin Weight Issued Qty Heat Nr. Received by
From : TOTAL Optara Project Scheldelaan 16 (Gate 4) To : COFIM - FABRICOM &
Kaai 447 IREM
2030 ANTWERPEN Belgium
TOTAL Optara Project
Scheldelaan 16 (Gate 4) Kaai
447
2030 ANTWERPEN
Belgium
Issued by Date Received by Date
Signature in this box applies to all Signature in this box applies to all pages
pages
MIR679 FIELD Partial Iso VHPS1600032102
1513G/0 Cast Low Alloy Steel Valves: Gate Type
2 ASTM A217 WC6 * API 600 / EN ISO 10434 * ASME B16.10 - LONG PATTERN * PRESSURE SEAL BONNET * 900# * B.W. * * PARALLEL
SEATS, FREE EXPANDABLE DOUBLE WEDGE, O.S. & Y. * API TRIM N.5 (FULL HARDFACED) * ASTM A193 Gr.B16 / ASTM A194 Gr.7 *
ACCORDING TO MANUFACTURER STD * GRAPHITE PACKING * General Note: ALL WELDS ON THE VALVE SHALL BE PWHT'ED; SEE
ATTACHED JOB SPEC. 51A1. *
003 12" SCH. 100 1 1 ... 1,451.0 kg

OUTSIDE
Unique Code : GEAR OPERATOR STYLE N * VALVE SHALL BE

513GE.AAAA EQUIPPED WITH BYPASS AND PRESSURE
EQUALIZATION DEVICE ACCORDING TO GS RM
PVA 203 § 4.9. *
1552H/03 Low Alloy Steel SW/Thrd Fittings: Non-Reducing

ASTM A182 F11 Cl.2 * PLUG EXAGONAL BAR STOCK L=75 m/m * ASME B16.11 * SCRD * General Notes: SEE ATTACHED JOB SPEC. 50A10/2. *
001 3/4" 1 1 ... OUTSIDE 0.2 kg
Unique Code : 552HF.0001
Report Total Weight 1,451.2 kg

2015 AM
1
12 Rows Populate
S,tart ALLOCATION
Warehouse Use? PliOfityl Oesciiption Site
Rema1ks
AREA 10 K473F 17 0 A1e.a destinated to Exchange1C9903
TOTAL f1uild MIR
K475AREA p; 0 Are destinated to cable drums storage TOTAL
MAGAZZINO !REM R: 0 Materiale inviato a Siracusa ma necessa1io a< TO TAL
POLDERDIJKWEG.T f?i 0 P,olde1dijkweg ,2030 Antwe1pen Belgio
TOTAL
-"C!_ (I _ t...t ::ol-.:.r;.:J. .-·o:"l"hn.A .t r 1./ fnt rn:r61 ,!;,lose
k'l
_
Availability Check ALLOCATION SUMMARY
Contract : 1BD0711A Ordered by Priority + BOM Unit/Area/Dwg./Obj. Project : OPTARA PROJECT - Lot 3A
ANTWERPEN
Reachable Allocation Previous Allocation
BOM Status % (...) % (pipe) Allocating Now Status% (...) % (pipe)
Free BOM(s) Selection Weight
Unit : 00 Area : 03
Unit :00 SA : 52 Drawing : IA60070303 Object : IA6007 Type : Field • Complete 100.00% 100.00% ---
Area :03 Rev : 1 Priority : 317.6 kg 100.00% 317.6 kg 317.6 kg kg
Unit : 00 Area : PR4
Unit :00 SA : 51 Drawing : 31007 Object : VHPS160003 Type : Field D Partial 50.00% ---
Area :PR4 Rev : S0 Priority : 2,725.2 kg 0.01% 0.2 kg 0.2 kg kg
Shortage Reachable Allocation Alloc. Now Previous Alloc.

BOM(s) Total Weight 3,042.8 kg 2,725.0 kg 317.8 kg 317.8 kg 0.0 kg
10.44% 10.44% 0.00%
AM
..\QRP\FLD080_51.qrp Printed on: 14-07-2015 08:57:29 Page
1 of 1 A
M
US
E
Availability Check ALLOCATION + BOM Details
ANTWERPEN
Unit : 00 Area : 03
Unit :00 SA : 52 Drawing : IA60070303 Object : IA6007 Type : Field • Complete 100.00% 100.00% ---
Qty Reachable Allocation Alloc. Now Shortage
1541G/01 Carbon Steel Pipe: Seamless Galvanized 002 1.1/2" SCH. XS 58.5 m • Complete 58.5 m 316.5 kg 58.5 m 316.5 kg m kg
ASTM A106 Gr. B * SMLS * GALVANIZED PER ASTM A53 * THREADED AND COUPLED 3000 LBS
ASME B36.10M * General Notes: SEE ATTACHED JOB SPEC. (NPT PER ASME B1.20.1) *
50A10/1. *
Unique Code : 541GG.0001 TOS :
1551F/11 Carbon Steel SW/Thrd Fittings: Reducing 002 1-1/2" 1 ... • Complete 1 ... 1.1 kg 1 ... 1.1 kg ... kg
ASTM A105N (NORMALIZED), GALV. IN ACCORDANCE TO ASTM 3000# *
A53. * FULL COUPLING THREADED * ASME B16.11 * THDD *
General Notes: SEE ATTACHED JOB SPEC. 50A10/2. *
Unique Code : TOS :
551Fg.0001
Unit : 00 Area : PR4
Unit :00 SA : 51 Drawing : 31007 Object : VHPS160003 Type : Field D Partial 50.00% ---
Area :PR4 Rev : S0 Priority : 2,725.2 kg 0.01% 0.2 kg 0.2 kg kg
Qty Reachable Alloc. Now Shortage
Allocation
1513G/02 Cast Low Alloy Steel Valves: Gate Type 004 16" SCH. 80 1 ... --- ... kg ... kg 1 ... 2,725.0 kg
ASTM A217 WC6 * API 600 / EN ISO 10434 * ASME B16.10 - LONG GEAR OPERATOR STYLE N * VALVE SHALL
PATTERN * PRESSURE SEAL BONNET * 900# * B.W. * * PARALLEL BE EQUIPPED WITH BYPASS AND
SEATS, FREE EXPANDABLE DOUBLE WEDGE, O.S. & Y. * API PRESSURE EQUALIZATION DEVICE
TRIM ACCORDING TO GS RM PVA 203 § 4.9.
N.5 (FULL HARDFACED) * ASTM A193 Gr.B16 / ASTM A194 Gr.7 *
* ACCORDING TO MANUFACTURER STD * GRAPHITE
PACKING * General Note: ALL WELDS ON THE VALVE SHALL
BE PWHT'ED; SEE ATTACHED JOB SPEC. 51A1. *
Unique Code : 513GE.AAAH TOS :
1552H/03 Low Alloy Steel SW/Thrd Fittings: Non-Reducing 001 3/4" 1 ... • Complete 1 ... 0.2 kg 1 ... 0.2 kg ... kg
ASTM A182 F11 Cl.2 * PLUG EXAGONAL BAR STOCK L=75 m/m *
ASME B16.11 * SCRD * General Notes: SEE ATTACHED JOB

SPEC. 50A10/2. *
Unique Code : TOS
552HF.0001 :
Shortage Reachable Alloc. Now Previous Alloc.
Allocation
BOM(s) Total Weight 3,042.8 kg 2,725.0 kg 317.8 kg 317.8 kg 0.0 kg
10.44% 10.44% 0.00%

AM
1
)itart ALLOCATION
!'!uild MIR
lose
.Start ALLOCATION
f!uild MIR
!;.lose
Availability Check ALLOCATION: Shortage
ANTWERPEN
Unit : 00 Area : 50
Unit :00 SA : 45 Drawing : SKL-JV-062 Object : SKL-JV-062 Type : Shop D Partial 33.33% 100.00% ---
1572S/06 Low Alloy Steel Stud Bolts 007 1/2" 70 8 ... -- ... kg ... kg 8 ... 0.8 kg
ASTM A193 Gr.B7 / ASTM A194 Gr.2H * ASME B1.1 * General mm -
Notes: SEE ATTACHED JOB SPEC. 50A10/4. WITH TWO
SEMIFINISHED HEAVY HEXAGONAL NUTS. *
Unique Code : 572SC.0001 TOS :
1574S/08 Semi-Metallic Gaskets: Spiral Wound To Fit Asme B16.5 006 1" 2 ... --- ... kg ... kg 2 ... 0.1 kg
Flanges
SPIRAL WOUND SS316 / GRAPHITE * GASKETS DIMENSIONS RF *
PER ASME B16.20; FLANGES DIMENSIONS PER ASME B16.5. * 4.5
mm * 150# * 3.2 mm THK. C.S. OUTER RING / SS316 INNER RING *
General Notes: SEE ATTACHED JOB SPEC. 50A10/4. *
Unique Code : TOS :
574SD.0001
Unit : 00 Area : 51
Unit :00 SA : 45 Drawing : 00011 Object : VENT Type : Shop D Partial 82.61% 100.00% ---
Area :51 Rev : S0 Priority : 106.3 kg 99.07% 105.3 kg 105.3 kg kg
1572S/06 Low Alloy Steel Stud Bolts 002 5/8" 95 mm 16 ... D Partial 12 ... 3.0 kg 12 ... 3.0 kg 4 ... 1.0 kg
ASTM A193 Gr.B7 / ASTM A194 Gr.2H * ASME B1.1 * General
Notes: SEE ATTACHED JOB SPEC. 50A10/4. WITH TWO
Unique Code : TOS
Unit : 00 Area : 90 572SC.0001 :
Unit :00 SA : 45 Drawing : 00012 Object : VENT Type : Shop D Partial 30.43% 100.00% ---
Area :90 Rev : S0 Priority : 108.3 kg 96.33% 104.3 kg 104.3 kg kg
Qty Reachable Alloc. Now Shortage
Allocation
1572S/06 Low Alloy Steel Stud Bolts 002 5/8" 95 mm 16 ... --- ... kg ... kg 16 ... 4.0 kg
ASTM A193 Gr.B7 / ASTM A194 Gr.2H * ASME B1.1 * General Notes:
SEE ATTACHED JOB SPEC. 50A10/4. WITH TWO

Unique Code : TOS :
Unit : 00 Area : P11 572SC.0001
Unit :00 SA : 55 Drawing : 09102 Object : HPS160020 Type : Field D Partial 98.18% ---
Area :P11 Rev : S2 Priority : 166.7 kg 49.60% 82.7 kg 82.7 kg kg
..\QRP\FLD080_51.qr p
Page 1 of Qt Reachable Alloc. Now Shortage
09:15:28 AM y Allocation
3
AMUSE
Shortage Summary
Contract : 1BD0711A Project : OPTARA PROJECT - Lot 3A
Missing Available SHORTAGE Shortage Weight
1511G/02 Cast Carbon Steel Valves: Gate Type
ASTM A216 WCB * API 600 / EN ISO 10434 * ASME B16.10 * BOLTED BONNET * 150# * RF * 125 - 250
AARH * FLEXIBLE WEDGE, O.S. & Y. * API TRIM N.5 (FULL HARDFACED) * ASTM A193 Gr.B7 / ASTM
A194 Gr.2H * SPIRAL WOUND SS316L / GRAPHITE * GRAPHITE PACKING * General Note: SEE
002 3" 1 1 ... 35.0 kg

Unique Code : 511GA.0035 HANDWHEEL OPERATOR *
35.0 kg

ASTM A217 WC6 * API 600 / EN ISO 10434 * ASME B16.10 - LONG PATTERN * PRESSURE SEAL
BONNET * 900# * B.W. * * PARALLEL SEATS, FREE EXPANDABLE DOUBLE WEDGE, O.S. & Y. * API
TRIM N.5 (FULL HARDFACED) * ASTM A193 Gr.B16 / ASTM A194 Gr.7 * ACCORDING TO
MANUFACTURER STD * GRAPHITE PACKING * General Note: ALL WELDS ON THE VALVE SHALL BE
PWHT'ED; SEE ATTACHED JOB SPEC. 51A1. *
004 16" SCH. 80 1 1 ... 2,725.0 kg

Unique Code : 513GE.AAAH GEAR OPERATOR STYLE N * VALVE
SHALL BE EQUIPPED WITH BYPASS AND PRESSURE EQUALIZATION
DEVICE ACCORDING TO GS RM PVA
203 § 4.9. *
2,725.0 kg
1551E/03 Carbon Steel BW Fittings: Non-Reducing
ASTM A234 WPB * 90 DEGREES ELBOW LONG RADIUS * ASME B16.9 * SMLS * B.W. * General Notes:
SEE ATTACHED JOB SPEC. 50A10/2. *
006 6" SCH. STD 10 10 ... 102.0 kg

Unique Code : 551EF.0012
102. kg
0
1551W/04 Carbon Steel BW Fittings: Reinforcing Branches
ASTM A105N (NORMALIZED) * NIPOLET * MSS SP-97 * P.E. * General Notes: SEE ATTACHED JOB
SPEC. 50A10/2. *
039 1-1/2" SCH. XXS 6" 2 2 ... 2.4 kg

Unique Code : 551Wf.0002
2.4 kg
1561B/02 Carbon Steel Flanges: Blind

ASTM A350 LF2 Cl.1 * ASME B16.5 * 300# * RF * 125 - 250 AARH * General Notes: SEE ATTACHED JOB
SPEC. 50A10/3. *
005 12" 1 1 ... 84.0 kg

Unique Code : 561BC.0002
84.0 kg
1561W/05 Carbon Steel Flanges: Welding Neck

W.N. * ASTM A350 LF2 Cl.1 * ASME B16.5 * 300# * RF * 125 - 250 AARH * General Notes: SEE ATTACHED
JOB SPEC. 50A10/3. *
010 12" SCH. STD 2 2 ... 128.0 kg

Unique Code : 561WC.0001
128. kg
0
W.N. * ASTM A105N (NORMALIZED) * ASME B16.5 * 300# * RF * 125 - 250 AARH * General Notes: SEE
001 2" SCH. STD 4 4 ... 16.4 kg

Unique Code : 561Wb.0003
16.4 kg
kg
..\QRP\FLD061_2.qrp Printed on: 14-07-2015 09:16:35 AM Page 1 of 2 AMUSE

Shortage Summary
Contract : 1BD0711A Project : OPTARA PROJECT - Lot 3A
Missing Available SHORTAGE Shortage Weight

1511G/02 Cast Carbon Steel Valves: Gate Type
ASTM A216 WCB * API 600 / EN ISO 10434 * ASME B16.10 * BOLTED BONNET * 150# * RF * 125 - 250
AARH * FLEXIBLE WEDGE, O.S. & Y. * API TRIM N.5 (FULL HARDFACED) * ASTM A193 Gr.B7 / ASTM
A194 Gr.2H * SPIRAL WOUND SS316L / GRAPHITE * GRAPHITE PACKING * General Note: SEE
002 3" 1 1 ... 35.0 kg

Unique Code : 511GA.0035 HANDWHEEL OPERATOR *
35.0 kg

ASTM A217 WC6 * API 600 / EN ISO 10434 * ASME B16.10 - LONG PATTERN * PRESSURE SEAL
BONNET * 900# * B.W. * * PARALLEL SEATS, FREE EXPANDABLE DOUBLE WEDGE, O.S. & Y. * API
TRIM N.5 (FULL HARDFACED) * ASTM A193 Gr.B16 / ASTM A194 Gr.7 * ACCORDING TO
MANUFACTURER STD * GRAPHITE PACKING * General Note: ALL WELDS ON THE VALVE SHALL BE
PWHT'ED; SEE ATTACHED JOB SPEC. 51A1. *
004 16" SCH. 80 1 1 ... 2,725.0 kg

Unique Code : 513GE.AAAH GEAR OPERATOR STYLE N * VALVE
SHALL BE EQUIPPED WITH BYPASS AND PRESSURE EQUALIZATION
DEVICE ACCORDING TO GS RM PVA
203 § 4.9. *
2,725.0 kg
1551E/03 Carbon Steel BW Fittings: Non-Reducing
ASTM A234 WPB * 90 DEGREES ELBOW LONG RADIUS * ASME B16.9 * SMLS * B.W. * General Notes:
SEE ATTACHED JOB SPEC. 50A10/2. *
006 6" SCH. STD 10 10 ... 102.0 kg

Unique Code : 551EF.0012
102. kg
0
1551W/04 Carbon Steel BW Fittings: Reinforcing Branches
ASTM A105N (NORMALIZED) * NIPOLET * MSS SP-97 * P.E. * General Notes: SEE ATTACHED JOB
SPEC. 50A10/2. *
039 1-1/2" SCH. XXS 6" 2 2 ... 2.4 kg

Unique Code : 551Wf.0002
2.4 kg
1561B/02 Carbon Steel Flanges: Blind

ASTM A350 LF2 Cl.1 * ASME B16.5 * 300# * RF * 125 - 250 AARH * General Notes: SEE ATTACHED JOB
SPEC. 50A10/3. *
005 12" 1 1 ... 84.0 kg

Unique Code : 561BC.0002
84.0 kg

W.N. * ASTM A350 LF2 Cl.1 * ASME B16.5 * 300# * RF * 125 - 250 AARH * General Notes: SEE ATTACHED
JOB SPEC. 50A10/3. *
010 12" SCH. STD 2 2 ... 128.0 kg

Unique Code : 561WC.0001
128. kg
0
W.N. * ASTM A105N (NORMALIZED) * ASME B16.5 * 300# * RF * 125 - 250 AARH * General Notes: SEE
001 2" SCH. STD 4 4 ... 16.4 kg

Unique Code : 561Wb.0003
16.4 kg
kg
..\QRP\FLD061_2.qrp Printed on: 14-07-2015 09:16:35 AM Page 1 of 2 AMUSE

CBD Date / Checked
Site Designer
Material
Preservation Pag/Pag. 1 din/from 25
Site Material Preservation

CONSTRUCTION
M.Rizzo M.Mandelli DWG. REV. DATE
04
03
02
01
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
AMEC FOSTER
ITALIANA S.r.l. 7 3 8 7 8 1 X 0 0 - X 3 2 2 0 0
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 30 31 80
Via S. Caboto, 15
20094 Corsico
(Milano) ITALY
doc.
Site Material Preservation
PAGE : 2 of 25
REV. : C00
SITE MATERIAL PRESERVATION
CONTENTS
I. SCOPE
II. SUBJECT
III. DEFINITION
IV. REFERENCE
V. PROCEDURE
VI. RECORDS
VII. ATTACHMENTS
AUTHORISATION.
PAGE : 3 of 25
REV. : C00
I. SCOPE
This Job Specification the codes and documents referenced presents

guidelines for the on-site maintenance, inspection and preservation of all
equipment and materials supplied for installation on the Project by
Contractors. In addition, Specialist Vendors, particularly machinery,
electrical and instrumentation, will provide specific preservation criteria.
These will be advised in due course with issue of the respective Vendors
maintenance and instruction manuals/details.
Contractor will be required to implement preservation activities contained

herein, considering that the final requirements according to Vendor
instructions / recommendations for some items may differ in certain
respects. Contractor employed by Amec FW will be required to develop
more detailed control procedures to supplement the guidelines contained
to provide verification that all preservation activities are being performed
correctly and in a timely manner.
Where it is considered that the requirements of this Site Work Instruction

do conflict with Vendor instructions / recommendations, it shall be brought to
the attention of Amec FW Field Supervision / Engineering who shall
resolve as appropriate.
II. SUBJECT
This procedure is for the on-site maintenance, inspection and preservation

of equipment and materials.
III. DEFINITION
The following terms will be defined as stated for the purpose of

performing works described or referenced in this Site Work Instruction:
Maintenance To keep in proper or good

condition.
Inspection Actual physical examination of item(s) for

checking compliance to stated requirements.
Preservation To protect by the implementation of appropriate

activities prior to Start-Up.
AUTHORISATION.
PAGE : 4 of 25
REV. : C00
IV. REFERENCE
Reference documentations for this procedure are as

follows:
– 1BD0955C-07A2.00 Construction QC
requirements
– Discipline Amec FW Job Specifications as listed in Contract
Requisitions;
– Vendor installation and maintenance
instructions/recommendations.
V. PROCEDURE
The maintenance, inspection and preservation of equipment will be

performed generally according to the following sections, however actual
requirements will be according to Vendors instructions and Project
documents Inspection and Maintenance Records (Form D-151/A, see
attachment 1), will be developed accordingly for each item.
V.1 Preservation and maintenance following issue to

Contractor
Upon receipt of materials and equipment, the Contractor shall be

responsible to carry out the preservation activities arranging all
supervision, labour and materials as necessary. In addition, where
required, the Contractor must provide suitable on-site facilities as
required in place of the Amec FW Warehouse facilities.
Should materials or equipment be issued directly upon receipt to

the Contractor as is generally the case for larger vessels etc. the
Contractor must commence all preservation activities accordingly.
All record Cards listing preservation requirements and frequency

of implementation will be passed to the Contractor by Amec FW letter.
V.2 Hand-over of preservation and maintenance

records
At Mechanical Completion the respective Contractor shall return

all completed Record Cards to Amec FW Project Quality Coordinator.
V.3 Preservation and maintenance of materials provided by Amec

FW Contractors
Materials provided by Amec FW Contractors will be maintained

according to vendors’ instructions and any appropriate guidelines
contained herein. Contractors will be required to develop control
procedures to provide verification that all preservation activities are
AUTHORISATION.
PAGE : 5 of 25
REV. : C00
being performed correctly and in a timely manner and that shelf life
is not being exceeded.
V.4 Use and Application of Rust Preventatives
All interior and exterior surfaces shall be clean and dry before any rust
preventative materials are applied. Mineral spirits such as VARSOL
or any Stoddard solvent shall be used for cleaning of surfaces prior
to application of any rust preventative compounds. Kerosene or
gasoline or similar product shall not be used as cleaning agents.
The rust preventatives referred to herein are compounds with

properties as given below. Equivalent materials with brand names
recommended by a consultant or representative from a Vendor of
rust preventatives may be substituted with approval of Amec FW Field
Engineering Manager/Field Project Engineer.
Typical properties of rust preventative compounds are tabled

as follows:
PROPERTIES LUBE COMPATIBLE EXTERIOR
General description 300 SSU/100°F Rust

preventative Oil type
Coverage m2/l 22 10
Application temp °F 70 - 80
70 - 75
Method of application Dip, Spray, Swab, Dip, Spray, Brush
Brush
Drying time Does not dry 1.5 hours
Dry film thickness N/A 4 min - 16 max
mils
Number of coats N/A One
Method of removal Varsol or Stoddard Varsol or
Stoddard
solvent solvent
AUTHORISATION.
PAGE : 6 of 25
REV. : C00
The LUBE COMPATIBLE type shall be used as

follows:
1 This is a very highly refined pure naphthenic mineral oil which

does not normally require removal before placing equipment into
service (unless lube oil in any amount cannot be tolerated).
However each case shall be subject to pre-commissioning
requirements.
2 It is to be applied by brushing, splashing or spraying, as well as
through lubricating systems. In cases where there are internal
crevices or areas of restricted access, spraying should be used.
3 Dismantling of equipment is not necessary. However, since the
oil film can be easily damaged, and can drain off, it shall be
inspected and checked for contamination and renewed as
necessary. It shall be used for bearing and internal surfaces.
4 Equipment protected with it shall be turned over weekly to
keep bearings and other critical surfaces coated.
The EXTERIOR type shall be used as

follows:
1 Use for exterior surfaces. It does not have lubricating

properties.
Before placing protected parts in service, the film shall be
removed from bearing surfaces, threads or areas that will come
in contact with lubricants.
2 Coatings shall be inspected at two month intervals and shall
be renewed if there are any large breaks in the film.
V.5 Treatment of Piping Connections (On Receipt)
Check all protection at piping connections. If damaged remove

flange covers/caps from supplier prefabricated piping, valves, vessels,
exchangers and other equipment.
Inspect, check and, if necessary, clean flange faces with solvent,

remove rust and repair any damage, and coat them with a rust
proof spray.
Replace flange covers/caps, attaching them

securely.
Contractors and Field Construction should note that precautions

must be taken to remove all protective coatings before seal welding
screwed joints.
CAUTION - Seal welding may only be carried out if specified and
approved by the respective Vendor.
AUTHORISATION.
PAGE : 7 of 25
REV. : C00
V.6 Protection of Mechanical Equipment (On Receipt)
Unpack and check equipment and accessories received against

requisition and packing lists.
Label with service

symbol.
Remove all accessories not crated separately and store, plainly

marked, with reference to the equipment they belong to, until
equipment itself is required for erection.
Indoor storage may be required for some accessories even though the
general category of equipment may allow outdoor storage, where any
doubts exist the item shall be inspected by Amec FW Field
Engineers. Additional preservation and maintenance requirements shall
be given in writing if different to the general requirements herein.
Protect piping connections in accordance with

above.
All equipment shipped with protective covers or plugs over

openings and with applied rust preventive coatings on exterior
machined and threaded surfaces shall be examined on arrival at
worksite and:
1 Protective covers, plugs and coatings shall be renewed if not

intact.
2 If water or dirt has entered the equipment through damaged or
improperly secured covers and plugs, the equipment shall be
cleaned before covers, plugs and coatings are restored.
V.7 Vapour Phase Inhibitors
If Vapour Phase Inhibitors or desiccants are used to protect the

interiors of mechanical equipment, the vapour seals shall be
examined when the equipment is received at the Work Site. Any
damaged vapour seals shall be repaired or replaced, and the inhibitor
or desiccant renewed if necessary.
Vapour seals shall be protected until the equipment is serviced

for Start-Up. Any damage to seals prior to such time shall be
immediately repaired.
Inhibitor shall be renewed at the time intervals specified by the

Vendor.
AUTHORISATION.
PAGE : 8 of 25
REV. : C00
Where Vapour Phase Inhibitors have been used, all work shall
be carried out following Vendor's instructions.
The initial examination and subsequent checks shall be recorded

on the Inspection/Maintenance record card.
V.8 Stainless Steel
Stainless steel (alloys containing more than 10% chromium)

equipment, components and materials shall be protected as follows:
Undercove
r
Not in contact with the soil or with porous supports such as raw wood.
In addition, austenitic stainless steels (3** series) shall not be
exposed
to salt water or salt spray. These materials must not be stored in open
areas including warehouse yards within 500 meters of the sea.
This applies particularly to storage at Contractors facilities during
fabrication.
Maintained in a separate storage area away from Carbon Steel

and galvanised materials.
V.9 Rotating equipment
Rotating equipment will normally be delivered to site packed

adequately to be stored for a short period (6 months) without
unpacking.
The packaging shall be inspected to ensure that no damage has

occurred during shipment and initial handling on site. If packaging
has been disturbed in any way for inspection by Customs or any other
party or there is any suspicion of damage to the packaging, the
preservation activities described below shall be carried out with due
haste.
After equipment is moved to final service location, the connecting

pipework shall be positively blinded with gaskets on both sides of
the blind.
Blinds made solely of gasket material are not

acceptable.
Blinds made from thin, soft material are preferred during the
installation period.
AUTHORISATION.
PAGE : 9 of 25
REV. : C00
Test or Flushing Blinds may replace the thinner installation blinds, but
at all times the equipment shall remain protected from connected
pipework until the lines have been cleaned during pre-commissioning.
Then removing or changing blinds, great care shall be exercised

to ensure that debris from inside the pipe does not drop into the
equipment.
After installation at their final service location, turbines, centrifugal

fans, gear unit cases, agitators, centrifugal pumps and centrifugal
compressors shall be protected as follows:
1 Coat all internal surfaces of bearing housing and gear unit

cases with LUBE COMPATIBLE preservative. Vent and drain
connections shall be plugged, capped or blinded, as applicable,
using steel fittings. Blinds shall be gasketed. The internal surfaces
shall be re- coated periodically. All such activities will be performed
according to Vendor instruction/recommendation.
2 Clean shaft couplings and exposed machined surfaces and
coat them with EXTERIOR preservative.
Spare rotating elements shall be stored indoors as per the

Vendor's recommendations.
V.10 Centrifugal Pumps, Gear Cases - Storage
The following activities are to be performed after 6 months from

the shipping date ex-works:
Flush bearing housings and gear cases with solvent until clean
according to Vendor instruction/recommendation.
Fill with LUBE COMPATIBLE preservative to the shaft level until

all internal surfaces are coated.
Turn shaft several revolutions to apply protective film uniformly to

ensure shaft and bearings.
Clean shaft coupling and exposed machined surface with solvent

and coat them with EXTERIOR preservative.
AUTHORISATION.
PAGE : 10 of 25
REV. : C00
If pump is shipped with proper service packing installed, remove

and repack with wax or oil impregnated soft packing, or with wicking
dipped in oil.
Do not use packing containing

graphite.
If pump is shipped with mechanical seals installed, fill the entire

pump with LUBE COMPATIBLE preservative according to Vendor
instruction
/
recommendation.
If mechanical seal are integral with the pump, the entire pump shall be
filled with oil unless it is protected by a vapour phase inhibitor.
V.11 Centrifugal Pumps, Gear Cases - After Equipment is moved

to Final Service Location
Install copper bonds between shaft and casing and other

ungrounded parts, of major equipment items. This will prevent
damage in the event of an accidental welding ground or strike. In
general, 75 KW or larger units require this protection. Bond may be of
a length of welding cable, attached to the shaft, or ungrounded part,
with a suitable clamp.
Fill vertical pumps with oil according to Vendor

instruction/recommendation.
V.12 Centrifugal Pumps, Gear Cases - Periodic Services

between Receipt and Start-Up
According to Vendor instructions, turn Shafts several revolutions.

Shafts to be marked if no key is cut. The shaft shall be rotated a
5/4 revolutions weekly and the position of the mark or key logged,
e.g. 12 o'clock, 3 o'clock, etc. Do not use tools that will grip or mark
shafts or equipment.
After rotation, the shaft should come to rest on a different part of
the shaft circumference and check the case for water after each
rotation.
Drain any water from bearing housings and gear cases and add oil to
proper level.
If rust preventative becomes dirty or contaminated with water,

drain, flush with solvent, and fill with oil.
AUTHORISATION.
PAGE : 11 of 25
REV. : C00
V.13 Centrifugal Compressors and Blowers
In general, this class of equipment requires the same protective

procedures as centrifugal pumps. Sections V.9, V.10 and V.11 refer.
In addition the following should be considered:
If vapour phase inhibitor has been sealed in the casing by the

Vendor, the vapour seals on casing opening shall be inspected when
equipment is received on site.
Spare rotating elements shall be stored in accordance with the

Vendor's recommendations.
All rotating elements shall be supported properly by Vendor for

shipping and storage.
V.14 Reciprocating Pumps - Storage

Coat exposed rods, eccentrics, plungers and machined surfaces

with solvent and coat them with EXTERIOR preservative.
If chains are exposed remove them, coat with oil, wrap in Kraft
paper, label for identification and store with accessories.
If pump is shipped with proper service packing installed, remove

and repack with wax or oil impregnated soft packing, or with wicking
dipped in oil.
Do not use packing containing

graphite.
Fill steam and liquid cylinders and valve chambers with LUBE
COMPATIBLE preservative.
Flush drive mechanisms of proportioning and metering pumps with

solvent according to Vendor instruction/recommendation until clean.
Fill with LUBE COMPATIBLE preservative until all internal surfaces
are coated. The internal surfaces shall be re-coated at one-month
intervals.
AUTHORISATION.
PAGE : 12 of 25
REV. : C00
V.15 Reciprocating Pumps - Periodic Services between Receipt

and Start-Up
According to Vendors instructions, turn shafts of proportioning and

metering pumps several revolutions.
Do not use tools that will grip or mark shafts or

equipment.
Drain any water from crankcase of proportioning and metering

pumps, and add oil to proper level.

drain, flush with solvent and fill with oil.
Check level and add oil if necessary to cylinders and valve chambers
of all pumps.
Inspect coatings of rust proof spray and renew if

necessary.
V.16 Reciprocating Compressors - Storage
This equipment may require a similar method of preservation as

that applied to reciprocating pumps, however preservation must be
performed according to Vendor instruction/recommendation.
Protective covers on openings in the cylinders and crankcase shall

be inspected when compressor is received on site.
to inspect and recommend any other corrective

action.
If water or dirt gets into the equipment through damaged opening

covers, the equipment shall be cleaned out and rust preventative
treatment restored.
If vapour phase inhibitor has been sealed in the cylinders and

crankcase by the Vendor, the vapour seals on any openings shall
be protected and damage repaired immediately, until compressor is
serviced for Start-Up.
AUTHORISATION.
PAGE : 13 of 25
REV. : C00
V.17 Reciprocating Compressors - After Equipment is moved to

Final Service Location
Install copper bonds between shaft and casing and other

ungrounded parts of major equipment items. This will prevent damage
in the event of an accidental welding ground or strike. In general, 75
KW or larger units require this protection. Bond may be a length of
welding cable, attached to the shaft, or ungrounded section with a
suitable clamp.
If the compressor requires field assembly, remove protective

coatings from cylinders, rods, etc. and clean all parts, including
crankcase, with solvent.
Assemble, using LUBE COMPATIBLE preservative freely on

cylinder walls rods, bearings and rubbing parts.
Do not install carbon piston rings, rod packing or the valves until
the compressor is serviced for initial operation.
Fill crankcase and lubricators with

oil.
This work should be done under the supervision of Vendor's

representative.
V.18 Reciprocating Compressors - Periodic Services

between Assembly and Start-Up
According to Vendor instructions, crank force feed lubricator and

open drip feed lubricators.
If compressor has manual main oil pump, operate for at least

one minute. If not, follow Vendor instructions/recommendations.
Turn crankshaft two
revolutions. Close dripfeed
lubricators.
Refill lubricators as
necessary.
Drain any water from crankcase and add oil to proper

level.
drain crankcase, flush with solvent and oil fill.
AUTHORISATION.
PAGE : 14 of 25
REV. : C00
A small amount of LUBE COMPATIBLE preservative shall be

sprayed into each compressor cylinder through valve openings.
Additional RUST-BAN 357 shall be sprayed into the cylinders each
time the crankshaft is rotated, in accordance with the Vendor's
recommendations and instructions. For non-lubricated cylinders
preservation must be performed according to Vendor instruction /
recommendation.
V.19 Hoists, Mixers and Miscellaneous Rotating Equipment - Storage

Flush oil lubricated bearing housings and gear cases with solvent
until clean.
Fill with oil to the level of the

shaft.
Turn shaft several revolutions to apply protective film uniformly to

entire shaft and bearings.
Clean shafts, couplings and exposed machined surfaces with

solvent and coat them with EXTERIOR preservative.
If chains are exposed, remove them, coat with storage

preservative, wrap in Kraft paper, label for identification and store with
accessories.
V.20 Hoists, Mixers and Miscellaneous Rotating Equipment -

Periodic Services between Receipt and Start-Up
According to Vendor instructions, turn shafts of oil lubricating

equipment several revolutions.
Do not use tools that will grip or mark shafts or

equipment.
Drain any water from oil lubricated bearing housing and gear cases
and add oil to proper level.

drain, flush with solvent and fill with oil.
Inspect coatings of rust proof spray and renew if

necessary.
AUTHORISATION.
PAGE : 15 of 25
REV. : C00
V.21 Internal Combustion Engines

In general, this class of equipment requires the same protective

procedures as reciprocating pumps and compressors.
Electrical accessories such as magnetos, which can be damaged

by moisture, shall be stored in a dry place where condensation or
humidity will not occur.
Spark plugs and fuel injection nozzles shall be removed, and the
openings in each cylinder plugged. A small amount of LUBE
COMPATIBLE preservative shall be sprayed into each cylinder,
through the spark plug or injection nozzle openings. Additional
preservative shall be sprayed into the cylinders each time the
crankshaft is rotated, in accordance with the Vendor's
recommendations and instructions.
V.22 General Protection of electrical equipment
Unpack and check equipment and accessories received against

requisitions and packing lists.
Label with service

symbol.
If accessories have to be removed from the equipment packaging

they shall be plainly marked, as to equipment to which they
belong, and stored separately until equipment is serviced for operation.
If space heaters are furnished within the equipment, they shall be
connected to a continuous source of power of the proper rating.
V.23 Motors and Generators - Storage Conditions
Indoor storage is required for all motors and generators except

motors designed for outdoor use, which may be stored outdoors
without protective covering. These generally are XP, TE, TEWAC
motors, but in special cases where they are designed for indoor use
only, they shall be stored indoors. Other motors may be stored
outdoors if protective covering, good ventilation, is furnished.
AUTHORISATION.
PAGE : 16 of 25
REV. : C00
For motors and electric motor operated valve actuators stored

outdoors without protective cover, the following shall be observed:
1 All enclosure openings not intended to be open during operation

of the equipment, such as conduit and cable entrance in terminal
boxes, shall be closed with water tight plugs. Temporary
shipping plugs shall be replaced with permanent storage plugs.
2 All motors and valve actuators shall be stored in their normal
operating position, e.g. vertical motors in an upright position
with their shaft extension downward.
If space heaters are furnished within the units, they shall be

connected to a continuous supply of power of the proper rating.
Insulation resistance values of each winding shall be measured

and recorded. This shall be done as soon as possible after a unit
arrives at the Work Site.

Remove brushes from holders, label for identification, and store

with accessories in a dry, warm place where condensation will not
occur.
Coat collector rings on AC units with
Vaseline. Do not coat or oil commutators of
DC units.
If unit has grease lubricated bearings, rotate shaft several

revolutions, but do not add grease.
If protection is not considered adequate or has deteriorated, then

clean shaft coupling and exposed machine surfaces with solvent
and coat them with a rust proof spray.
V.24 Motors and Generators - After Equipment is moved to

Final Service Location
Install copper bond between shaft and frame, and other

ungrounded parts. This will prevent damage in the event of an
accidental welding ground or strike. In general, 75 KW or larger
units require this protection. Bond may be a length of welding
cable, attached to the shaft, or other ungrounded part, with a suitable
clamp.
AUTHORISATION.
PAGE : 17 of 25
REV. : C00
Motors with oil lubricated bearings and a-c motors and generators
with collector rings shall be protected as follows:
1 Oil lubricated bearings - Coat all internal surfaces of bearing

housing with LUBE COMPATIBLE preservative. Vent and drain
connections shall be plugged, capped or blinded, as applicable,
using steel fittings. The internal surfaces shall be re-coated
(by filling, filling and draining, flushing, spraying, or rotation, as
appropriate) at one month intervals.
2 Collector Rings - Applied protective coatings shall be examined
and renewed if not intact.
V.25 Motors and Generators - Periodic Services between Receipt

and Commissioning
According to Vendor instructions, turn shafts several revolutions.

Do not use tools that will grip or mark shafts.
Drain any water from oil lubricated bearings and gear cases, and
add oil to proper level.

drain, flush with solvent, and fill with oil.
If unit has a drain plug, remove, drain any condensate, and

replace plug.
Every two months or according to Vendor instructions, drain oil

lubricated bearings and gear cases, flush with solvent, and fill with oil.
Every three months, or according to Vendor instructions, measure

and record insulation resistance values of each winding of units rated
220 volts and higher. Record temperature and weather condition at
time of reading. If resistance is low and cables have been
connected, disconnect cables and repeat measurements.
If resistance of winding insulation only is low, dry out leads in
unit terminal box by removing cover and exposing to dry, clear
weather, or by placing an electric lamp or heater in terminal box. If
this does not result in acceptable insulation resistance values, dry out
windings by an approved method until acceptable values are obtained.
AUTHORISATION.
PAGE : 18 of 25
REV. : C00
Six weeks before commissioning, measure and record insulation

resistance values of each winding of all units. Record temperature
and weather condition at time of reading. If resistance is low, proceed
as in previous paragraph.
Immediately before commissioning, perform the

following:
1 Measure and record insulation values of all units with cables

connected. If readings are low, dry out before starting.
2 Clean protective coatings from collector ring
surfaces.
3 Clean surfaces of commutators per Vendor's
instructions.
If grease lubricated units are on site more than one year from date
of shipment from factory without being operated, inspect bearing
grease. If there has been any deterioration of the lubrication
properties of the grease, clean out and repack bearings in accordance
with the Vendor's recommendations.
V.26 Transformers
Indoor storage is required for all transformers, except those

intended for outdoor installation which may be stored outdoors without
protective covering.
Drums of insulating liquid may be stored outdoors without

protective covering if laid on side with the bungs horizontal.
Do not leave drums in upright

position.
Immediately upon receipt of transformers at site, inspect the ‘’Impact-

a- graph’’ and, if value is outwith that specified, advise and arrange
for qualified inspections to ascertain fully any damage and / or
remedial actions.
Inspect the transformer tank for dents and any signs of oil leakage
as soon as transformer arrives on site. Arrange for any leaks to be
repaired.
In the first instance disconnect switches shall be handled per the

requirements for Switchgear, starters and control equipment.
Remove protective covers from insulators and inspect thoroughly

for cracks or chips.
AUTHORISATION.
PAGE : 19 of 25
REV. : C00
Replace protective covers, or repack in shipping crates, to prevent

damage in storage.
If transformer is shipped with main tank filled with insulating

liquid, except for expansion space, measure and record level and
ambient temperature when unit arrives on site and every month
afterwards. If level falls, search for leaks and repair if necessary and
add insulating liquid to keep level within tolerances.
If transformer is shipped with main tank filled with insulating liquid

and blanketed with gas under pressure, or filled with gas under
pressure, measure and record gas pressure and ambient temperature
when unit arrives on site and every month thereafter. If pressure falls,
search for leaks and add gas to keep pressure within tolerances.
If transformers are fitted with silica gel absorbers, they shall be

inspected weekly and re-inhibited as necessary.
Equipment received at site filled with insulating oil may need to

be crackle tested (Dielectric withstand test). Consult Vendor
instructions / recommendations.
All drums of insulating oil for topping or filling of equipment should
be similarly tested.
V.27 Switchgear, Starters, Control Equipment
Indoor storage of Switchgear, starters and control equipment is

required.
Equipment shall be stored in a dry place where condensation due

to humidity will not occur. The same conditions shall be ensured
inside pre-assembled or constructed substations prior to installation.
There shall be good ventilation of the
shelter.
In humid conditions, it may be necessary to remove the equipment

from shipping cases to permit ventilation and to avoid mildew
Free standing metal enclosed equipment such as Switchgear,

motor control centres, etc. shall be stored in an upright position.
If space heaters are furnished with the equipment, they shall be

connected to a continuous source of power of proper rating.
AUTHORISATION.
PAGE : 20 of 25
REV. : C00
Oil immersed starters, circuit breakers and similar items which are
shipped dry shall be stored indoors, or shall be filled with insulating
liquid as soon as they are received at Work Site. Units filled with liquid
may be stored outdoors if raised above grade to prevent any
damage from surface water and if a shed roof and tarpaulin siding
(or equivalent) are provided.
According to Vendor instructions, make spot checks on insulation

resistance values of such parts as operating coils, using a Megger. If
readings are low, dry out the affected parts by an approved
method before placing in position.
Equipment received at site filled with insulating oil may need to

be crackle tested (dielectric withstand test). Consult Vendor
instructions / recommendations.
All drums of insulating oil for topping up or filling of equipment

should be similarly tested.
V.28 Storage of Batteries
Batteries shall be stored in accordance with the Vendor's

instruction, normally indoors in a dry place, where condensation will not
occur.
The storage location shall not be in active areas where the

fragile cases may be broken accidentally when handling materials.
Inspect the seals on batteries that have been shipped dry when they
are received at the Work Site. Any damaged seals shall be renewed
in accordance with Vendor's instructions.
Nickel-cadmium batteries and lead-acid batteries that have been

shipped dry do not require maintenance.
Inspect electrolyte level in lead acid batteries that have been

shipped wet. Add electrolyte to proper level if any has been lost.
Lead acid batteries that have been shipped wet shall be handled
per the Vendor's instructions.
Other type batteries that have been shipped wet shall be handled
per the Vendor's instructions.
AUTHORISATION.
PAGE : 21 of 25
REV. : C00
V.29 Protection of instrumentation and other electrical equipment
Indoor storage of instrument equipment is

required.
According to Project requirements, special instrument components

shall be stored in a humidity controlled place where condensation
will not occur.
Where high relative humidity, or large, rapid changes in

temperature are experienced, air conditioning shall be used to
maintain the temperature in the instrument storage shelter about 23°C.
Potentiometers shall never be exposed to temperature below 0°C

or above 52°C.
In humid conditions, it may be necessary to remove instruments

from shipping cases to permit ventilation and prevent mildew on
electrical insulation.
Prefabricated panel boards shall be left in their shipping cases

until moved into the control house.
V.30 Instrument Installation Outdoor
Instruments, controllers, control valves, motor actuators etc. installed

in outdoor locations must be covered with a strong weatherproof
material securely fastened immediately on the installation. Silica-gel
bags shall be replaced as necessary on routine check. Wood covers
over glass- fronts should also be fitted.
Instrument air supply headers and branch lines shall be blown

out thoroughly before connecting to consumers.
Instruments shall be protected while the unit is being

painted.
V.31 Valves
Indoor storage shall be provided for all valves except the

following:
1 Manually operated valves size 3" NPS or larger may be

stored outdoors on hard standing or on pallets,laid on their side or
with the valve stem upright.
AUTHORISATION.
PAGE : 22 of 25
REV. : C00
2 Large automatic control valves such as slide valves and

motor operated valves may be stored outdoors on a paved area,
or on pallets, if a shed roof and tarpaulin siding (or equivalent) are
provided. Actuators on control valves and motor operated
valves shall be protected against mechanical damage.
All valves shall be stored in the closed

position.
As soon as possible after receipt on site, remove all flange

covers, inspect, check and if necessary, clean the flange faces with
solvent and coat them with a rust proof spray. Replace flange
covers, attaching them securely, and renew those in poor condition.

the shipping date ex-works (Form D-151/B, see attachment 2):
Inspect valve stems, clean them well with solvent and coat them with
a rust proof spray as necessary.
Plug any open threaded connections with threaded plastic plugs

or caps.
Every month, coatings or rust preventatives must be inspected

and renewed if necessary.
V.32 Pipe and fittings
The preservation of pipe and fittings will be inspected on a weekly

basis to ensure storage has been maintained (Form D-151/C, see
attachment 3), i.e.:
1 Pipe will be stored in an open laydown area off the ground. In

addition stainless steel pipe will be maintained according to
section 5.8.
2 Fittings larger than 2’’ nb will be stored in an open area off
the ground. In addition stainless steel fittings will be maintained
according to section V.8.
3 Fittings 2’’ and smaller shall be maintained in covered
storage.
Cement-lined pipe and fittings shall have potable/distilled water

introduced on a weekly basis to prevent the lining from drying out
excessively and cracking. A weekly inspection shall be performed
to detect any line deterioration/cracking. In accordance with AWWA
C205
AUTHORISATION.
PAGE : 23 of 25
REV. : C00
only cracks greater than 1/16’’ shall be subject to remedial works

providing the lining has not detached from the pipe wall.
V.33 Fabricated Pipe (Spools)
Spools will be protected by means of plastic end caps or wood

discs across flanges. These shall provide protection of weld bevels as
well as preventing the ingress of foreign matter. Spools will be
stored off the ground on wooden dunnage or similar.
Cement-lined spools shall have potable/distilled water introduced on

a weekly basis to prevent the lining from drying out excessively
and cracking. A weekly inspection shall be performed to detect any
line deterioration/cracking. In accordance with AWWA C205 only
cracks greater than 1/16’’ shall be subject to remedial works
providing the lining has not detached from the pipe wall.
V.34 Fabricated Structure
Fabricated galvanised structure shall be maintained in an open

laydown area off the ground away from stainless steel materials.
V.35 Heat Exchangers
When the exchangers are free standing in the storage yard, care
must be taken to ensure their stability, this is especially so for double
exchanges which have been works assembled.
If nozzle protection or bundle flange seals are damaged remedial

action should be taken according to section V.5.
After 6 months from the shipping date ex-works, visible threads of

stud bolts shall be coated with a rust proof spray.
Exchangers under nitrogen blanket shall have a nitrogen bottle

attached to a suitable valved connection. A pressure gauge shall
be fitted between the bottle and connection to allow regular
inspections to check that pressure is maintained. Pressure check
frequency will depend on volume contained, but will not be less than
once a fortnight
AUTHORISATION.
PAGE : 24 of 25
REV. : C00
V.36 Vessels
Vessels inspected at Works and boxed up shall not be opened

until after site installation.
If nozzle protection or manway seals are damaged remedial

action should be taken according to section V.4.
Vessels under nitrogen blanket shall have a nitrogen bottle attached
to a suitable valved connection. A pressure gauge shall be fitted
between the bottle and connection to allow regular inspections to
check that pressure is maintained. Pressure check frequency will
depend on volume contained, but will not be less than once a fortnight.
V.37 Insulation Materials
Pre-cast insulation and rockwool blanket shall be palletised and

stored under cover, protected from the overnight dew and subsequent
drying out in the sun. Particular care shall be taken to avoid the
absorption of condensation in rockwool insulation.
V.38 Refractory, cements and grout
Un-cast materials shall be checked upon receipt and again prior to

use to ensure the shelf life of the bagged material will not be/has not
been exceeded.
Un-cast materials shall be stored unopened, under cover, off the

ground and in a dry environment according to Vendors guidelines.
V.39 Welding Electrodes
When not issued to welders for use, electrodes must be stored at all
times according to manufacturers instructions and shelf life dates
in manufacturers sealed containers.
When required, electrodes will be prepared for use according to

manufacturers instructions including all ‘’bakin’’ and ‘’holding’’
duration’s.
When issued to the welder for use, appropriate temporary

‘’holding’’ means must be arranged. Portable electrically heated
quivers are the most convenient and suitable means. If used
electrodes should be
AUTHORISATION.
PAGE : 25 of 25
REV. : C00
issued sufficient for the works being performed in the respective

period and be issued directly in the quiver. The welder must return the
quiver when empty or is no longer required (i.e. at the end of the
working day) to the issuing stores for subsequent issue or de-
allocation. Returned electrodes must be destroyed if they will
exceed manufacturers ‘’holding’’ criteria.
V.40 Coatings and paints
Coatings and paints and associated products e.g. thinners,

cleaners etc. shall be maintained in manufacturers sealed containers
in a well ventilated area away from hot work areas.
Use by dates shall be periodically checked to ensure shelf life

dates have not been exceeded.
V.41 Special
cases
While this Site Work Instruction covers the majority of items and
preservation techniques used in petrochemical construction there
may be, depending upon the Project, circumstances or items which
require an additional or special form of preservation. These
circumstances must be highlighted by the respective Amec FW and
Client Discipline Engineers and Supervisors in advance of items
being received at site to ensure appropriate method(s) of preservation
can be arranged.
VI. RECORDS
All records of maintenance, inspection and preservation will be recorded

by equipment item on the pro forma reference MP FORM presented in the
following attachments:
VII. ATTACHMENTS
 Inspection and Maintenance Record (MP.001 FORM) (empty form)

 Inspection and Maintenance Record (MP.002 FORM) (valves form)
 Inspection and Maintenance Record (MP.003 FORM) (pipes, fittings and
flanges form)
AUTHORISATION.
Contract
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE RECORD
Date received Page of Client
REQUISITION NO.: TAG NO.: DESCRIPTION:

PERIOD
AMEC FW/VENDOR INSPECTION/MAINTENANCE ACTIVITY DATES PERFORMED
D/W/FM
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
NAME AND SIGNATURE VERIFYNG WORKS PERFORMED

MP.001 rev. 00
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE Contract Nr
RECORD VALVES Client
Plant
Date received Page of
PERIOD
D/W/FM
Actions to be performed starting after 6 months from shipping
date ex work
1 Inspect and clean valve steam Monthly
2 Rust cleaning and preservation Monthly
3 Replace plastic caps in poor conditions Monthly
Other Actions (to be specified):

4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

MP.002 rev. 00
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE RECORD Contract Nr
Pipes, fittings and flanges Client
Plant
Date received Page of
PERIOD
D/W/FM
1 Rolling to avoid deformation Monthly
2 Rust cleaning and preservation Monthly
3 Replace plastic caps in poor conditions Monthly
4 Introduce potable/distilled water if cemented inside Weekly
material
Other Actions (to be specified):

5
6
7
8
9
10
11

MP.003 rev. 00

Enclosure

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Enclosure

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

QUALITY CONTROL

TEST RECORDING, CONTROLS AND INSPECTION

STD No. STD Title Revision

CLIENT: OMV PETROM

SITE QUALITY CONTROL

AFWI DWG N°: BD0955A- Rev: C00 APPROVED FOR

Prepared Verified Approved

SITE QUALITY CONTROL

SITE QUALITY CONTROL - Preparation of

SITE QUALITY CONTROL - Preparation of

The scope of this procedure is to provide the user the minimum

 MECHANICAL COMPLETION (MC)

This section is not intended to be an exhaustive listing of all

1BD0874Z -07A2.00 Construction QC requirements

SITE QUALITY CONTROL - Preparation of

The MC philosophy is based on the identification of System &

Typical workflow is here below represented:

SITE QUALITY CONTROL - Preparation of

C) PIPING TEST PACKAGES FLOW CHART

SITE QUALITY CONTROL - Preparation of

D) DEFINITION OF TURNOVER SYSTEM NOT IDENTIFIED THROUGH

As far as noted some Systems (e.g. Roads, Steel Structure, Lighting

FWI QA/QC Coordinator will assign the Code directly at Site in

E) TURNOVER DOSSIER- DEFINITION A ND

On completion, the Contractor offers each System or Sub-System package

 System & Subsystem identified through a P&ID

 Welding Book (WPS, WPQR & PQR), NDT reports

Dossier as per a) and b) above should be prepared with following

SITE QUALITY CONTROL - Preparation of

Section Reference: Format

SITE QUALITY CONTROL - Preparation of

Section Reference: Format

SITE QUALITY CONTROL - Preparation of

Section Reference: Format

G) FILING SYSTEM FOR QC

Filing system to be in place

 Copies of applicable Job Specifications

The Responsibility of the above documentation is duty of: Field QC

The following is the suggested control matrix to make sure that

SITE QUALITY CONTROL - Preparation of

Items & recommended actions Responsibility Remark

I) FILING OF CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AT THE END OF THE

Documentation as per below matrix shall be sent to indicated dept.

ORIGINAL RETAINED BY DISCIPLINE

SITE QUALITY CONTROL - Preparation of

1.3 Discrepancy Close-Out C X

Turnover Dossier Cover pages (07A0.04-01)

AFWIContract: YYYYYY Client: XXXXX

Notice for Mechanical completion: 1.

Acceptance for Mechanical completion:

Notice for Ready for start-up:

TEST PACKAGE No: XX-ZZ-YY

AMECFWI Contract: YYYYYY Client: XXXXX

Check Mechanical NDT & Material Piping System Pipe Work

Pressure Vertical / Pressure

ACCEPTANCE RELATED TO: System:

APPROVED BY: CONTRACTOR AFWI CLIENT / TPI

Construction Quality Control Requirements

AFWI DWG N°: BD0955A-07A2.00 Rev: C00 APPROVED FOR

M. Rizzo M. Mandelli DWG. REV. DATE

Intreprindere/Client OMV PETROM Cod instalatie/ Plant code Orig. F

Construction Quality Control Requirements

DATE : 04 January 2018

CONSTRUCTION QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS